Loading...
AG 16-0271 1 RETURN TO: Mary J EXT: 6901 CITY OF FEDERAL WAY LAW DEPARTMENT ROUTING FORM 1. ORIGINATING DEPT. /DIV: PARKS 2. ORIGINATING STAFF PERSON: STEVE IKERD EXT: _6911 3. DATE REQ. BY: 4. TYPE OF DOCUMENT (CHECK ONE): ❑ CONTRACTOR SELECTION DOCUMENT (E.G., RFB, RFP, RFQ) ❑ SMALL OR LIMITED PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT ❑ MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT ❑ HUMAN SERVICES / CDBG ❑ SECURITY DOCUMENT (E.G. BOND RELATED DOCUMENTS) ❑ RESOLUTION ❑ INTERLOCAL ❑ PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT ❑ PROFESSIONAL SERVICE AGREEMENT ❑ GOODS AND SERVICE AGREEMENT ❑ REAL ESTATE DOCUMENT ❑ ORDINANCE X CONTRACT AMENDMENT (AG #):_16 -027 ❑ OTHER 5. PROJECT NAME: TOWN SQUARE PARK BUILDINGS 6. NAME OF CONTRACTOR: _AMERICAN GUARANTEED ROOFING & CONSTRUCTION ADDRESS: TELEPHONE E -MAIL: FAX: SIGNATURE NAME: MATTHEW SPEIGHTS TITLE 7. EXHIBITS AND ATTACHMENTS: ❑ SCOPE, WORK OR SERVICES ❑ COMPENSATION ❑ INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS /CERTIFICATE ❑ ALL OTHER REFERENCED EXHIBITS ❑ PROOF OF AUTHORITY TO SIGN ❑ REQUIRED LICENSES ❑ PRIOR CONTRACT/AMENDMENTS 8. TERM: COMMENCEMENT DATE: COMPLETION DATE: I2%/ll 1, 9. TOTAL COMPENSATION $339,997.72 + $14,733.23- $25,425.96 = $329,304.99 (INCLUDE EXPENSES AND SALES TAX, IF ANY) (IF CALCULATED ON HOURLY LABOR CHARGE - ATTACH SCHEDULES OF EMPLOYEES TITLES AND HOLIDAY RATES) REIMBURSABLE EXPENSE: ❑ YES ❑ NO IF YES, MAXIMUM DOLLAR AMOUNT: $ IS SALES TAX OWED ❑ YES ❑ NO IF YES, $ PAID BY: ❑ CONTRACTOR ❑ CITY RETAINAGE: RETAINAGE AMOUNT: ❑ RETAINAGE BY (SEE CONTRACT) OR ❑ RETAINAGE BOND PROVIDED ❑ PURCHASING: PLEASE CHARGE TO: 303 - 7100 - 131 - 594 -76 -650 10. DOCUMENT /CONTRACT REVIEW INITIAL / DATE REVIEWED INITIAL / DATE APPROVED ❑ PROJECT MANAGER ❑ DIRECTOR ❑ RISK MANAGEMENT (IF APPLICABLE) ❑ LAW 11. COUNCIL APPROVAL (IF APPLICABLE) COMMITTEE APPROVAL DATE: COUNCIL APPROVAL DATE: 12. CONTRACT SIGNATURE ROUTING ❑ SENT TO VENDOR/CONTRACTOR DATE SENT: DATE REC'D: ❑ ATTACH: SIGNATURE AUTHORITY, INSURANCE CERTIFICATE, LICENSES, EXHIBITS INITIAL / DATE SIGNED ❑ LAW DEPARTMENT ❑ CHIEF OF STAFF ❑ SIGNATORY (MAYOR OR DIRECTOR) ❑ CITY CLERK ❑ ASSIGNED AG# ❑ SIGNED COPY RETURNED COMMENTS: DATE SENT: c -6l -1(p EXHIBIT B CITY OF FEDERAL WAY CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER AGREEMENT Federal Way Town Square Park, Phase Four - Buildings 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S) -WA RFB # 15 -012 15 -012 02 July 18, 2016 PROJECT CHANGE ORDER EFFECTIVE DATE NUMBER NUMBER Federal Way Town Square Park Ph 4 American Guaranteed Roofing_ PROJECT TITLE CONTRACTOR SUMMARY OF PROPOSED CHANGES: Concrete deletion, electrical changes, epoxy bolts, sewer connection, Liquidated damages. The time provided for completion in the Contract is ® Unchanged ❑ Increased ❑ Decreased by Calendar Days. This Document shall become an Amendment to the Contract and all provisions of the Contract not amended herein will apply to this Change Order. Will this change affect expiration or extent of Insurance coverage? If "Yes" Will the Policies Be Extended? ❑ Yes ® No ❑ Yes ❑ No PRICE CHANGE LUMP SUM: INCREASE $ DECREASE $25,425.96 UNIT PRICE: ITEM NO. ITEM QUANTITY UNIT PRICE ADD OR DELETE See breakdown dated 7/1916 TOTAL NET CONTRACT: INCREASE $ DECREASE $25,425.96 STATEMENT: Payment for the above work will be in accordance with applicable portions of the standard specifications, and with the understanding that all materials, workmanship and measurements shall be in accordance with the provisions of the standard specifications, the contract plans, and the special provisions governing the types of construction. ' DIRECTOR/MANAGER 11(° CO NTRACTOR'S TE SIGNATURE City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 ATURE Page 1 RFB # 15 -012 2015 DEPARTMENT RECAP TO DATE: *Adjustments: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT $339,997.72 PREVIOUS CHANGE ORDERS $ 14,733.23 THIS CHANGE ORDER $ (25,425.96) *ADJUSTMENTS $ NEW CONTRACT AMOUNT $329,304.99 ADJUSTMENTS CHANGE ORDER ESTIMATE IS HEREBY PAY THIS ADJUSTED AMOUNT City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 ❑ INCREASED $ ❑ DECREASED $ $ DEPARTMENT DIRECTOR'S SIGNATURE Page 2 RFB # 15 -012 2015 I RETURN TO: EXT: CITY OF FEDERAL WAY LAW DEPARTMENT ROUTING FORM 1. ORIGINATING 2. ORIGINATING 4. TYPE ❑ CONTRACTOR ❑ PUBLIC ❑ PROFESSIONAL ❑ GOODS ❑ REAL ❑ ORDINANCE A CONTRACT ❑ OTHER 5. PROJECT 6. NAME 7. EXHIBITS 8. TERM: 9. TOTAL REIMBURSABLE IS SALES CITY ❑ PURCHASING: 10. DOCUMENT ❑ DIRECTOR ❑ RISK ❑ LAW 11. COUNCIL 12. CONTRACT ❑ SENT ❑ ATTACH: ❑ LAW 0 CHIEF ❑ SIGNATORY ❑ CITY ❑ ASSIGNED ❑ SIGNED COMMENTS: DEPT./DIV: Pe-- CkL-`j STAFF PERSON: C��1'r.tt_ -. _- \&. -Ctii EXT: 1...o G( 1) 3. DATE REQ. BY: OF DOCUMENT (CHECK ONE): SELECTION DOCUMENT (E.G., RFB, RFP, RFQ) WORKS CONTRACT ❑ SMALL OR LIMITED PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT SERVICE AGREEMENT ❑ MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT AND SERVICE AGREEMENT ❑ HUMAN SERVICES / CDBG ESTATE DOCUMENT ❑ SECURITY DOCUMENT (E.G. BOND RELATED DOCUMENTS) ❑ RESOLUTION AMENDMENT (AG #): it) -u-a.1 \ ❑ INTERLOCAL NAME: A ,Y 1 i.f.trc`" "Z---- C,,- ,t t.{..1 - " . I 4 OF CONTRACTOR: Amex; .e.. (..rai1.i.ri,,w -: CZ, " % V c, ."5-k - %■-v-.. ADDRESS: l TELEPHONE E -MAIL: FAX: SIGNATURE NAME: TITLE AND ATTACHMENTS: ❑ SCOPE, WORK OR SERVICES ❑ COMPENSATION ❑ INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS /CERTIFICATE ❑ ALL OTHER REFERENCED EXHIBITS ❑ PROOF OF AUTHORITY TO SIGN ❑ REQUIRED LICENSES ❑ PRIOR CONTRACT /AMENDMENTS COMMENCEMENT DATE: COMPLETION DATE: ., -1 ! �,-,z+ .-P .a35H,i30.94 -I COMPENSATION $ .)�7 1 114 1 ,9)- ° A 3 (INCLUDE EXPENSES AND SALES TAX, IF ANY) (IF CALCULATED ON HOURLY LABOR CHARGE - ATTACH SCHEDULES OF EMPLOYEES TITLES AND HOLIDAY RATES) EXPENSE: D YES ❑ NO IF YES, MAXIMUM DOLLAR AMOUNT: $ TAX OWED ❑ YES ❑ NO IF YES, $ PAID BY: ❑ CONTRACTOR ❑ PLEASE CHARGE TO: 3(3-110,431-51,1-11,- t, SO /CONTRACT REVIEW INITIAL / DATE REVIEWED INITIAL / DATE APPROVED ROJECT MANAGER 4 I/ ''5 II, Y/S fit, MANAGEMENT (IF APPLICABLE) APPROVAL (IF APPLICABLE) COMMITTEE APPROVAL DATE: COUNCIL APPROVAL DATE: SIGNATURE ROUTING TO VENDOR/CONTRACTOR DATE SENT: DATE REC'D: SIGNATURE AUTHORITY, INSURANCE CERTIFICATE, LICENSES, EXHIBITS INITIAL / DATE SIGNED DEPARTMENT OF STAFF (MAYOR OR DIRECTOR) CLERK ,1 1 . 1 ; ►e.,.a%:i�.- AG# AG# /f -021 " COPY RETURNED DATE SENT: ' * - //e 11/9 EXHIBIT B CITY OF FEDERAL WAY CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER AGREEMENT Federal Way Town Square Park, Phase Four - Buildings 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S) -WA RFB # 15 -012 RFB15 -012 01 March 28, 2016 PROJECT CHANGE ORDER EFFECTIVE DATE NUMBER NUMBER Town Square Park Phase 4 PROJECT TITLE SUMMARY OF PROPOSED CHANGES: AGR CONTRACTOR The time provided for completion in the Contract is ❑ Unchanged ® Increased ❑ Decreased by 2 Calendar Days. This Document shall become an Amendment to the Contract and all provisions of the Contract not amended herein will apply to this Change Order. Will this change affect expiration or extent of Insurance coverage? If "Yes" Will the Policies Be Extended? ❑ Yes ® No ❑ Yes ❑ No PRICE CHANGE LUMP SUM: INCREASE $13,455 + Tax UNIT PRICE: THE ITEMS ARE APPROXIMATE OR ESTIMATED QUANTITIES INVOLVED IN THIS CHANGE ITEM NO. ITEM QUANTITY UNIT PRICE ADD OR DELETE Export unsuitable soil off site, import structural fill at restroom building foundation. TOTAL NET CONTRACT: INCREASE $14,733.23 STATEMENT: Payment for the above work will be in accordance with applicable portions of the standard specifications, and with the understanding that all materials, workmanship and measurements shall be in accordance with the provisions of the standard specifications, the contract plans, and the special provjsions governing the types of construction. ■ CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURE City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 . DIRECTOR /MANAGER DATE SIGNATURE Page 17 RFB # 15 -012 2015 DEPARTMENT RECAP TO DATE: *Adjustments: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT PREVIOUS CHANGE ORDERS THIS CHANGE ORDER *ADJUSTMENTS NEW CONTRACT AMOUNT ADJUSTMENTS CHANGE ORDER ESTIMATE IS HEREBY PAY THIS ADJUSTED AMOUNT City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 7ARTMENT D $ 399,997.72 $ 0 $ 14,733.23 L $ 354,730.94 ❑ INCREASED $ ❑ DECREASED $ Page 18 OR'S SIGNATURE RFB # 15 -012 2015 JRN TO: EXT: CITY OF FEDERAL WAY LAW DEPARTMENT UTII\SOANNED ORIGINATING DEPT/DIV: PRCS / 2. ORIGINATING STAFF PERSON: .91 v ( 6 t EXT: 4. TYP F DOCUMENT (CHECK ONE): CONTRACTOR SELECTION DOCUMENT (E •PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT ❑ PROFESSIONAL SERVICE AGREEMENT ❑ GOODS AND SERVICE AGREEMENT ❑ REAL ESTATE DOCUMENT ❑ ORDINANCE ❑ CONTRACT AMENDMENT (AG #): ❑ OTHER .G., RFB, RFP, RFQ) 3. DATE REQ. BY: ❑ SMALL OR LIMITED PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT ❑ MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT ❑ HUMAN SERVICES / CDBG ❑ SECURITY DOCUMENT (E.G. BOND RELATED DOCUMENTS) ❑ RESOLUTION ❑ INTERLOCAL 6. NAME OF C 1 ►TRACTOR: ADDRESS: E -MAIL: SIGNATURE NAME: tA TELEPHONE: FAX: � � TITLE: r'�'' Z�`J 7. EXHIBITS AND ATTACHMENTS:.B'SCOPE, WORK OR SERVICES ❑ COMPENSATION ❑ INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS /CERTIFICATE ❑ ALL OTHER REFERENCED EXHIBITS PROOF OF AUTHORITY TO SIGN ❑ REQUIRp LICEN ES) ❑ PRIOR CONTRACT /AMENDMENTS CFW LICENSE # BL, EXP. 12/31/ UBI # li L 66 V , EXP. S /31 / 14 8. TERM: COMMENCEMENT DATE' }� u/ C- COMPLETION DATE: 110 ��( }1 "�L 9. TOTAL COMPENSATION: $ 3) 5� 2 } � ) y S� " (INCLUDE EXPENSES AND SALES TAX, Il9-ANI� (IF CALCULATED ON HOURLY LABOR CHARGE - ATTACH SCHEDULES OF EMPLOYEES TITLES AND HOLIDAY RATES) REIMBURSABLE EXPENSE: ❑ YES ❑ NO IF YES, MAXIMUM DOLLAR AMOUNT: $ IS SALES TAX OWED: ❑ YES ❑ NO IF YES, $ PAID BY: ❑ CONTRACTOR ❑ CITY ❑ PURCHASING: PLEASE CHARGE TO: 30 3- f) dam'- L3 1 5 I y / (4, -� 5 10. DOCUME / CONTRACT REVIEW INITIAL / DATE REVIEWED INITIAL / DATE APPROVED ROJECT MANAGER ❑ SUPERVISOR ❑ DIRECTOR ❑ RISK MANAGEMENT (IF APPLICABLE) ❑ LAW DEPT 11. COUNCIL APPROVAL (IF APPLICABLE) C. It12(is COMMITTEE APPROVAL DATE: 12. CONTRACT SIGNATURE ROUTING ❑ SENT TO VENDOR/CONTRACTOR DATE SENT: ❑ ATTACH: SIGNATURE AUTHORITY, INSURANCE CERTIFICATE, LICENSES, EXHIBITS INITIAL / D E SIGNED ❑ LAW DEPT SIGNATORY (MAYOR OR DIRECTOR) ❑ CITY CLERK ASSIGNED AG # SIGNED COPY RETURNED RETURN ONE ORIGINAL COMMENTS: Se-t, (2.,,• **Awl AG J( -o2 DATE SENT: 03 -03 - !Lp COUNCIL APPROVAL DATE: DATE REC'D: 1n5OVWAil C4 n -k 1 04AK- Se ,u , 4 uvrfi A pr rd. i►c q ;Ai—. 11/9 • • DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PI,L,C City of Federal Way Town Square Park Phase 4 - Buildings REGISTERED ARCHITECT DAVID A CLARK STATE OF 8PSNINOTON 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S), Federal Way, WA ,' T. ,t: i ltd' `a I: ttLt•2.t'aaa t µL4. 1 r. °a t rn.�� 7 L ...: utl... 44 • a 1µ.� L t.j.t . It4t 4 �.1..ii -. y•. a.! I .»-t.. i.1..�L -U. ... ITT r ¶1 airs rrrr rrrt. �r ^�rt n: pJ-(-r �-rrYj'rr[T,._ > -41 :.t . `t j. Str • NUNU ■ • ■■f ■ry • 44 - tr �ae" .. "E' is .y �9r1 1•I.. •• 31. 1 .■. • , " •■�_ i 1.1 _ •L t L L tt 1 L f. _'� L..t 4L.r■■ L�L 'sill:: ■•I�t�uu ■ ■■ . LL • t aaaa ■a L4 L 4 tllr .. u��5 ■■yIII uuaa . t�= •u, . 1 •* • i tll • .. __.. .....9 . _ t . t t L,1..y.. iLL.. t yttt::, ., tot r�. iys,L tL a:aasa t t U : L t4 a +.I..tt..twL : Pi t .f t L A . Y-, ._' . - .. 14 ■. •�a L {4.L L. LLL t t t L tL_LU, LULL �'r t l l t4 a tL IL 6 ■; 3 L �{ 4. LL LL{., al ...... ...... 4. L _ • ' ~ 3 i. .tp -L a u ,mar• .�. _� V tt _ ■ is LL, L.. S. _. t 33 taa - L.� ,.L,. tt,` .. F L PROJECT MANUAL RFB 15.012 December 9, 2015 A US Green Building Council Member Firm with LEED Accredited Professionals Licensed Architects in Arizona, California, Colorado, Hawaii, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Texas and Washington 0 U TEL 253.351.8877 33017 134th AVE SE, AUBURN, WA 98092 -8519 CITY OF FEDERAL WAY REQUEST FOR BID Federal Wav Town Square Park- Phase 4 Buildings RFB # 15 -012 Project: Owner: Out for Bids: Pre -Bid Conference: Bids Due: Federal Way Town Square Park, Phase Four - Buildings 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S) City of Federal Way Thursday, December 10, 2015 Wednesday, December 16, 2015 2 PM at the site Thursday, January 7, 2015 2 PM City Clerk Counter, 2nd floor, Federal Way City Hall 33325 8th Avenue South, Federal Way, Washington 98003 Notice is hereby given that the City of Federal Way, Washington, will receive sealed bids through the date, time and address listed above. Proposals received after the date and time listed above will not be considered. An informational meeting for interested contractors will be held at the date and time listed above at the site, Town Square Park, 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S), Federal Way, WA to discuss the work to be performed. All prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to attend. All bids will be opened and read publicly aloud at the City Hall council chambers or adjacent conference room at the date and time listed above, 33325 8th Avenue South, Federal Way, Washington, for this RFB. All bid proposals shall be accompanied by a bid deposit by a cashier's or certified check, or Bid Bond in an amount equal to five percent (5 %) of the amount of such bid proposal. Should the successful bidder fail to enter into a contract and furnish satisfactory Performance Bond within the time stated in the specifications, the bid deposit or bond shall be forfeited to the City of Federal Way. This project consists of one Restroom Building and one Picnic Shelter Building and associated utilities, concrete paving, earthwork and other associated work to improve an existing park as indicated on the drawings and in this project manual. Architect's estimate is $308,000. The Contractor shall complete all work within 110 calendar days The bidder is urged to check the plans and contract provisions carefully. All bid proposals shall be in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and all other contract documents now on file in the Parks Office of the City of Federal Way. Bid documents may be obtained from the Architect at 253- 351 -8877 or sbrown @clarkarchitects.com. Bid Documents are also available for review at major Plan Centers. No bidder may withdraw his /her bid for a period of sixty (60) days after the day of bid opening. For technical questions, please contact the Architect, David A. Clark Architects PLLC, 33017 134th Ave SE, Auburn, WA 98092, dclark @clarkarchitects.com tel 253- 351 -8877 The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d -4 and Title 49 C.F.R., Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively ensure that in any City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 2 RFB # 15 -012 2015 contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, disadvantaged business enterprises as defined at 49 CFR Part 26 will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, national origin, or sex in consideration for an award. The City encourages minority and women -owned firms to submit bids consistent with the City's policy to insure that such firms are afforded the maximum practicable opportunity to compete for and obtain public contracts. The Contractor will be required to comply with all local, State, and Federal laws and regulations pertaining to equal employment opportunities. The City anticipates awarding this project to the successful bidder and intends to give Notice to Proceed as soon as the Contract and all required associated documents are executed in full. The City of Federal Way reserves the right to reject any and all bids, waive any informalities or minor irregularities in the bidding, and determine which bid or bidder meets the criteria set forth in the bid documents. No bidder may withdraw his or her bid after the hour set for the opening thereof unless the award is delayed for a period exceeding thirty (30) days. Dated the 8th day of December, 2015 Dates of Publication: City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Federal Way Mirror — December 11 & 18, 2015 Daily Journal of Commerce — December 10 & 16, 2015 Page 3 RFB # 15 -012 2015 BIDDER'S CHECKLIST The bidder's attention is especially called to the following forms, which must be executed in full as required and submitted as part of the bid. Failure to comply shall result in rejection of any bid not so complying. ❑ Bid Form (Attachment A) The Bid Form shall be completed and fully executed, including filling in the total bid amount. ❑ Bid Signature Page (Attachment B) The Bid Signature Page shall be filled in and fully executed by the bidder. El Bid Bond Form (Attachment C) This form is to be executed by the bidder and the surety company unless a certified check is submitted with the bid. The amount of this bond or certified check shall not be less than five percent (5 %) of the total bid amount and shall be shown in both words and figures. ❑ Subcontractor List (Attachment D) The Subcontractor List shall be filled in by the bidder. (This section may /may not apply) ❑ Combined Affidavit and Certification Form (Attachment E) This form must be subscribed to and sworn before a Notary Public and notarized. ❑ Contractor's Compliance Statement (Attachment F) The Contractor's Compliance Statement shall be filled in and fully executed by the bidder. ❑ Contractor's Certificate of Registration The bidder shall provide a copy of Contractor's current registration with the State of Washington. ❑ Contractor's State Identification Numbers The bidder shall provide a copy of Contractor's current state unified business identifier number and, as applicable, an employment security department number and state excise tax registration number. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 4 RFB # 15 -012 2015 SUCCESSFUL BIDDER'S CHECKLIST The following documents are to be executed and delivered to the City within ten (10) calendar days after the Bid is awarded: ❑ Public Works Contract (Attachment G) The successful bidder will fully execute and deliver to the City the Federal Way Town Square Park Public Works Contract ("Contract") from these Bid Documents. ❑ Contractor's Retainacie Agreement or Retainage Bond (Exhibit C or D) The successful bidder will fully execute and deliver to the City the Contractor's Retainage Agreement or Retainage Bond. ❑ Notice to Labor Unions or Other Employment Organizations Nondi crimination in Employment (Exhibit E) If this applies, the successful bidder will sign and post copies of this Notice in conspicuous places available to employees or applicant for employment. ❑ Certificate of Insurance (Exhibit F) The successful bidder will provide a Certificate of Insurance evidencing the insurance requirement set forth in the Contract. ❑ Performance /Payment Bond (Exhibit G) The successful bidder will provide a fully executed Performance /Payment Bond as appropriate. ❑ Business License The successful bidder will provide a copy of a current Business License with the City of Federal Way. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 5 RFB # 15 -012 2015 SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1 -1 Time and Place for Submission and Opening of Bids Sealed bids must be submitted by on the date and time listed in the call for bids, to the Purchasing Office of the City of Federal Way (the "City"), located on the second floor of City Hall, or received by US Mail at City of Federal Way, Purchasing Office, 33325 Eighth Avenue S, Federal Way, Washington, 98003 -6325, and will be publicly opened and read aloud in City Hall Council Chambers on the date and time listed in the call for bids. The City's Purchasing Coordinator must receive the sealed bid before the time and date specified in order to be considered. Telex or facsimile bids will not be accepted. The bidder accepts all risks of late delivery of mailed bids or of misdelivery regardless of fault. Late bids will be returned unopened. 1 -2 Bid Form Bids shall be made on the "Bid Form" (Attachment "A ") issued by the City as part of these contract documents, without reservation or amendment. Bids must be typewritten or printed in ink. Upon completion, the Bid Form and the bid bond or certified check and any requested information shall be placed in a sealed envelope. On the outside of the envelope, place the bid name, bid number and the time bids are due. 1 -3 Bid Signature All bids shall give the total bid price and shall be signed in ink by the bidder or their authorized representative, with the address. If the bid is made by an individual, the name, signature, and address must be shown. If the bid is made by a firm or partnership, the name and address of the firm or partnership and the signature of at least one of the general partners must be shown. If the bid is made by a corporation, the bid shall show the title of the person authorized to sign on behalf of the corporation, his or her title and the address. The City reserves the right to request documentation showing the authority of the individual signing the bid to execute contracts on behalf of anyone, or any entity, other than himself /herself. Refusal to provide such information upon request may cause the bid to be rejected as nonresponsive. 1 -4 Bid Withdrawal Due to Error Bids may not be withdrawn due to a claim of error in a bid unless written notice of such claim and supporting evidence for such claim including cost breakdown sheets are delivered to the City within forty -eight (48) hours prior to the opening of bids. 1 -5 Modification of Bid A modification of a bid already received will be considered only if the modification is received prior to the time announced for bid opening. All modifications shall be made in writing, executed, and submitted in the same form and manner as the original bid. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 6 RFB # 15 -012 2015 1 -6 Examination of Bid and Contract Documents — Bidder Responsibilities The submission of a bid shall constitute an acknowledgment upon which the City may rely that the bidder has thoroughly examined and is familiar with the bid and contract documents and has reviewed and inspected all applicable federal, state and local statutes, regulations, ordinances and resolutions dealing with or related to the equipment and /or services to be provided herein. The failure or neglect of a bidder to examine such documents, statutes, regulations, ordinances or resolutions shall in no way relieve the bidder from any obligations with respect to the bidder's bid or the contract documents. No claim for additional compensation will be allowed which is based upon a lack of knowledge of any contract documents, statutes, regulations, ordinances or resolutions. Bidders shall visit delivery and service locations(s) as required. Bidders shall become familiar with and verify any environmental factors, which may impact current or future prices for this requirement. 1 -7 Interpretation of Bid and Contract Documents No oral interpretations will be made to any bidder as to the meaning of the bid or contract documents and no oral communications will be binding upon the City. Requests for an interpretation shall be made by facsimile, or by mail, and delivered to the Purchasing Coordinator of the City at the address indicated in Section 1 -1, at least ten (10) days before the date announced for opening the bids. Any interpretation deemed necessary by the City will be in the form of an addendum to the bid documents and when issued will be sent as promptly as is practical to all parties to whom the bid documents have been issued. All such addenda shall become part of the bid. 1 -8 Addenda Each bid shall include acknowledgment of receipt and review of all addenda issued during the bidding period on the Bid Form. 1 -9 Bid Price The bid price shall include everything necessary for the completion of the contract including, but not limited to, furnishing all materials, equipment, tools, freight charges, facilities and all management, superintendence, labor and service, except as may be provided otherwise in the contract documents. All Washington State sales tax and all other government taxes, assessments and charges shall be included in the various Bid item prices as required by law. The offer shall remain in effect ninety (90) days after the bid opening. In the event of a discrepancy between a unit price and an extended amount and /or the total price, the unit price will govern and the extended amount and /or total price will be corrected accordingly; however, downward correction of a bid, which would displace the apparent low bidder, will only be permitted if the error made and the intended bid price can be determined solely from the bid documents. 1 -10 Postponement of Bid Opening The City reserves the right to postpone the date and time for the opening of bids by announcing such postponement at any time prior to the date and time announced in these documents. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 7 RFB # 15 -012 2015 1 -11 Rejection of Bids A. The City reserves the right to reject any bid for any reason including, but not limited to, the following: any bid which is incomplete, obscure, irregular or lacking necessary detail and specificity; any bid which omits a price on any one or more items on the Bid Form and Bid Schedule; any bid in which prices are unbalanced in the opinion of the City; any bid accompanied by insufficient or irregular bid bond; any bid from bidders who (in the sole judgment of the City) lack the qualifications and /or responsibility necessary to perform the work after considering the elements in Section 1 -14.B; any bid for which a bidder fails or neglects to complete and submit any qualifications information within the time specified by the City and as may be otherwise required herein; and, any bid submitted by a bidder who is not registered or licensed as may be required by the laws of the State of Washington. B. The city further reserves the right to reject any portion of any bid and /or to reject all bids. In consideration for the City's review and evaluation of its bid, the bidder waives and releases any claims against the City arising from any rejection of any or all bids. 1 -12 Alterations to Documents Prohibited Any addition, limitation or provision attached to the bid may render it informal or nonresponsive and cause its rejection. Alteration by erasure or interlineations must be explained or noted in the bid form over the signature of the bidder. No oral, telegraphic or telephonic bids or modifications will be considered. 1 -13 Disqualification of Bidder If, in the opinion of the City, there is reason to believe that collusion exists among bidders, none of the bids of the participants in such collusion will be considered. All bidders are required to submit the Affidavit of Non - Collusion (Attachment E) with their bids. 1 -14 Evaluation of Bids It is the intent of City to award a contract to the lowest responsive bid by a responsible bidder as evaluated by the City. The bidder may be required by the City to submit documentation demonstrating compliance with the criteria. A. Responsiveness — The bidder must complete all required forms and bid documents and provide all required and requested information. Refusal to provide such information may cause the bid to be rejected. The City will consider all the material submitted by the bidder to determine whether the bid is in compliance with the bid terms and documents and responsive to the requested work. B. Responsibility — The City will consider all the material submitted by the bidder, and other evidence it may obtain including information from previous project owners, to determine whether the bidder is responsible. The bidder must meet the following bidder responsibility criteria and supplemental bidder responsibility criteria to be considered a responsible bidder: 1. Mandatory Bidder Responsibility Criteria a. Have a current certificate of registration as a contractor in compliance with City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 8 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Chapter 18.27 RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of bid submittal; b. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number; c. If applicable: i. Have Industrial Insurance (workers' compensation) coverage for the bidder's employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW; ii. Have a Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50 RCW; iii. Have a Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as required in Title 82 RCW; d. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3). 2. Supplemental Bidder Responsibility Criteria a. The bidder shall not have a record of excessive claims filed against the retainage, payment, or performance bonds for public works projects during the previous three years, that demonstrate a lack of effective management by the bidder of making timely and appropriate payments to its subcontractors, suppliers, and workers, unless there are extenuating circumstances acceptable to the City. b. The bidder shall have a reasonable history of successfully completed projects of a similar size and scope as required by the contract documents for this project. The City will evaluate whether the projects were "successfully completed" and of a "similar size and scope." c. The bidder shall have evidence that it is able to begin and complete the work, and complete it in a timely fashion. 3. As evidence that the bidder meets the supplemental bidder responsibility criteria in paragraph (B)(2) above, the apparent low bidder must submit the following documentation to the City within 48 hours of the bid opening. The City reserves the right to request such documentation from other bidders also. Refusal to provide such information upon request may cause the bid to be rejected. a. The bidder shall submit a list of the public works projects completed within the previous three years and include for each project the following information; the owner and contact information for the owner; a list of claims filed against the retainage, payment, or performance bond for any of the projects listed; a written explanation of the circumstances surrounding each claim and the ultimate resolution of the claim. b. The bidder shall submit a list of projects of similar size and scope to this project and include information about each project, including the following: the owner and contact information for the owner; the awarded contract amount; the final contract amount; a description of the scope of the project and how the project is similar to this project; the bidder's assessment of its performance of each project. The information should include any information regarding performance in the following areas; quality control; safety record; timeliness of performance; use of skilled personnel; management of subcontractors; availability of and use of appropriate equipment; compliance with contract documents; management of submittals process, change orders, and close -out. c. The bidder shall furnish acceptable evidence of the bidder's current ability to City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 9 RFB # 15 -012 2015 perform, such as firm commitments by subcontractors, equipment, supplies and facilities, and the bidder's ability to obtain the necessary personnel. 4. If the City determines the bidder does not meet the bidder responsibility criteria in paragraph (B)(2) above and is therefore not a responsible bidder, the City shall notify the bidder in writing with the reasons for its determination. If the bidder disagrees with this determination, it may appeal the determination within 24 hours of receipt of the City's determination by presenting additional information to the City and meeting the requirements of section 1- 20(B). The City will consider the additional information before issuing its final determination. If the final determination affirms that the bidder is not responsible, the City will not execute a contract with any other bidder until two business days after the bidder determined to be not responsible has received the final determination. C. Lowest Bid - The lowest bid shall be determined as set forth on the Bid Form. The acceptance of a bid will be evidenced by a Notice of Award. No other act of the City shall constitute acceptance of a bid. Within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice of Award, the bidder whose bid is accepted, shall furnish the required performance bond, certificate of insurance, execute the contract and perform all other acts required by the bid and contract documents as conditions precedent to formation of the contract. 1 -15 Procedures When Only One Bid is Received In the event only a single responsive bid is received, the City reserves the right to conduct a price and /or cost analysis of such bid. The sole bidder shall provide such information, data and other documentation as deemed necessary by the City for such analysis. The City reserves the right to reject such bid. 1 -16 Bid Documents Bidders are required to submit with the bid package the following: A. Attachment A- Bid Form. B. Attachment 8- Bid Signature Page. D. Attachment C- Bid Bond Form. E. Attachment D- Subcontractor List. (May Not Apply) F. Attachment E- Combined Affidavit and Certification Form. G. Attachment F- Contractor's Compliance Statement. 1 -17 Conflicts of Interest and Noncompetitive Practices By submitting a bid, the Contractor agrees as follows: City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 10 RFB # 15 -012 2015 A. Conflict of Interest — That it has no direct or indirect pecuniary or proprietary interest, that it shall not acquire any interest which conflicts in any manner or degree with the work, services, equipment or materials required to be performed and /or provided under this contract and that it shall not employ any person or agent having any such interests. In the event that the Contractor or its agents, employees or representatives hereafter acquires such a conflict of interest, it shall immediately disclose such interest to the City and take action immediately to eliminate the conflict or to withdraw from this contract, as the City may require. B. Contingent Fees and Gratuities 1. That no person or selling agency except bona fide employees or designated agents or representatives of the Contractor have been employed or retained to solicit or secure this contract with an agreement or understanding that a commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee would be paid; and 2. That no gratuities in the form of entertainment, gifts or otherwise, were offered or given by the Contractor or any of its agents, employees or representatives, to any official, member or employee of the City or other governmental agency with a view toward securing this contract or securing favorable treatment with respect to the awarding or amending, or the making of any determination with respect to the performance of this contract. 1 -18 Bid Security No bid will be considered unless accompanied by either a cashier's or certified check in an amount equal to five percent (5 %) of the Total Bid Price as indicated on Attachment A, "Bid Form ", or a bid bond in the form of Attachment C or a letter of credit for a like amount. The check or bond shall be payable to the City; it shall be forfeited as fixed and liquidated damages in case the bidder fails, neglects or refuses to enter into a contract for the faithful performance of said work (including the providing of any evidence of insurance and /or performance bond required herein), in the event the contract is awarded to them, within ten (10) days after the award is made. If a bid bond is submitted in lieu of a check, it shall be executed by a corporate surety authorized to transact business in the State of Washington and in the form prescribed in Attachment C, "Bid Bond." If a letter of credit is offered in lieu of a check or bidder's bond, it shall be issued as an irrevocable documentary letter of credit drawn on a banking institution licensed to do business in the State of Washington. The letter of credit shall include instruction and provisions prescribed in Attachment C, "Bid Bond." Any questions as to the qualification of the banking institution or instruction shall be submitted to the City at least ten (10) days prior to the bid submittal date. The check, bidder's bond or letter of credit shall be attached to the bid form. The City further reserves the right to hold all bids (and the accompanying bid security) from the date of the bid opening until the contract and any performance /payment bond are executed, provided that such period does not exceed ninety (90) days, and each bid shall remain effective during that period. 1 -19 Performance /Payment Bond The bidder to whom the City has awarded this Contract will remove the Performance /Payment Bond (Exhibit G) attached to the Public Works Contract and deliver it City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 11 RFB # 15 -012 2015 to the City fully executed by the bidder and a surety company in the amount of one hundred percent (100 %) of the contract price as security for the faithful performance of the work including the payment of all persons furnishing materials and performing labor on the work and all payments arising from the performance of the work due the State of Washington pursuant to Titles 50 and 51 RCW. Such bond must be executed by a duly licensed surety company, which is registered with the Washington State Insurance Commissioner, and the surety's name shall appear in the current Authorized Insurance Company List in the State of Washington, published by the Office of the Insurance Commissioner. The scope of the Performance /Payment Bond (Exhibit G) shall in no way affect or alter the liabilities of the Contractor to the City under Section 8 "Indemnification" of the Public Works Contract. The City may require the surety company to appear and qualify itself upon the bond. If, at any time, the City determines in its sole judgment that the surety company is insufficient, the City may require the Contractor to furnish additional surety in form and arrangement satisfactory to the City and in an amount not exceeding that originally required. The Contractor shall submit a performance bond complying with the requirements of this paragraph within ten (10) days after the award is made. Payments will not be made on the Contract until sufficient surety as required is furnished. 1 -20 Bid Dispute A. Any actual or prospective bidder, including sub - contractors and suppliers showing a substantial economic interest in this contract who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of this contract, may protest to the City in accordance with the procedures set forth herein. Protests based on the specifications or other terms in the contract documents, which are apparent prior to the date established for submittal of bids, shall be submitted not later than ten (10) calendar days prior to said date, or shall be deemed waived. All other protests shall be accepted only from actual bidders and shall be submitted within five (5) calendar days after the aggrieved person knows or should have known of the facts and circumstances upon which the protest is based; provided, however, that in no event shall a protest be considered if all bids are rejected or after the award of this contract. B. In order to be considered, a protest shall be in writing and shall include: (1) the name and address of the aggrieved person; (2) the RFB number and contract title under which the protest is submitted; (3) a detailed description of the specific grounds for protest and any supporting documentation; and (4) the specific ruling or relief requested. The written protest shall be addressed to: City of Federal Way Federal Way, Washington 98003 -6325 Attention: Bid Protest -- Federal Way Town Square Phase 4 Buildings RFB # 15 -012 C. Upon receipt of a written protest, the City will promptly consider the protest. The City may give notice of the protest and its basis to other persons, including bidders involved in or affected by the protest; such other persons may be given an opportunity to submit their views and relevant information. If the protest is not resolved by mutual agreement of the aggrieved person and the City, the City will promptly issue a decision in writing stating the reasons for the action taken and informing the aggrieved person of his or her right to appeal the decision to the Mayor or his or her designee. A copy of the decision City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 12 RFB # 15 -012 2015 shall be mailed (by certified mail, return receipt requested) or otherwise promptly furnished to the aggrieved person and any other interested parties who requested a copy of the decision. The decision will be considered final and conclusive unless appealed within five (5) calendar days after receipt of the decision to the Mayor or his or her designee. If the decision is appealed, then the subsequent determination of the Mayor or his or her designee shall issue within five (5) days of the Mayor's receipt of the appeal and shall be final and conclusive. D. Failure to comply with these protest procedures will render a protest untimely or inadequate and shall result in rejection thereof by the City. SECTION 2: GENERAL CONTRACTUAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS 2 -1 Administration This contract will be between the City and the Contractor who will be responsible for delivering all equipment and performing all work and services described herein. The City is not party to defining the division of work between the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, if any, and the specifications have not been written with this intent. The Contractor represents that it has or will obtain all personnel and equipment required to perform the services hereunder. Such personnel shall not be employees of the City. The Contractor's performance under this contract will be monitored and reviewed by Steve Ikerd, Facilities Manager. Questions by the Contractor regarding interpretation of the terms, provisions and requirements of this contract shall be addressed to Steve Ikerd, Facilities Manager for response. 2 -2 Proof of Compliance with Contract In order that the City may determine whether the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the contract documents, the Contractor shall, at any time when requested, submit to the City properly authenticated documents or other satisfactory proofs as to the Contractor's compliance with such requirements. 2 -3 Contract Documents and Precedence The documents embodying the legally binding obligations between the City and the Contractor for completion of the work consist of the following: The City's Request for Bid, Bid Form, Bid Signature Page, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Bond, Town Square Park Contract, General Contractual Terms and Conditions, Contractor's Compliance Statement, Combined Affidavit and Certification Form, Technical Specifications, Addenda and Change Orders, and the Town Square Park Special Provisions. The contract documents are intended to be complementary so that what is required by any one of them shall be as binding as if called for by all of them. In the event of any conflicting provisions or requirements within the several parts of the contract documents, the City will issue an interpretation regarding the controlling provision, which interpretation shall be binding. 2 -4 Charges to Contractor City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 13 RFB # 15-012 2015 Charges which are the obligation of the Contractor under the terms of the contract shall be paid by the Contractor to the City on demand and may be deducted by the City from any money due or to become due to the Contractor under the contract and may be recovered by the City from the Contractor or its surety. 2 -5 Change Orders The City may, at any time, without notice to the sureties, by written order designated or indicated to be a change order, make any change in the specifications within the scope of this contract. Oral orders will not be binding on the City unless confirmed in writing by the City. Except as provided herein, no order, statement, or conduct of the City will be treated as a change hereunder or will entitle the Contractor to an equitable adjustment. If any change hereunder causes an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, the performance or any part of the work under this contract, an equitable adjustment will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. However, no claim will be allowed for any costs incurred more than five (5) days before the Contractor gives written notice as required. All change orders are limited to 15% overhead /profit markup for both the contractor and the subcontractor, with no additional markup allowed for small tools, insurance, bonding, insurance and the like. If the Contractor intends to assert a claim for an equitable adjustment hereunder, it shall, within five (5) days after receipt of a written change order form from the City or after giving the City the written notice required above, as the case may be, submit to the City a written statement setting forth the general nature and monetary extent of such claim; provided the City, in its sole discretion, may extend such five (5) day submittal period upon request by the Contractor. The Contractor shall supply such supporting documents and analysis for the claims as the City may require to determine if the claims and costs have merit. No claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment hereunder will be allowed if asserted after final payment under this contract. 2 -6 Work and Materials Omitted The Contractor shall, when directed in writing by the City, omit work, services and materials to be furnished under the contract and the value of the omitted work and materials will be deducted from the contract price and the delivery schedule will be reviewed if appropriate. The value of the omitted work, services and materials will be a lump sum or unit price, as mutually agreed upon in writing by the Contractor and the City. If the parties cannot agree on an appropriate deduction, the City reserves the right to issue a unilateral change order adjusting the price and the delivery schedule. 2 -7 Washington State Sales Tax The Contractor shall make payment directly to the State for all applicable Washington State sales taxes and all other governmental taxes, assessments and charges. 2 -8 Shipping Charges All prices shall include freight. Requests for additional compensation for freight charges will be rejected by the City. City of Federal Way RFB # 15 -012 Town Square Park Page 14 2015 RFB ver. 4 -15 2 -9 Warranty All materials and equipment sold and labor performed under this contract are warranted by the Contractor to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for a period of at least one (1) year from date of delivery and installation; provided, however, that this warranty may extend beyond this time period pursuant to any attached warranties. If the merchandise sold or work performed hereunder is defective on account of workmanship or materials, the Contractor agrees to replace the merchandise or, at the City's sole option, repair the defective merchandise. All defects in work or materials shall be promptly corrected. 2 -10 No Waiver of Warranties and Contract Rights Conducting of tests and inspections, review of specifications or plans, payment for goods or services, or acceptance by the City does not constitute a waiver, modification or exclusion of any express or implied warranty or any right under this contract or in law. 2 -11 Legal Relations The Contractor shall comply with all of the City's resolutions and regulations applicable under this contract and with any local, state or federal law or regulation applicable to the materials, equipment or service provided under this contract. Neither the Contractor nor the City shall assign any interest, obligation or benefit under or in this contract or transfer any interest in the same, whether by assignment or novation, without prior written consent of the other party. This contract shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the successors of the parties. 2 -12 Applicable Law and Forum Except as hereinafter specifically provided, this contract shall be governed by and construed according to the laws of the State of Washington including, but not limited to, the Uniform Commercial Code, Title 62A RCW. Any suit arising herefrom shall be brought in King County Superior Court, which shall have sole and exclusive jurisdiction and venue. 2 -13 Hazardous Chemical Communication In order to comply with WAC 296 -62 -054, Hazard Communication, the Contractor shall submit with each shipment a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for all products containing any toxic products that may be harmful to the end user. The MSDS Sheet is to accompany the toxic product(s) to the specified delivery sites. Include the following information in the MSDS: A. Chemical Abstract Service (CAS) numbers for every chemical that is listed in the MSDS. B. If the product is actually used diluted, the dilution rate should be so stated in the MSDS and the hazards and corresponding personal protection, etc., also be listed. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 15 RFB # 15 -012 2015 C. A statement as to the intended use of the product. 2 -14 Delivery and Liquidated Damages Time is of the essence of the contract and each and all of its provisions in which performance is a factor. The Contractor will be held to strict compliance with the prescribed date(s) set forth in these contract documents. For each and every day that delivery is delayed beyond the specific date(s), damage will be sustained by the City. Because of the difficulty in computing the actual damages and disadvantages to the City, and as a reasonable forecast of actual damages which the City will suffer by the delay in delivery, the parties agree that for each such delay the Contractor will pay the City liquidated damages (and not as a penalty) in accordance with Section 1.3 of Attachment G, Public Works Contract, to compensate for any damages caused by such delay. The City may deduct from any payment owing to the Contractor, any liquidated damages, which may be incurred by the Contractor pursuant to this paragraph. 2 -15 Force Majeure The Contractor's or City's failure to perform any of its obligations under this contract shall be excused if due to causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor or City, respectively, including, but not restricted to, acts of God, acts of public enemy, acts of any government, fire, floods, epidemics, and strikes. 2 -16 Patents, Copyrights and Rights in Data Any patentable result or material suitable for copyright arising out of this contract shall be owned by and made available to the City for public use, unless the City shall, in a specific case where it is legally permissible, determine that it is in the public interest that it not be so owned or available. The Contractor agrees that the ownership of any plans, drawings, designs, specifications, computer programs, technical reports, operating manuals, calculations, notes and other work submitted or which is specified to be delivered under this contract, whether or not complete (referred to in this subsection as "Subject Data "), shall be vested in the City or such other local, state or federal agency, if any, as may be provided by separate contract with the City. All such Subject Data furnished by the Contractor pursuant to this contract, other than documents exclusively for internal use by the City, shall carry such notations on the front cover or a title page (or in such case of maps, in the same block) as may be requested by the City. The Contractor shall also place their endorsement on all Subject Data furnished by them. All such identification details shall be subject to approval by the City prior to printing. The Contractor shall ensure that substantially the foregoing paragraphs are included in each subcontract for the work on the project. 2 -17 Patents and Royalties The costs involved in license fees, royalties or in defending claims for any patented invention, article, process or method that may be used in or connected with the work under this contract or with the use of complete work by the City, shall be paid by the Contractor. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 16 RFB # 15 -012 2015 The Contractor and the Contractor's sureties shall, at their own cost, defend, indemnify and hold the City, together with its officers and employees, harmless against any and all demands made for such fees, royalties or claims brought or made by the holder of any invention or patent. Before final payment is made on the account of this contract, the Contractor shall, if requested by the City, furnish acceptable proof of a proper release of the City, its officers, agents and employees from all such fees or claims. Should the Contractor, its agent, servants or employees, or any of them be enjoined from furnishing or using any invention, article, material, computer programs or equipment supplied or required to be supplied or used under the contract, the Contractor shall promptly substitute other articles, materials, computer programs or equipment in lieu thereof of equal efficiency, quality, finish, suitability and market value, and satisfactory in all respects to the City. 2 -18 Disagreements, Disputes, Claims, and Appeals If any disagreements occur with anything required in a change order, another written order, or an oral order from the Project Engineer, including any direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination by the Project Engineer, the Contractor shall follow the procedures outlined in Standard Specification Sections 1 -04.5 and 1- 09.11, which are incorporated by this reference. By failing to follow the procedures of Sections 1 -04.5 and 1- 09.11, the Contractor completely waives any claims for protested Work. Any claims or causes of action shall be brought only in the Superior Court for King County, Washington 2 -19 Recycled Products The Contractor shall use recycled paper for proposals and for any printed or photocopied material created pursuant to a contract with the City whenever practicable and use both sides of paper sheets for reports submitted to the City whenever practicable. In the event this RFB covers the sale of product to the City that is capable of containing recycled materials, Contractor is hereby advised that the City intends to procure products with recycled content, pursuant to the recycled content notice delivered with these bid documents. Contractor shall certify the percentage of recycled content and products sold to the City, including a percentage of post- consumer waste that is in the product. This certification is required to be in the form of a label on the product or a statement by the Contractor attached to the bid documents. The certification on multi- component or multi - material products shall verify the percentage and type of post- consumer waste and recycled content by volume contained in the major constituents of the product. The Contractor agrees to grant the City, as a procuring agency, permission to verify the certification of recycled content by review of the bidder's or manufacturer's records as a condition of any bid award, in the event of a bidder's protest, or other challenge to the bid accepted. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 17 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Attachment A BID FORM CITY OF FEDERAL WAY Federal Way Town Square Park, Phase Four - Buildings RFS #15 -012 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S), Federal Way WA Bidder: Arty l CAS 60mtl id i p vii = 6 q- Date: 1 /7 Lump Sum Bid: A. Restroom, Picnic Shelter, concrete paving, associated utilities and other work as indicated on the drawings and project manual $ 3 t O , See, c 20 B. Washington State Sales Tax 9.5% on $ 291997.52_ Total LUMP SUM Bid Amount (including Washington State Sales Taxes,Govemment taxes assessments and charges) $ 339)97.72 To City Council Members City of Federal Way 33325 8th Ave South Federal Way, Washington 98003 -6325 Pursuant to and in compliance with your advertisement for bids for construction of and other documents relating thereto, the undersigned has carefully examined all of the bid and contract documents as the premises and conditions affecting the delivery, supply and maintenance of Federal Way Town Square Park, and hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials and perform all work as required in strict accordance with the contract documents, for the above - referenced amount, inclusive of Washington State sales tax and all other government taxes, assessments and charges as required by law. The required bid security consisting of a certified check, bid bond, or cashier's check in an amount of not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount bid is attached hereto, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the City as liquidated damages in the event this bid is accepted by the City within forty -five (45) calendar days after the day of the bid opening and the undersigned fails to execute the Federal Way Town Square Park Public Works Contract and to provide the required certificate of insurance to the City, under the conditions thereof, within ten (10) calendar days after the Notice of Award; otherwise said Bid Security will be returned to the undersigned. Bond or Certified Check$;✓u Yr .1 o 4Ai 2 Dollars ($ \% r OPD ) The Bidder shall complete this entire Bid Form or this bid may be considered non - responsive. The City may correct obvious mathematical errors. The City of Federal Way reserves the right to reject any and all bids, waive any informalities or minor irregularities in the bidding, and determine which bid or bidder meets the criteria set forth in the bid documents. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 Page 18 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale Receipt of the following Addendums is hereby acknowledged: Addendum No. ? Date Issued: Addendum No. Z Date Issued: Addendum No. Issued: 4 cc k.TN AMEVZt (A GuAKA ✓aoo '3 J(. Corporation /Par#r I Firm Name (Delete Two) AMeleCI,G. Lk* Bidder's State License No. Signature 60301( 5 C Bidder's State Tax No. Title City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 19 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Attachment 8 BID SIGNATURE PAGE Date: The undersigned bidder hereby proposes and agrees to deliver the equipment and /or services pursuant to the Federal Way Town Square Park and comply with all other terms and conditions of the contract and bid documents of RFB 15 -012. No bidder may withdraw his/her bid for a period of ninety (90) days after the day of bid opening. The required bid security consisting of a certified check, bid bond, or cashier's check in an amount of not less than five percent (5 %) of the total amount will be delivered to the City. The undersigned individual represents and warrants that he or she is dully authorized to execute the bid and all bid documents on behalf of any partnership, joint venture or corporation. - co 1f'C°i2 'Tlo k) Corpotation/PatimershipfintliVklual (Delete Two) City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 415 Company l-174.1 G +- ;� 5--f, Th4 By (Sgnature) t� (Printed Name) Its: �r (T) (-9, o 242_Q 6.i l vosoc e_, (,L/4 78 335 (Address) 2 _ rz ,s6 y / (Telephone Number) Page 20 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale Attachment C BID BOND FORM Herewith find deposit in the form of a certified check, cashiers check, cash, or bid bond in the amount of $ 17,000.00 , which amount is not Tess than five percent (5 %) of the total bid. BID BOND KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that we, American Guaranteed Roofing &" , as Principal, and Philadelphia Indemnity Insurance Company , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Federal Way, as Obligee, in the penal sum of Seventeen thousand and 00 /100 dollars ($17,000.00 ), for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bond themselves, their heirs and executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. *Construction, Inc. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for: Federal Way Town Square Park, Phase Four — Buildings 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S), Federal Way, WA RFB # 15 -012 According to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefore, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee; or if the Principal shall in case of failure so to do, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the call for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, it shall be, and remain in full force and effect, and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond. SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS 5th DAY OF January , 016. America e - =ntee Roo - :• :,&'&44... - ction, Inc. Princl•� PhiladelphPrind giAttio,- l"T' 'y e r.. rety Steven wa. ttorney -in -fact Received return of deposit in the sum of $ 17,000.00 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Date: January 5 , 2016. Page 21 RFB # 15-012 2015 Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale ,r VIMUSIIIISIMUIRM California All - Purpose Certificate of Acknowledgment A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the I document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. State of California County of Orange s.s. On January 5, 2016 before me, Cassandra Fisher, Notary Public , i I personally appeared Steven A. Swartz N/A who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is /ace subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/site/they executed the same in his/hadtbeir authorized capacity(ies), and that by his /fir signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(a) acted, executed the instrument. I OF PERJURY laws certify under PENALTY under the of the State of California that the foregoing is °`' CASSANDRA FISHER 9 9 A Commission ; 2121476 true and correct. q ^ 3w Notary Public - California z 1 z "1", Orange County a WITNESS my hand and official seal. M Comm. E Ives Jul 30, 2019 OPTIONAL INFORMATION Description of Attached Document g Method of Signer Identification Proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence: [1 form(s) of identification [-j credible witness(es) Notarial event is detailed in notary journal on: Page # Entry # ti a i The preceding Certificate of Acknowledgment is attached to a document titled /for the purpose of Bid Bond containing 1 pages, and dated January 5, 2016 The signer(s) capacity or authority is/are as: Cl Individual(s) ►;1 Attorney -in -fact 0 Corporate Officer(s) Notary contact: Other 0 Additional Signer Ci Signer(s) Thumbprints(s) 0 0 Guardian /Conservator 0 Partner - Limited /General 0 Trustee(s) Q Other: representing: Philadelphia Indemnity Insurance Company tromioaaudaisaarasaa amuwt smato a*c manto timmustviammit auMENAI eMUmaINUOM sweIMIOLUINIVIO aura,wIOMMIM eIIIIMI w 7241 PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY 231 St. Asaph's Rd., Suite 100 Bala Cynwyd, PA 19004 -0950 Power of Attorney KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY (the Company), a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, does hereby constitute and appoint Steven A. Swartz, Kelly Specht, Lorie Mandel, and Nicld Swartz, Michael Herranen and Thomas C. Buckner of the City of San Clemente, State of California of South Coast Surety, its true and lawful Attorney -in -fact with full authority to execute on its behalf bonds, undertakings, recognizances and other contracts of indemnity and writings obligatory in the nature thereof, issued in the course of its business and to bind the Company thereby, in an amount not to exceed 525,000,000.00. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called the 1't day of July, 2011. RESOLVED: That the Board of Directors hereby authorizes the President or any Vice President of the Company to: (1) Appoint Attorney(s) in Fact and authorize the Attorney(s) in Fact to execute on behalf of the Company bonds and undertakings, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof and to attach the seal of the Company thereto; and (2) to remove, at any time, any such Attomey -in -Fact and revoke the authority given. And, be it FURTHER RESOLVED: That the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and biding upon the Company in the future with the respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY HAS CAUSED THIS INSTRUMENT TO BE SIGNED AND ITS CORPORATE SEALTO BE AFFIXED BY ITS AUTHORIZED OFFICE THIS LOTH DAY OF JUNE 2013. (Seal) Robert D. O'Leary Jr., President & CEO Philadelphia Indemnity Insurance Company On this 10a' day of June 2013, before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known, and being by me duly sworn said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate seal of said Company; that the said Corporate Seal and his signature were duly affixed. wine seat Ki tey A. KR9iMfIC, Wary Mk Low Nolan Top, �c `C$ mihill �tociA1FJN OF WARTS S (Notary Seal) Notary Public: residing at: My commission expires: Bala Cynwyd, PA December 18, 2016 I, Edward Sayago, Corporate Secretary of PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY, do herby certify that the foregoing resolution of the Board of Directors and this Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto on this 10TH day of June 2013 true and correct and are still in full force and effect. I do further certify that Robert D. O'Leary Jr., who executed the Power of Attorney as President, was on the date of execution of the attached Power of Attorney the duly elected President of PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY, In Testimony Whereof I have subscribed my name and affixed the facsimile seal of each Company this day 20 (6. Edward Sayago, Corporate Secretary PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY Attachment E City of Federal Way COMBINED AFFIDAVIT AND CERTIFICATION FORM Non - Collusion, Anti Trust, Prevailing Wage (Non - Federal Aid), Debarment, Eligibility, and Certification of Lawful Employment NON - COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT Being first duly swam, deposes and says, that he/she is the identical person who submitted the foregoing proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work equipment to put in a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to himself /herself or to any other person any advantage over other Bidder or Bidders; and NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS ON PROJECTS INVOLVING THE U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION ( USDOT) To report bid rigging activities call: 1- 800 - 424 -9071 The U.S. Department of Transportation ( USDOT) operates the above toll -free hotline Monday through Friday, 8 :00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Eastern Time. Anyone with knowledge of possible bid rigging, bidder collusion, or other fraudulent activities should use the hotline to report such activities. The hotline is part of USDOT's continuing effort to identify and investigate highway construction contract fraud and abuse and is operated under the direction of the USDOT Inspector General. All information will be treated confidentially and caller anonymity will be respected; and CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI -TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice, overcharges resulting from anti- trust violations are, in fact, usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this order or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti -trust violations commencing after the date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition, vendor warrants and represents that each of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser, subject to the aforementioned exception; and PREVAILING WAGE AFFADAVIT I, the undersigned, having duly sworn, deposed say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work of this project, will pay each classification of laborer, workperson, or mechanic employed in the performance of such work, not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wage as specified in the principal contract; that I have read the above and forgoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein, is true to my knowledge and belief; and City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 Page 23 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale DEBARMENT AFFIDAVIT I certify that, except as noted below, the firm, association or corporation or any person in a controlling capacity associated therewith or any position involving the administration of federal funds; is not currently under suspension, debarment, voluntary exclusion, or determination of ineligibility by any federal agency; has not been suspended, debarred, voluntarily excluded or determined ineligible by any federal agency within the past three (3) years; does not have a proposed debarment pending; and has not been indicted, convicted, or had a civil judgment rendered against said person, firm, association or corporation by a court of competent jurisdiction in any matter involving fraud or official misconduct within the past three (3) years. AFFIDAVIT OF ELIGIBILITY The Contractor certifies that it is properly licensed and registered under the laws of the State of Washington and has not been determined to have been in violation of RCW 50.12.070(1)(b), RCW 51.16.070(1)(b), or RCW 82.32.070(2) within the last two years. The Contractor further certifies that it has not been determined, within the last one year, to have committed any combination of two of the following violations or infractions within a five -year period: (1) Violated RCW 51.48.020(1) or 51.48.103; or (2) Committed an infraction or violation under chapter 18.27 RCW. CERTIFICATION OF LAWFUL EMPLOYMENT The contractor hereby certifies that it has complied with all provisions of the Immigration and Nationality Act, now or as herein after amended, 8 USC Section 1101 et. seq., and that all employees, including subcontractor employees, are lawfully permitted to perform work in the United States as provided in this agreement with the City of Federal Way. FOR: ion- Collusion Affidavit, Assignment of Anti Trust Claims to Purchaser, Prevailing Wage Affidavit, Debarment Affidavit, Affidavit Of Eligibility, and Certification of Lawful Employment. Federal Way Town Square Park, Phase Four - Buildings 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S) -WA RFB # 15 -012 Subscribed and sworn to ,ots to �`.0' DEANi 6 �•� .55toN 42140 0/ .�� y �i. O L � NOTARY. N'`�•. s BUCP y i �� 9TH• 02-06•�.•�C.?�$6 �70 t W ,S� ``%% ■ City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 Name of Bidder's Firm Signature of Authorized ve of Bidder me this 1*1 day of 3avtUarr 'rbr Q l\. Syr S4e e ri (printed /typed name of notary) Notary Public in and for the State of Washington My commission expires: b 2 - 0 to - 201 q Page 24 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale Attachment F CONTRACTOR'S COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (President's Executive Order #11246) Date: This statement relates to a proposal contract with the City of Federal Way named Federal Way Town Square Park, Phase Four - Buildings 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S) -WA RFB # 15 -012 I am the undersigned bidder or prospective contractor. I represent that: i ❑ have, Q have not, participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the President's Executive Order #11246 (regarding equal employment opportunity) or a preceding similar Executive Order. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 By: fAM-ev2 -1(., Goek Wilktik7013 Name of Bidder VLooFyA.16 r C• �,vC , Signature Its: 't-'E Title e 113, bi< 2-'t 20 616 (4 A- KAO12, UJ4 Address Page 25 Is 33S RFB # 15-012 2015 Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com - Always Verify Scale Attachment G PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT FOR FEDERAL WAY TOWN SQUARE PARK, PHASE FOUR - BUILDINGS THIS PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT ("Contract') is dated effective this day of January, 2016 and is made by and between the City of Federal Way, a Washington municipal corporation ("City or Owner "), and American Guaranteed Roofing and Construction, Inc., a Washington Corporation ("Contractor'). A. The City desires to retain an independent contractor to furnish all labor and materials necessary to perform work described in article 1 below as necessary to improve an existing park located at 31600 Pete von Reichbauer Way (formerly 20th Ave S), Federal Way, Washington ("Property'); and 1. B. The Contractor has the requisite skill and experience to perform such work. NOW, THEREFORE, the parties ("Parties') agree to the following terms and conditions: SERVICES BY CONTRACTOR 1.1 Description of Work. Contractor shall perform all work and furnish all tools, materials, supplies, equipment, labor and other items incidental thereto necessary for the construction and completion of the work, more particularly described as the Federal Way Town Square park project, consisting of one Restroom Building and one Picnic Shelter Building and associated utilities, concrete paving, earthwork and other associated work to improve an existing park as indicated on the drawings and in this project manual. It is anticipated that construction will commence pending issuance of permits including without limitation as listed above ("Work "), in accordance with and as described in the Contract Documents, which include without limitation, this Contract, Request for Bids, Bidder's Checklist, Instructions to Bidders, General Contractual Terms and Conditions, Bid Form, Bid Signature Page, Bid Bond, Combined Affidavit and Certification Form, Contractor's Compliance Statement, Notice of Completion of Public Works Contract attached as Exhibit A, Contract Change Order Agreement attached as Exhibit B, Contractor's Retainage Agreement attached as Exhibit C, Retainage Bond to City of Federal Way attached as Exhibit D, Notice to Labor Unions or Other Employment Organizations Nondiscrimination in Employment attached as Exhibit E, Certificate(s) of Insurance Form attached hereto as Exhibit F, Performance / Payment Bond attached hereto as Exhibit G, Title VI Assurances attached hereto as Exhibit H, Technical Specifications as Appendix A, Project Drawings attached as Appendix B and current Prevailing Wage Rates attached as Appendix C, current WSDOT / APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, together with the APWA Supplemental (Division 1 -99) ("Standard Specifications ") and all other Appendices attached hereto and incorporated by this reference, (collectively the "Contract Documents "), which Work shall be completed to the City's satisfaction, within the time period prescribed by the City and pursuant to the direction of the Mayor or his or her designee. 1.2 Completion Date. 1.2.1 The Work shall be commenced within five (5) days of receipt by the Contractor of the City's Notice to Proceed. The Work shall be completed within 110 calendar days. City of Federal Way RFB # 15 -012 Town Square Park Page 26 2015 RFB ver. 4 -15 In the event the Work is not substantially completed within the time specified, Contractor agrees to pay to the City liquidated damages in the amount set forth in the formula included in Section 1.3 of this Contract. The Work shall not be deemed completed until the City has accepted the Work and delivered a written Notice of Completion of Public Works Contract in the form attached hereto as Exhibit "A." 1.2.2 Phased work, work by Others: This park is being completed in phases and with multiple contracts working at the same time. Contractor shall coordinate work with other contractors and the city to ensure proper coordination. Portions of this contract will be completed at separate times. There shall be no adjustment in cost for remobilization, schedule impacts or other items related to the phasing of this work. 1.3 Liquidated Damages. Time is of the essence of the Contract. Delays inconvenience the public and cost taxpayers undue sums of money, adding time needed for administration, inspection, and supervision. It is impractical for the City to calculate the actual cost of delays. Accordingly, the Contractor agrees to pay liquidated damages calculated on the following formula for its failure to complete this Contract on time: (1) To pay (according to the following formula) liquidated damages for each working day beyond the number of working days established for completion, and (2) To authorize the City to deduct these liquidated damages from any money due or coming due to the Contractor. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FORMULA LD = 0.15C T Where: LD = Liquidated damages per working day (rounded to the nearest dollar). C = Original Contract amount. T = Original time for completion. When the Work is completed to the extent that the City has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities, both from an operational and safety standpoint, the City may determine the Work is complete. Liquidated damages will not be assessed for any days for which an extension of time is granted. No deduction or payment of liquidated damages will, in any degree, release the Contractor from further obligations and liabilities to complete this entire Contract. 1.4 Performance Standard. Contractor shall perform the Work in a manner consistent with accepted practices for other properly licensed contractors. 1.5 Compliance with Laws. Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with all applicable federal, state and City laws, including but not limited to all City ordinances, resolutions, standards or policies, as now existing or hereafter adopted or amended, and obtain all necessary permits and pay all permit, inspection or other fees, at its sole cost and expense. 1.6 Change Orders. The City may, at any time, without notice to sureties, order changes within the scope of the Work. Contractor agrees to fully perform any such alterations or additions to the Work. All such change orders shall be in the form of the Contract Change Order Agreement attached hereto as Exhibit "B," which shall be signed by both the Contractor and the City, shall City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 27 RFB # 15 -012 2015 specifically state the change of the Work, the completion date for such changed Work, and any increase or decrease in the compensation to be paid to Contractor as a result of such change in the Work. Oral change orders shall not be binding upon the City unless confirmed in writing by the City. If any change hereunder causes an increases or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, the performance or any part of the Work under this Contract, an equitable adjustment will be made and the Contract modified in writing accordingly. The Contractor shall be limited to a total markup of 15% overhead and profit on the direct costs of the work. Overhead shall include office expenses, bonding, insurance, small tools, trailer, superintendent and the like. No claim for loss of profit for time that could be spent on other projects shall be allowed. Subcontractors shall be subject to the same terms and conditions. If the Contractor intends to assert a claim for an equitable adjustment hereunder, it shall, within five (5) days after receipt of a written change order from the City or after giving the written notice required above, as the case may be, submit to the City a written statement setting forth the general nature and monetary extent of such claim; provided the City, in its sole discretion, may extend such five (5) day submittal period upon request by the Contractor. The Contractor shall supply such supporting documents and analysis for the claims as the City may require to determine if the claims and costs have merit. No claim will be allowed for any costs incurred more than five (5) days before the Contractor gives written notice as required. No claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment hereunder will be allowed if asserted after final payment under this Contract. 1.7 Work and Materials Omitted. The Contractor shall, when directed in writing by the City, omit work, services and materials to be furnished under the Contract and the value of the omitted work and materials will be deducted from the Total Compensation and the delivery schedule will be reviewed if appropriate. The value of the omitted work, services and materials will be a lump sum or unit price, as mutually agreed upon in writing by the Contractor and the City. If the parties cannot agree on an appropriate deduction, the City reserves the right to issue a unilateral change order adjusting the price and the delivery schedule. 1.8 Utility Location. Contractor is responsible for locating any underground utilities affected by the Work and is deemed to be an excavator for purposes of Chapter 19.122 RCW, as amended. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with Chapter 19.122 RCW, including utilization of the "one call" locator system before commencing any excavation activities. 1.9 Air Environment. Contractor shall fully cover any and all loads of loose construction materials including without limitation, sand, dirt, gravel, asphalt, excavated materials, construction debris, etc., to protect said materials from air exposure and to minimize emission of airborne particles to the ambient air environment within the City of Federal Way. 1.10 Weather. Contractor understands and acknowledges that this geographical region experiences an extensive rainy season. Contractor acknowledges that it is experienced with working on and accomplishing similar projects during this rainy season and has prepared its bid taking the impacts of the rainy season on the progress of the work into full consideration. Accordingly, the Owner will authorize additional costs or extensions of time to the Contract unless the job site experiences a (100) year (1 %) (or greater) storm event, in which case adjustments to the contract amount or time may be allowed, depending upon the particular facts and circumstances at that time. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 28 RFB # 15 -012 2015 2. TERM This Contract shall commence on the effective date of this Contract and continue until the substantial completion of the Work, which shall be no later than the time frame indicated in article 1.2, TIME, and the expiration of all warranties contained in the Contract Documents ("Term "). 3. WARRANTY 3.1 Requisite Skill. The Contractor warrants that it has the requisite skill to complete the Work, and is appropriately accredited and licensed by all applicable agencies and governmental entities, including but not limited to being registered to do business in the City of Federal Way by obtaining a City of Federal Way business registration. Contractor represents that it has visited the site and is familiar with all of the plans and specifications in connection with the completion of the Work. 3.2 Defective Work. The Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, correct all Work which the City deems to have defects in workmanship and material discovered within one (1) year after the City's final acceptance of the Work as more fully set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract; provided, however, that this warranty may extend beyond this time period pursuant to any warranties attached hereto and incorporated by this reference. This warranty shall survive termination of this Contract. Conducting of tests and inspections, review of specifications or plans, payment for goods or services, or acceptance by the City does not constitute waiver, modification or exclusion of any express or implied warranty or any right under this Contract or law. 4. COMPENSATION 4.1 Total Compensation. In consideration of the Contractor performing the Work, the City agrees to pay the Contractor an amount not to exceed Three Hundred Thirty-Nine Thousand, Nine Hundred and Ninety-Seven and 72/100 Dollars ($339,997.72), which includes Washington State Sales Taxes, such amount shall constitute full and complete payment by the City ("Total Compensation "). 4.2 Contractor Responsible for Taxes. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment of any taxes imposed by any lawful jurisdiction as a result of the performance and payment of this Contract. 4.3 Nonpayment. The City shall have the right to withhold payment to the Contractor for any of the Work not completed in a satisfactory manner, in the City's sole discretion, which shall be withheld until such time as Contractor modifies or repairs the Work so that the Work is acceptable to the City. 4.4 Method of Payment. The basis of payment will be the actual quantities of work performed according to the contract and as specified for payment. Payments will be made for work and labor performed and materials furnished under the contract according to the price in the proposal unless otherwise provided. Partial payments will be made once each month, based on partial estimates prepared by the Engineer and signed by the Contractor. Failure to perform any obligation under this Contract may be adequate reason for the City to withhold payments until the obligation is performed. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 29 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Upon completion of all work and after final inspection, the amount due the Contractor under the contract will be paid based upon the final estimate made by the Engineer and signed by the Contractor. Payment to the Contractor for partial estimates, final estimates, and retained percentages shall be subject to controlling laws. 4.5 Retainage. Pursuant to Chapter 60.28 RCW, five percent (5 %) of the Total Compensation shall be retained by the City to assure payment of Contractor's state sales tax as well as payment of subcontractors, suppliers and laborers. Upon execution of this Contract, Contractor shall complete, execute and deliver to the City the Contractor Retainage Agreement attached hereto as Exhibit "C" or execute the Retainage Bond attached hereto as Exhibit "D." No payments shall be made by the City from the retained percentage fund ("Fund') nor shall the City release any retained percentage escrow account to any person, until the City has received from the Department of Revenue a certificate that all taxes, increases, and penalties due from the Contractor and all taxes due and to become due with respect to the Contract have been paid in full or that they are, in the Department's opinion, readily collectible without recourse to the State's lien on the retained percentage. Upon non - payment by the general contractor, any supplier or subcontractor may file a lien against the retainage funds, pursuant to Chapter 60.28 RCW. Subcontractors or suppliers are required to give notice of any lien within forty -five (45) days of the completion of the Work and in the manner provided in RCW 39.08.030. Within sixty (60) days after completion of all Work on this Contract, the City shall release and pay in full the money held in the Fund, unless the City becomes aware of outstanding claims made against this Fund. 5. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER In all Contractor services, programs or activities, and all Contractor hiring and employment made possible by or resulting from this Contract, there shall be no discrimination by Contractor or by Contractor's employees, agents, subcontractors or representatives against any person because of sex, age (except minimum age and retirement provisions), race, color, creed, national origin, marital status or the presence of any disability, including sensory, mental or physical handicaps, unless based upon a bona fide occupational qualification in relationship to hiring and employment, advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training, including apprenticeship. Contractor shall comply with, and shall not violate any of the terms of, Chapter 49.60 RCW, Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, the Americans With Disabilities Act, Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, 49 CFR Part 26, or any other applicable federal, state, or local law or regulation regarding non - discrimination. Any material violation of this provision shall be grounds for termination of this Contract by the City and, in the case of the Contractor's breach, may result in ineligibility for further City agreements. If this project involves federal funds including USDOT funds administered by WSDOT, the contractor agrees to the clauses contained in Exhibit H. 6. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR /CONFLICT OF INTEREST 6.1 It is the intention and understanding of the Parties that the Contractor shall be an independent contractor and that the City shall be neither liable nor obligated to pay Contractor sick leave, vacation pay or any other benefit of employment, nor to pay any social security or other tax which may arise as an incident of employment. The Contractor shall pay all income and other taxes due. Industrial or any other insurance that is purchased for the benefit of the City, regardless of whether such may provide a secondary or incidental benefit to the Contractor, shall not be deemed to convert this Agreement to an employment contract. It is recognized that Contractor may or will be performing professional services during the Term for other parties; provided, however, that such City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 30 RFB # 15 -012 2015 performance of other services shall not conflict with or interfere with Contractor's ability to perform the Services. Contractor agrees to resolve any such conflicts of interest in favor of the City. 6.2 If the Contractor is a sole proprietorship or if this is a contract with an individual, the contractor agrees to notify the City and complete any required form if the Contractor retired under a State of Washington retirement system and agrees to indemnify any losses the City may sustain through the Contractor's failure to do so. 7. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT 7.1 Termination Without Cause. Prior to the expiration of the Term, this Contract may be terminated without cause upon oral or written notice delivered to Contractor from the City. Upon termination, all supplies, materials, labor and /or equipment furnished prior to such date shall, at the City's option, become its property. In the event Contractor is not in breach of any of the provisions of this Contract, Contractor will be paid for any portion of the Work which has been completed to the City's satisfaction, calculated by the percentage amount that portion of the Work completed and accepted by the City bears to the Total Compensation. 7.2 Termination For Cause. The City may immediately terminate this Contract, take possession of the Property and all materials thereon and finish the Work by whatever methods it may deem expedient, upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: (1) If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt. (2) If the Contractor should make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors. (3) If a receiver should be appointed on the account of insolvency of Contractor. (4) If Contractor should persistently or repeatedly refuse or fail to supply a sufficient number of properly skilled workmen or proper materials for completion of the Work. (5) If the Contractor should fail to complete the Work within the time specified in this Contract. (6) If the Contractor should fail to complete the Work in compliance with the plans and specifications, to the City's satisfaction. (7) If the Contractor should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for material labor. (8) If Contractor should persistently disregard laws, ordinances or regulations of federal, state, or municipal agencies or subdivisions thereof. (9) If Contractor should persistently disregard instructions of the Mayor or his or her representative. (10) If Contractor shall be in breach or violation of any term or provision of this Contract, or City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 31 RFB # 15 -012 2015 (11) If the Work is not being performed pursuant to RCW 49.28.050 or 49.28.060. 7.3 Result of Termination. In the event that this Contract is terminated for cause by the City, the City may do any or all of the following: (1) Stop payments. The City shall cease any further payments to Contractor and Contractor shall be obligated to repay any payments it received under this contract. (2) Complete Work. The City may, but in no event is the City obligated to, complete the Work, which Work may be completed by the City's agents, employees or representatives or the City may retain independent persons or entities to complete the Work. Upon demand, Contractor agrees to pay to the City all of its costs and expenses in completing such Work. (3) Take Possession. The City may take possession of the Property and any equipment and materials on the Property and may sale the same, the proceeds of which shall be paid to the City for its damages. (4) Remedies Not Exclusive. No remedy or election under this Contract shall be deemed an election by the City but shall be cumulative and in addition to all other remedies available to the City at law, in equity or by statute. 8. INDEMNIFICATION 8.1 Contractor Indemnification. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold the City, its elected officials, officers, employees, agents, and volunteers harmless from any and all claims, demands, losses, actions and liabilities (including costs and all attorney fees) to or by any and all persons or entities, including, without limitation, their respective agents, licensees, or representatives, arising from, resulting from, or connected with this Contract to the extent caused by the negligent acts, errors or omissions of the Contractor, its partners, shareholders, agents, employees, or by the Contractor's breach of this Contract. Contractor waives any immunity that may be granted to it under the Washington State Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51 RCW. Contractor's indemnification shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount of damages, compensation or benefits payable to or by any third party under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or any other benefits acts or programs. 8.2 City Indemnification. The City agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold the Contractor, its officers, directors, shareholders, partners, employees, and agents harmless from any and all claims, demands, losses, actions and liabilities (including costs and attorney fees) to or by any and all persons or entities, including without limitation, their respective agents, licenses, or representatives, arising from, resulting from or connected with this Contract to the extent solely caused by the negligent acts, errors, or omissions of the City, its employees or agents. 8.3 Survival. The provisions of this Section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Contract with respect to any event occurring prior to such expiration or termination. 9. INSURANCE 9.1 Minimum Limits. The Contractor agrees to carry as a minimum, the following insurance, in such forms and with such carriers who have a rating which is satisfactory to the City: City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 32 RFB # 15 -012 2015 (1) Workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance in amounts sufficient pursuant to the laws of the State of Washington; (2) Commercial general liability insurance with combined single limits of liability not Tess than $2,000,000 for bodily injury, including personal injury or death, products liability and property damage. (3) Automobile liability insurance with combined single limits of liability not less than $2,000,000 for bodily injury, including personal injury or death and property damage. (4) If any structures are involved in the Contract, the Contractor shall maintain an All Builder's Risk form at all times in an amount no less than the value of the structure until final acceptance of the project by the City. 9.2 Endorsements. Each insurance policy shall contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions: (1) The City, its officers, officials, employees, volunteers and agents shall each be named as additional insured. (2) Coverage may not be terminated or reduced in limits except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, to the City. (3) Coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the City, its officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self- insurance maintained by the City, its officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of Contractor's insurance. (4) Coverage shall apply to each insured separately against whom claim is made or suit is brought. (5) Coverage shall be written on an "occurrence" form as opposed to a "claims made" or "claims paid" form. 9.3 Verification. Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance evidencing the coverage required by the Section, in compliance with the Certificate(s) of Insurance Form attached hereto as Exhibit "F," which certificate must be executed by a person authorized by the insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The City reserves the right to require complete certified copies of all required insurance policies, at any time. 9.4 Subcontractors. Contractors shall include all subcontractors as additional insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates for each subcontractor. All coverage for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. 9.5 Deductibles and Self- Insured Retentions. Any deductibles or self- insured retentions must be disclosed by Contractor and approved in writing by the City. At the option of the City, Contractor shall either reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self- insured retentions or procure a bond guaranteeing payment for any amounts not covered by the insurance by reason of such deductibles or self- insured retentions. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 33 RFB # 15 -012 2015 9.6 Asbestos Abatement or Hazardous Materials. If asbestos abatement or hazardous materials work is performed, Contractor shall review coverage with the City's Risk Manager and provide scope and limits of coverage that are appropriate for the scope of Work and are satisfactory to the City. Contractor shall not commence any Work until its coverage has been approved by the Risk Manager. 9.7 Termination. The Contractor's failure to provide the insurance coverage required by this Section shall be deemed to constitute non - acceptance of this Contract by the Contractor and the City may then award this Contract to the next lower bidder. 10. PERFORMANCE /PAYMENT BOND Pursuant to RCW 39.08.010, Contractor shall post a Performance /Payment Bond in favor of the City, in the form attached to this Contract as Exhibit "G" and incorporated by this reference, in a dollar amount satisfactory to the City; to guarantee Contractor's performance of the Work to the City's satisfaction; to insure Contractor's performance of all of the provisions of this Contract; and to guarantee Contractor's payment of all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and material persons. Contractor's obligations under this Contract shall not be limited to the dollar amount of the bond. 11. SAFETY Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work site and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal safety and health laws and codes, including without limitation, all OSHA /WISHA requirements, Safety and Health Standards for Construction Work (Chapter 296 -155 WAC), General Safety and Health Standards (Chapter 296 -24 WAC), and General Occupational Health Standards (Chapter 296 -62 WAC). Contractor shall erect and properly maintain, at all times, all necessary guards, barricades, signals and other safeguards at all unsafe places at or near the Work for the protection of its employees and the public, safe passageways at all road crossings, crosswalks, street intersections, post danger signs warning against any known or unusual hazards and do all other things necessary to prevent accident or loss of any kind. Contractor shall protect from danger all water, sewer, gas, steam or other pipes or conduits, and all hydrants and all other property that is likely to become displaced or damaged by the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall, at its own expense, secure and maintain a safe storage place for its materials and equipment and is solely responsible for the same. 12. PREVAILING WAGES 12.1 Wages of Employees. This contract is subject to the minimum wage requirements of Chapter 39.12 RCW and Chapter 49.28 RCW (as amended or supplemented). On Federal -aid projects, Federal wage laws and rules also apply. The Hourly minimum rates for wages and fringe benefits are listed in Appendix C. The Contractor, any subcontractor, and all individuals or firms required by Chapter 39.12 RCW, Chapter 296 -127 WAC, or the Federal Davis -Bacon and Related Acts (DBRA) to pay minimum prevailing wages, shall not pay any worker less than the minimum hourly wage rates and fringe benefits required by Chapter 39.12 RCW or the DBRA. Higher wages and benefits may be paid. When the project is subject to both State and Federal hourly minimum rates for wages and fringe benefits and when the two rates differ for similar kinds of labor, the Contractor shall not pay less than the higher rate unless the state rates are specifically preempted by Federal law. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 34 RFB # 15 -012 2015 The Contractor shall ensure that any firm (Supplier, Manufacturer, or Fabricator) that falls under the provisions of Chapter 39.12 RCW because of the definition "Contractor" in Chapter 296- 127 -010 WAC, complies with all the requirements of Chapter 39.12 RCW. 12.2 Exemptions to Prevailing Wage. The prevailing wage requirements of Chapter 39.12 RCW, and as required in this Contract do not apply to: (1) Sole owners and their spouses; (2) Any partner who owns at least 30% of a partnership; (3) The President, Vice President and Treasurer of a corporation if each one owns at least 30% of the corporation. 12.3 Reporting Requirements. On forms provided by the Industrial Statistician of State L&I, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following for itself and for each firm covered under Chapter 39.12 RCW that provided work and materials of the contract: (1) A copy of an approved "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages" State L&I form number F700- 029 -000. The City will make no payment under this contract for the work performed until this statement has been approved by State L&I and a certified copy of the approved form has been submitted to the City. (2) A copy of an approved "Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid," State L&I form number F700- 007 -000. The City will not release to the contractor any funds retained under Chapter 60.28.011 RCW until all of the "Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid" forms have been approved by State L&I and a certified copy of all the approved forms have been submitted to the City. The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting these forms from the State L&I and for paying any approval fees required by State L&I. Certified payrolls are required to be submitted by the Contractor to the City, for the Contractor and all subcontractors or lower tier subcontractors. 12.4 Disputes. In the event any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing rates of wages for work of a similar nature and such dispute cannot be resolved by the City and the Contractor, the matter shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State of Washington and the decision therein shall be final and conclusive and binding on all parties involved in the dispute. 13. FAILURE TO PAY SUBCONTRACTORS In the event the Contractor shall fail to pay any subcontractors or laborers, fail to pay for any materials, or fail to pay any insurance premiums, the City may terminate this Contract and /or the City may withhold from the money which may be due the Contractor an amount necessary for the payment of such subcontractors, laborers, materials or premiums. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 35 RFB # 15 -012 2015 14. OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS All originals and copies of work product, including plans, sketches, layouts, designs, design specifications, records, files, computer disks, magnetic media, all finished or unfinished documents or material which may be produced or modified by Contractor while performing the Work shall become the property of the City and shall be delivered to the City at its request. 15. CONFIDENTIALITY Any records, reports, information, data or other documents or materials given to or prepared or assembled by the Contractor under this Contract will be kept as confidential and shall not be made available to any individual or organization by the Contractor without prior written approval of the City. 16. BOOKS AND RECORDS The Contractor agrees to maintain books, records, and documents which sufficiently and properly reflect all direct and indirect costs related to the performance of this Contract and such accounting procedures and practices as may be deemed necessary by the City to assure proper accounting of all funds paid pursuant to this Contract. These records shall be subject at all reasonable times to inspection, review or audit by the City, its authorized representative, the State Auditor, or other governmental officials authorized by law to monitor this Contract. 17. CLEAN UP At any time ordered by the City and immediately after completion of the Work, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, clean up and remove all refuse and unused materials of any kind resulting from the Work. In the event the Contractor fails to perform the necessary clean up, the City may, but in no event is it obligated to, perform the necessary clean up and the costs thereof shall be immediately paid by the Contractor to the City and /or the City may deduct its costs from any remaining payments due to the Contractor. 18. CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY: 18.1 Contractor Verification. The Contractor verifies that it has a certificate of registration with the State of Washington; has a current state unified business identifier number; is not disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3); has industrial insurance as required by Title 51 RCW, if applicable; has an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW, if applicable; has a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW, if applicable; possesses a valid electrical contractor license as required by chapter 19.28 RCW, if applicable; and possesses an elevator contractor license as required by chapter 70.87 RCW, if applicable. 18.2 Subcontractor Contracts. The Contractor shall include the language of this section in each of its first tier subcontracts, and shall require each of its subcontractors to include the same language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this section apply to all subcontractors regardless of tier. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 36 RFB # 15 -012 2015 18.3 Subcontractor Verification. At the time of subcontract execution, the Contractor shall verify that each of its first tier subcontractors meets the following bidder responsibility criteria: Have a current certificate of registration in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal; Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number; Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3); Have Industrial Insurance (workers' compensation) coverage for the subcontractor's employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW, if applicable; A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50 RCW, if applicable; A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as required in Title 82 RCW, if applicable; An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW, if applicable; An elevator contractor license, if required by Chapter 70.87 RCW. 19. GENERAL PROVISIONS 19.1 Entire Contract. The Contract Documents contain all of the agreements of the Parties with respect to any matter covered or mentioned in this Contract and no prior agreements or understandings pertaining to any such matters shall be effective for any purpose. 19.2 Modification. No provisions of this Contract, including this provision, may be amended or added to except by agreement in writing signed by the Parties or their respective successors in interest. 19.3 Full Force and Effect. Any provision of this Contract, which is declared invalid, void or illegal, shall in no way affect, impair, or invalidate any other provision hereof and such other provisions shall remain in full force and effect. 19.4 Assignment. The Contractor shall not transfer or assign, in whole or in part, any or all of its obligations and rights hereunder without the prior written consent of the City. In the event the City consents to any such assignment or transfer, such consent shall in no way release the Contractor from any of its obligations or liabilities under this Contract. 19.5 Successors In Interest. Subject to the preceding Subsection, this Contract shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Parties' successors in interest, heirs and assigns. 19.6 Attorney Fees. In the event the City or the Contractor defaults on the performance of any terms in this Contract, and the Contractor or City places the enforcement of the Contract or any part thereof, or the collection of any monies due, or to become due hereunder, or recovery of possession of any belongings, in the hands of an attorney, or file suit upon the same, each Party shall pay all its own attorneys' fees, costs and expenses. The venue for any dispute related to this Contract shall be King County, Washington. 19.7 No Waiver. Failure of the City to declare any breach or default immediately upon occurrence thereof, or delay in taking any action in connection with, shall not waive such breach or default. Failure of the City to declare one breach or default does not act as a waiver of the City's right to declare another breach or default. 19.8 Governing Law. This Contract shall be made in and shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of Washington. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 37 RFB # 15 -012 2015 19.9 Authority. Each individual executing this Contract on behalf of the City and Contractor represents and warrants that such individuals are duly authorized to execute and deliver this Contract on behalf of the Contractor or City. 19.10 Notices. Any notices required to be given by the City to Contractor or by the Contractor to the City shall be delivered to the Parties at the addresses set forth below. Any notices may be delivered personally to the addressee of the notice or may be deposited in the United States mail, postage prepaid, to the address set forth herein. Any notice so posted in the United States mail shall be deemed received three (3) days after the date of mailing. 19.11 Captions. The respective captions of the Sections of this Contract are inserted for convenience of reference only and shall not be deemed to modify or otherwise affect in any respect any of the provisions of this Contract. 19.12 Performance. Time is of the essence of this Contract and each and all of its provisions in which performance is a factor. Adherence to completion dates is essential to the Contractor's performance of this Contract. 19.13 Compliance with Ethics Code. If a violation of the City's Ethics Resolution No. 91 -54, as amended, occurs as a result of the formation and /or performance of this Contract, this Contract may be rendered null and void, at the City's option. 19.14 Conflicting Provisions. In the event of a conflict between the terms and provisions of any of the Contract Documents, the Mayor or his or her designee shall issue an interpretation of the controlling document, which interpretation shall be final and binding. DATED the day and year set forth above. CITY OF FED A L WAY By: ATTEST: -rk, Stephanie Courtne APPROVED AS TO FORM: r .'b'City Attorney, my Jo Pearsall City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Ferrell, Mayor 3325 8th Avenue South Federal Way, WA 98003 -6325 Page 38 RFB # 15 -012 2015 STATE OF WASHINGTON COUNTY OF Y.--,'r-v3 ) ss. Amerioai Guaran oofng and Con n, Inc., By: (Signature (Name) O, (01 u1/4J, - ei:3S (Address) 4-'L1�2�-5ay (Phone) On this day personally appeared before me 'Aflh€ u t hk5 , to me known to be the 0 uki vver of Le ' , a . L.�. _... , that executed the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged the said instrument to be the fre- and voluntary act and deed of said corporation, for the uses and purposes therein mentioned, and on oath stated that he /she was authorized to execute said instrument and that the seal affixed, if any, is the corporate seal of said corporation. GIVEN my hand and official seal thi 0 )EANN 0 o. �'S NOTARY 7.-;n)..%,......t•tatxy-,- I, PUBUC 2 0.,; OF wAsitk .0, City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 day of 201. (me IA vWh e� (typed /printed name of notary) Notary Public in and for the State of Washington. My commission expires C`71- b f , - Z ()t Oi Page 39 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Date: ❑ Original ❑ Revised # NOTICE OF COMPLETION OF PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT Contractor's UBI Number: n UBI Number: t Assigned to: Date Assigned: Notice is hereby given relative to the complet'on of contract or project described below Project Name Contract Number Job Order Contracting ❑ Yes ❑ No Description of Work Done/Include Jobsite Address(es) Federally funded transportation project? ❑ Yes ❑ No (if yes, provide Contract Bond Statement below) Contractor's Name E -mail Address Affidavit ID* Contractor Address Telephone # If Retainage is not withheld, please select one of the following and List Surety's Name & Bond Number. ❑ Retainage Bond ❑ Contract/Payment bond (valid for federally funded transportation projects) Name: Bond Number: Date Contract Awarded Date Work Commenced Date Work Completed Date Work Accepted Were Subcontracters'used on this project? If; so, please complete Addendum A. ❑Yes ❑ No At idavit ID* - No L &I release will he granted until all affidavits are listed. Contract Amount Additions (+ ) Reductions (- ) Sub -Total Sales Tax Rate (If various rates apply, please send a breakdown) Sales Tax Amount $ 0.00 $ TOTAL $ 0 OQ NOTE: These two totals must be equal Liquidated Damages $ Amount Disbursed $ Amount Retained $ TOTAL $ 0.00 Note: The Disbursing Officer must submit this completed notice immediately after acceptance of the work done under this contract. NO PAYMENT SHALL BE MADE FROM RETAINED FUNDS until receipt of all release certificates. Submitting Form: Please submit the completed form by email to all three agencies below. Contact Name: Email Address: raDepartment of Revenue fCr.Public Works Section (360) 704-5650 PWC©dor.wa.gov REV 31 0020e (10/26/15) F215- 038 -000 10 -2014 Washington State Department of Labor & Industries Contract Release (855) 545 -8163, option # 4 ContractRelease@LNI. WA.GOV Title: Phone Number: Employment Security Department Registration, Inquiry, Standards & Coordination Unit (360) 902-9450 pu bl icworks©esd.wa. gov Addendum A: Please List all Subcontractors and Sub -tiers Below This addendum can be submitted in other formats. Provide known affidavits at this time. No L &I release will be eranted until all affidavits are listed. Subcontractor's Name: UBI Number: (Required) Affidavit ID* For tax assistance or to request this document in an alternate format, please call 1- 800 - 647 -7706. Teletype (TTY) users may use the Washington Relay Service by calling 711. REV 31 0020e Addendum (10/26/15) F215- 038 -000 10 -2014 EXHIBIT B CITY OF FEDERAL WAY CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER AGREEMENT PROJECT CHANGE ORDER EFFECTIVE DATE NUMBER NUMBER PROJECT TITLE CONTRACTOR SUMMARY OF PROPOSED CHANGES: The time provided for completion in the Contract is ❑ Unchanged ❑ Increased ❑ Decreased by Calendar Days. This Document shall become an Amendment to the Contract and all provisions of the Contract not amended herein will apply to this Change Order. Will this change affect expiration or extent of Insurance coverage? If "Yes" Will the Policies Be Extended? ❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Yes ❑ No PRICE CHANGE LUMP SUM: INCREASE $ DECREASE $ UNIT PRICE: THE ITEMS ARE APPROXIMATE OR ESTIMATED QUANTITIES INVOLVED IN THIS CHANGE ITEM NO. ITEM QUANTITY UNIT PRICE ADD OR DELETE TOTAL NET CONTRACT: INCREASE $ DECREASE $ STATEMENT: Payment for the above work will be in accordance with applicable portions of the standard specifications, and with the understanding that all materials, workmanship and measurements shall be in accordance with the provisions of the standard specifications, the contract plans, and the special provisions governing the types of construction. CONTRACTOR'S DEPT. DIRECTOR /MANAGER DATE SIGNATURE SIGNATURE City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 40 RFB # 15 -012 2015 DEPARTMENT RECAP TO DATE: *Adjustments: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT $ PREVIOUS CHANGE ORDERS $ THIS CHANGE ORDER $ *ADJUSTMENTS $ NEW CONTRACT AMOUNT $ ADJUSTMENTS CHANGE ORDER ESTIMATE IS HEREBY PAY THIS ADJUSTED AMOUNT City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 ❑ INCREASED $ ❑ DECREASED $ DEPARTMENT DIRECTOR'S SIGNATURE Page 41 RFB # 15 -012 2015 City of Federal Way 33325 8th Avenue South Federal Way, WA 98003 -6325 253 - 835 -7000 EXHIBIT C CONTRACTOR'S RETAINAGE AGREEMENT Bid /Contract Number IDENTIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION G Project Title: Town Square Park Phase 4 Bui /dings lita°Of: S b�'i Contractor PcIkke t Ci 60,202A ,J' E\ 2 Representativ Bid No. 15 -012 Date Administering Department Parks City Representative Steve Ikerd Funding Source Project Authority RETAINAGE FORMULA In accordance with applicable State Statutes, the following provisions will be made for the disposition of the retainage held for investment: 1. All investments selected below are subject to City approval. 2. Retainage under this agreement will be held in escrow by the (referred to herein as the Bank), the terms of which are specified by separate escrow agreement. The cost of the investment program and the risk thereof is to be borne entirely by the contractor. 3. The final disposition of the contract retainage will be made in accordance with applicable statutes. CONTRACTOR'S INSTRUCTIONS Pursuant to RCW 60.28.010 I hereby notify the City of Federal Way of my instructions ❑ to invest la'not to invest the retainage withheld under the terms of this contract. If the investment option is selected, please provide the following information: Name of Bank, Mutual Fund, or Savings & Loan Association: Address: Account #: Contact Person: Contractor: Date: By: Title: Address: Phone: Fed ID #: Est. Completion Date: CITY APPROVAL Approval of Investment Program and Retainage Agreement Finance Director Date CERTIFICATION FOR RELEASE OF CONTRACT RETAINAGE Contract No. Project Title: I hereby certify, as Contract Administrator for this Contract representing the City of Federal Way, that all work required by the above cited contract was completed on and final acceptance by the City was granted on I also certify that no liens have been received within 30 days from the above date from any person, persons, mechanics, subcontractors or materialman who has performed any work or provided any material of subject contract. Contract Administrator Director of Administering Department Also, please find attached certifications by the applicable state agencies of the receipt of: 1) Washington State Business Taxes (Washington State Dept. of Revenue); 2) Industrial Insurance Premiums (State Dept. of Labor & Industries); and 3) Employment Security, Unemployment Insurance Premiums (State of Washington Employment Security Dept.) City of Federal Way RFB # 15 -012 Town Square Park Page 42 2015 RFB ver. 4 -15 EXHIBIT D RETAINAGE BOND TO CITY OF FEDERAL WAY Federal Way Town Square Park, Phase Four — Buildings KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that we, the undersigned, as principal ("Principal "), and , a Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of as a surety Corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of Contractors with Municipal Corporations, as surety ("Surety"), are jointly and severally held and firmly bonded to the City of Federal Way ("City") in the penal sum of: ($ ) for the payment of which sum we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representatives, as the case may be. A. This obligation is entered into in pursuant to the statutes of the State of Washington and the ordinances, regulations, standards and policies of the City, as now existing or hereafter amended or adopted. B. Pursuant to proper authorization, the Mayor is authorized to enter into a certain contract with the Principal, providing for the Project, which contract is incorporated herein by this reference ("Contract "), and C. Pursuant to State law, Chapter 60.28 RCW, the City is required to reserve from the monies earned by the Principal pursuant to the contract, a sum not to exceed five percent (5 %), said sum to be retained by the City as a trust fund for the protection and payment of any person or persons, mechanic, subcontractor or materialmen who shall perform any labor upon such contract or the doing of such work, and all persons who shall supply such person or persons or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of such work, and the State with the respect to taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW which may be due from said Principal. Every person performing labor or furnishing supplies towards completion of said improvement or work shall have a lien on said monies so reserved, provided that such notice of the lien of such claimant shall be given in the manner and within the time provided in RCW 39.08.030 as now existing and in accordance with any amendments that may hereafter be provided thereto; and D. State law further provides that with the consent of the City, the Principal may submit a bond for all or any portion of the amount of funds retained by the public body in a form acceptable to the public body conditioned upon such bond any proceeds therefrom being made subject to all claims and liens and in the same manner and priority as set forth retained percentages pursuant to Chapter 60.28 RCW; and E. The Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the Contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth, for the amount of $ ; and F. The City is prepared to release any required retainage money previously paid by the Principal prior to acceptance and successful operation and fulfillment of all other terms of said contract upon being indemnified by these presents, NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall perform all the provisions of the Contract in the manner and within the time period prescribed by the City, or within such extensions of time as may be granted under the Contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and material men or women, and all persons who shall supply the Principal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work, and if the Principal shall pay to the State all taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW which may be due from such Principal as a result of this contract then and in the event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. And the Surety, for value received, hereby further stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the Work. The Surety hereby agrees that modifications and changes may be made in the terms and provisions of the Contract without notice to Surety, and any such modifications or changes increasing the total amount to be paid the Principal shall automatically increase the obligation of the Surety on this Retainage Bond in a like amount, such increase, however, not to exceed twenty-five percent (25 %) of the original amount of this bond without consent of the Surety. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 43 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Within forty-five (45) days of receiving notice that the Principal has defaulted on all or part of the terms of the Contract, the Surety shall make written commitment to the City that it will either: (a) cure the default itself within a reasonable time period, or (b) tender to the City, the amount necessary for the City to remedy the default, including legal fees incurred by the City, or (c) in the event that Surety's evaluation of the dispute is not complete or in the event the Surety disputes the City's claim of default, the Surety shall notify the City of its finding and its intent, if any, to interplead. The Surety shall then fulfill its obligations under this bond, according to the option it has elected. Should Surety elect option (a) to cure the default, the penal sum of the Bond shall be reduced in an amount equal to the costs actually incurred by the Surety in curing the default. If the Surety elects option (b), then upon completion of the necessary work, the City shall notify the Surety of its actual costs. The City shall return, without interest, any overpayment made by the Surety and the Surety shall pay to the City any actual costs which exceed the City estimate, limited to the bond amount. Should the Surety elect option (c), the Parties shall first complete participation in mediation, described in the below paragraph, prior to any interplead action. In the event a dispute should arise between the Parties to this Bond with respect to the City's declaration of default by the Principal, the Parties agree to participate in at least four hours of mediation in accordance with the mediation procedures of United States Arbitration and Mediation ("USA &M "). The Parties shall proportionately share in the cost of the mediation. The mediation shall be administered by the Seattle USA &M office, 4300 Two Union Square, 601 Union Street, Seattle, Washington 98101 -2327. The Surety shall not interplead prior to completion of the mediation. The parties have executed this instrument under their separate seals this day of 20 , the name and corporate seal of each corporate party hereto affixed, and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representatives pursuant to authority of its governing body. CORPORATE SEAL: CORPORATE SEAL: City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 44 PRINCIPAL By: Title: Address: SURETY By: Attorney -in -Fact (Attach Power of Attorney) Title: Address: RFB # 15 -012 2015 CERTIFICATES AS TO CORPORATE SEAL I hereby certify that I am the (Assistant) Secretary of the Corporation named as Principal in the within bond; that , who signed the said bond on behalf of the Principal, was of said Corporation; that I know his or her signature thereto is genuine, and that said bond was duly signed, sealed, and attested for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. Secretary of Assistant Secretary I hereby certify that I am the (Assistant) Secretary of the Corporation named as Surety in the within bond; that , who signed the said bond on behalf of the Surety, was of the said Corporation; that I know his or her signature thereto is genuine, and that said bond was duly signed, sealed, and attested for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. APPROVED AS TO FORM: Amy Jo Pearsall, City Attorney City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 45 Secretary of Assistant Secretary RFB # 15 -012 2015 EXHIBIT E NOTICE TO LABOR UNIONS OR OTHER EMPLOYMENT ORGANIZATIONS NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT TO: ALL EMPLOYEES AND TO: e (Name of Union or Organization) The undersigned currently holds contract(s) with d)ON F involving funds or credit of the City of Federal Way, Washington, or (a) subcontract(s) with a prime contractor holding such contract(s). You are advised that, under the provisions of the above contract(s) or subcontract(s) and in accordance with Section 202 of Executive Order 11246 dated September 24, 1965, the undersigned is obliged not to discriminate against any employee or applicant of employment because of race, color, creed or national origin. This obligation not to discriminate in employment includes, but is not limited to, the following: EMPLOYMENT, UPGRADING, TRANSFER OR DEMOTION RECRUITMENT AND ADVERTISING RATES OF PAY OR OTHER FORMS OF COMPENSATION SELECTION FOR TRAINING INCLUDING APPRENTICESHIP, LAYOFF OR TERMINATION This notice is furnished to you pursuant to the provisions of the above contract(s) or subcontractor(s) and Executive Order 11246. Copies of this Notice will be posted by the undersigned in conspicuous places available to employees or applicants for employment. Complaints may be submitted to: City of Federal Way 33325 8th Avenue South Federal Way, WA 98003 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 46 Woo PTA) Co 11V21 G ietw JT _ \O.13o,c 2y 20 GiG\A-t.c,wPr 98335 (Contractor or subcontractor) Date RFB # 15 -012 2015 A( R/1 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE °AT02 /04/ 016 02/(14f2016 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder Is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Gc Insurance Services 8008 5th Ave NE Seattle, WA 98115 Phone (206)453 -5456 Fax (206)453 -5457 CONTACT NAME: talc.. No. Ext): (206)453 -5456 FAX No); (206)453 -5457 ADDRESS: jm©gcinsuranceservices.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC S INSURER A : Houston Specialty Insurance Company Y INSURED American Guaranteed Roofing & Construction Inc 5708 23rd Street East # 4 Fife WA 98424- INSURER B : 02/03/2016 INSURER C : EACH OCCURRENCE INSURER D : II CLAIMS -MADE Q OCCUR II $4,000,000 PPA INSURER E : $ 50,000.00 INSURER F : $ 5,000.00 COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT W ITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDLSUBR INSR WVD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF (MM/DDIYYYY) POLICY EXP 1MMIDD/YYYY) LIMITS A n COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY Y Y TEN -15284 02/03/2016 02/03/2017 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000.00 II CLAIMS -MADE Q OCCUR II $4,000,000 PPA DAMAGE TO SES {Ea a occurrence) PREMISES ( $ 50,000.00 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000.00 ii PERSONAL BADVINJURY $ 1,000,000.00 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: • POLICY 0 mi . LOC II OTHER GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000.00 PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000.00 Per Project Aggregate $ 4,000,000.00 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ❑ ANY AUTO COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ • AUTOS NED D SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ NON -OWNED HIRED AUTOS ❑ AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ • • $ ❑ UMBRELLA UAB ❑ OCCUR II EXCESS LIAB • CLAIMS -MADE EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ • DED El RETENTION $ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY Y / N OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? ECUTIVEri (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS betov N /A TEN -17019 02/03/2016 02/03/2017 • STATUTE • ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000.00 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYE $ 1,000,000.00 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000.00 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, If more space Is required) The certificate holder The City of Federal Way, Its officers, employees, volunteers and agents are named as an additional insureds On a primary non contributory basis. Project: City of Federal Way, Town Square Park, RFB 15-012 WA Reg# AMERIGR900LH CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION I City of Federal Way PRCS 33325 8Th Avenue South Federal Way WA 98003 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTNOR¢ED REPRESENTATIVE tj _,._.. I LL-( Q ti_ J ACORD 25 (2014/01) QF ®1988 -2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD Bond No. CE11510700737 EXHIBIT G CITY OF FEDERAL WAY PERFORMANCE /PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS: We the undersigned American Guaranteed Roofing & Construction, Inc. , ("Prindpal") and Philadelphia Indemnity Insurance Company, the undersigned corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Pennsylvania and legally doing business in the State of Washington as a surety ("Surety"), are held and firmly bonded unto the City of Federal Way, a Washington municipal corporation ("City") in the penal sum of Three hundred thirty -nine thousand nine * Dollars and no /100 ($ 339,997.72 ) for the payment of which we firmly bind ourselves and our legal representatives, heirs, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. *hundred ninety -seven 72/100 This obligation is entered into an Agreement with the City dated January 20 , 2016 for RFB 15 -012 Federal Way Town Square Park Phase 4 NOW, THEREFORE, if the Prindpal shall perform all the provisions of the Agreement in the manner and within the time period prescribed by the City, or within such extensions of time as may be granted under the Agreement, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and material men or women, and all persons who shall supply the Prindpal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work, and shall hold the City, their officials, agents, employees and volunteers harmless from any loss or damage occasioned to any person or property by reason of any carelessness or negligence on the part of the Prindpal, or any subcontractor in the performance of said work, and shall indemnify and hold the City harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in the Agreement within a period of one (1) year after its final acceptance thereof by the City, then and in the event thls obligation shall be void; but otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect. And the Surety, for value received, hereby further stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and It does hereby waive notice of any change, extension of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work. The Surety hereby agrees that modifications and changes may be made in terms and provisions of the Agreement without notice to Surety, and any such modifications or changes increasing the total amount to be paid the Principal shall automatically Increase the obligation of the Surety on this Performance Bond in a like amount, such increase, however, not to exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the original amount of this bond without the consent of the Surety. Within forty -five (45) days of receiving notice that the Principal has defaulted on all or part of the terms of the Agreement, the Surety shall make a written commitment to the City that It will either: (a) cure the default Itself within a reasonable time period,, or (b) tender to the city, the amount necessary for the City to remedy the default, including legal fees incurred by the City, or (c) In the event that Surety's evaluation of the dispute is not complete or in the event the Surety disputes the City's daim of default, the Surety shall notify the City of its finding and its intent, if any, to interplead. The Surety shall then fulfill its obligations under thls bond, according to the option it has elected. Should Surety elect option (a) to cure the default, the penal sum of the Bond shall be reduced in an amount equal to the costs actually incurred by the Surety in curing the default. If the Surety elects option (b), then upon completion of the necessary work, the City shall notify the Surety of Its actual costs. The City shall return , without interest, any overpayment made by the Surety and the Surety shall pay to the City any actual costs which exceed the City estimate, limited to the bond amount. Should the Surety elect option (c), the Parties shall first complete partidpation in mediation, described In the below paragraph, prior to any interplead action. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 Page 48 RFB # 15 -018 2015 In the event a dispute should arise between the Parties to this Bond with respect to the City's declaration of default by the Prindpal, the Parties agree to partidpate in at least four hours of mediation in accordance with the mediation procedures of United States Arbitration and Mediation (" USA&M"). The Parties shall proportionately share in the cost of the mediation. The mediation shall be administered by the Seattle USA&M office, 4300 Two Union Square, 601 Union Street, Seattle, Washington 98101 -2327. The Surety shall not interplead prior to of the mediation. 141 411' DATED this tr_slay of - - YIl_t -t , 2016 . CORPORATE SEAL OF PRINCIPAL: STATE OF WASHINGTON COUNTY OF Otp, this drsonaliy appeared before m�`' s to me known to be the �Q5' of Iran r that executed the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged the said instrument to be the free and vol ry act and deed of said limited liability company, for the uses and purposes therein mentioned, and on oath stated that he/she was authorized to execute said instrument. ) ss. By: (Name of Person Its: S-5 American Guaranteed Roofing & Construction, Inc. PRINCIPAL ��.• �� RpOF //yG '••• (Title) PO Box 2420, Gig Harbor, WA 98335 • (Address) f.: �.. co�QO�rc<".„ goy N' SEA c •= 206- 432 -5041 . (Phone) 'z_:xy 2010 ,:�� '• frdJj' gSHING1 °•' . •. GIVEN my hand and offidal seal this day of 1 , 2010 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 Notary's signature Notary's printed name " VIVA -v Notary Public in and for. tilet atte o Ibington. My commission expires '1 I 10 Page 49 RFB # 15-018 2015 CORPORATE SEAL OF SURETY: APPROVED AS TO FORM: Amy Jo Pearsall, City Attorney City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 Philadelphia I SU' aI By: ',_ A. -ney -in-Fact (Attach Power of Attorney) ompany Page 50 Steven A. Swartz (Name of Person Executing Bond) One Bala Plaza. Suite 100 Bala Cynwyd, PA 19004 (Address) 610- 227 -1438 (Phone) RFB # 15 -018 2015 • .,., California All- Purpose Certificate of Acknowledgment - = A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. State of California County of Orange s.s. On February 9, 2016 before me, Debbie McGilligan, Notary Public , personally appeared Steven A. Swartz N/A = who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is /aie subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he /sitettkey executed the same in hisNedtbeir authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/biedbeir signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is ' DEBBIE MCGILLIGAN true and correct. �` -- Commission s 1994032 = z , -, fil Notary Public - California WITNESS my hand and official'eal. _'xr % Orange County My Comm. Expires Oct 14, 2016 • = _ / r OPTIONAL INFORMATION Description of Attached Document The preceding Certificate of Acknowledgment is attached to a document titled /for the purpose of Method of Signer Identification Proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence: Performance /Payment Bond No CE11510700737 Li form(s) of identification El credible witness(es) , containing 3 pages, and dated February 9, 2016 Notarial event is detailed in notary joumal on: Page # Entry # The signer(s) capacity or authority is /are as: = E Individual(s) ! Notary contact: N Attomey -in -fact [3 Corporate Officer(s) Other ,I Additional Signer [ j Signer(s) Thumbprints(s) = ID Guardian /Conservator [1 Partner - Limited/General ❑ Trustee(s) [3 Other: representing: Philadelphia Indemnity Insurance Company , ,1.. 1. \��.....,.. ili�a.11. \J C, ,.�.�. �. ,..tI,.1,_ i.. .r1 1 • PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY 231 St. Asaph's Rd., Suite 100 Bala Cynwyd, PA 19004 -0950 Power of Attorney 7484 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY (the Company), a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, does hereby constitute and appoint Steven A. Swartz, Kelly Specht, Lorie Mandel, and Meld Swartz, Michael Herranen and Thomas C. Buckner of the City of San Clemente, State of California of South Coast Surety, its true and lawful Attorney -in -fact with full authority to execute on its behalf bonds, undertakings, recognizances and other contracts of indemnity and writings obligatory in the nature thereof, issued in the course of its business and to bind the Company thereby, in an amount not to exceed $25,000,000.00. This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called the 1 °t day of July, 2011. RESOLVED: That the Board of Directors hereby authorizes the President or any Vice President of the Company to: (1) Appoint Attorney(s) in Fact and authorize the Attorney(s) in Fact to execute on behalf of the Company bonds and undertakings, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof and to attach the seal of the Company thereto; and (2) to remove, at any time, any such Attorney -in -Fact and revoke the authority given. And, be it FURTHER RESOLVED: That the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and biding upon the Company in the future with the respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY HAS CAUSED THIS INSTRUMENT TO BE SIGNED AND ITS CORPORATE SEALTO BE AFFIXED BY ITS AUTHORIZED OFFICE THIS 10TH DAY OF JUNE 2013. (Seal) Robert D. O'Leary Jr., President & CEO Philadelphia Indemnity Insurance Company On this 10"' day of June 2013, before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known, and being by me duly sworn said that he is the therein described and authorized officer of the PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate seal of said Company; that the said Corporate Seal and his signature were duly affixed. COMMONWEA T of PENNSYLVANIA Notarial seal Kh'My a Kecslead. Notary Pubic UMItt Marlon Tap. Meatyafm/ County tMeom, on Epp rat Dec 15, 2016 Mal .MrKxvMTA sBSoasUJAof MOUES (Notary Seal) Notary Public: residing at: My commission expires: December 18, 2016 Bala Cynwyd, PA I, Edward Sayago, Corporate Secretary of PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY, do herby certify that the foregoing resolution of the Board of Directors and this Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto on this 10TH day of June 2013 true and correct and are still in full force and effect. I do further certify that Robert D. O'Leary Jr., who executed the Power of Attorney as President, was on the date of execution of the attached Power of Attorney the duly elected President of PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY, �j r In Testimony Whereof I have subscribed my name and affixed the facsimile seal of each Company this T day of 0�P Edward Sayago, Corporate Secretary PHILADELPHIA INDEMNITY INSURANCE COMPANY EXHIBIT H TITLE VI ASSURANCES During the performance of this contract, the contractor /consultant, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor ") agrees as follows: 1. Compliance with Regulations The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to non - discrimination in federally assisted programs of United States Department of Transportation (USDOT), Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. 2. Non - discrimination The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin in the selection and retention of sub - contractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Exhibit E of the Regulations. 3. Solicitations for Sub - contracts, Including Procurement of Materials and Equipment In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiations made by the contractor for work to be performed under a sub - contract, including procurement of materials or leases of equipment, each potential sub - contractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to non - discrimination on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national origin. 4. Information and Reports The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the contracting agency or the appropriate federal agency to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information, the contractor shall so certify to WSDOT or the USDOT as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. 5. Sanctions for Non - compliance In the event of the contractor's non - compliance with the non - discrimination provisions of this contract, the contracting agency shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the USDOT may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: Withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and /or; Cancellation, termination, or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 51 RFB # 15 -012 2015 6. Incorporation of Provisions The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (5) in every sub- contract, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any sub - contractor or procurement as the contracting agency or USDOT may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non - compliance. Provided, however, that in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a sub - contractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request WSDOT enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the state and, in addition, the contractor may request the USDOT enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 52 RFB # 15 -012 2015 APPENDIX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The following list of Divisions 1 -31 comprise the Technical Specifications DIVISION 1 Summary Project Management and Coordination Construction Progress Documentation Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements References Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Execution Construction Waste Management and Disposal Closeout Procedures Project Record Documents Operation and Maintenance Data REGISTERED' ARCHITECT DIVISION 3 Cast —in -place Concrete DIVISION 4 Brick Veneer DAVID A. CLARK STATE OF WASHINGTON 011000 013100 013200 013300 014000 014200 015000 016000 017300 017419 017700 017810 017820 033000 048113 DIVISION 5 Structural Steel Framing 051200 Misc. Metals 055000 DIVISION 6 Rough Carpentry 061000 Glued- Laminated Carpentry 061800 Finish Carpentry 062000 DIVISION 7 Thermal Insulation 072100 Fall Protection 072270 Weather Barriers 072500 Metal Wall Panels 074213 Fiber Cement Panels 074646 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 075419 Door and Window Flashing 076510 Caulking & Sealants 079200 DIVISION 8 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081100 Finish Hardware 087100 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 53 RFB # 15 -012 2015 DIVISION 9 Painting 099113 DIVISION 10 Signs 101423 DIVISION 20 Basic Plumbing and HVAC Requirements 200100 Piping Insulation 200719 DIVISION 22 Plumbing Piping 221000 Plumbing Specialties 221030 Electric Water Heaters 223333 DIVISION 23 Ductwork 233100 Ductwork Accessories 233300 Air Outlets and Inlets 233700 Electric Heaters 238233 DIVISION 31 Trench Safety 311100 Earthwork 312000 Site Utilities 334100 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 54 RFB # 15 -012 2015 SECTION 011000 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work by Owner. 3. Owner - furnished products. 4. Access to site. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions. 7. Permits 8. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION 1. As indicated on the drawing cover sheet. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. 1.5 OWNER - FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner - furnished products. B. Owner- Furnished Products: 1. All Green Roof ballast rock, baskets, soil, sedum. 011000 - 1 Summary 1.6 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas agreed upon with the Owner. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond those areas. 1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking lots, and entrances serving nearby public and private entities clear and available at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials unless specifically indicated on the drawings. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of streets and public right of ways. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On -Site Work Hours: As allowed by the City of Federal Way city code. C. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others except as agreed by the Architect and with 72 hours' notice. D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and controlled substances on the Project site or the entire park is not permitted. 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 011000 - 2 Summary 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. 1.9 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS A. The City has applied for and has paid for the following permits, the contractor shall sign for and pick up: 1. Building 2. Electrical 3. Mechanical Contractor shall obtain all other permits, including ROW and deferred submittals, as required for completion of the project. Owner has applied for and will be responsible for all requirements for a King County Health Dept. permit. 1.10 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Daily clean up: Contractor shall clean building interior at the end of each day to level required by the Owner for the next day's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 - 3 Summary SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Key personnel. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Requests for Information (RFIs). 5. Project meetings. 13. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field- engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction. 1.4 GENERAL PROJECT COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 013100 - 1 Project Management & Coordination • 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. 10. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Deliver items specifically identified to the Owner, legally dispose of the other items. 1.5 KEY PERSONNEL A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of notice to proceed, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 013100 - 2 Project Management & Coordination 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 calendar days of receipt of the RFI response. 013100 - 3 Project Management & Coordination D. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within five calendar days if Contractor disagrees with response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name of contractor originating RFI. 3. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 4. RFI description. 5. Date the RFI was submitted. 6. Date Architect's response was received. 7. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Contractor shall schedule required pre - construction meetings with the City of Federal Way as required for permit requirements. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. 1. Preparation of record documents. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. 013100 - 4 Project Management & Coordination v. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: The Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes. B. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regularly weekly intervals as agreed upon by the Contractor, the Architect and the Owner between the hours of 7 a.m. to 3 p.m. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Architect shall record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to all attendees. 4. Schedule: 013100 5 Project Management & Coordination a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 - 6 Project Management & Coordination SECTION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Start -up construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Field condition reports. 6. Special reports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for preparing a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the Project. 013200 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Electronic file in original program and in PDF electronic format. B. Start-up construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost - loaded start-up construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost - loaded activities. C. Start-up Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. G. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. H. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. I. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. 013200 - 2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. The Architect shall review the project schedule only for end date compliance and for compliance with the phasing documents. This schedule is for the contractor's use only, and is not a part of the contract documents. Additional mobilizations, shorter or longer floats and the like, that are or are not shown on the Contractor's schedule are not cause for claims by the Contractor to the Owner. B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 15 days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for punch list and final completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. 013200 - 3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 4. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 10 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. CPM Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal CPM -type, Contractor's construction schedule within 15 calendar days of date established for the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the start-up construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 13. Supplemental Instructions and Construction Change Directives received. 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 013200 - 4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 - 5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals. C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device - independent and display resolution- independent fixed- layout document format. 013300 - 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action, informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2010 -2015 formats. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the 013300 - 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 5 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name. of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 013300 - 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Related physical samples submitted directly. m. Other necessary identification. 5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. H. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Indication of full or partial submittal. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Transmittal number. 1. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. m. Remarks. n. Signature of transmitter. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 013300 - 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files (preferred). Paper copies will be accepted if no other option is available. a. Architect will return one annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Action Submittals: Submit four paper copies of each submittal plus the number requested back, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Informational Submittals: Submit four paper copies of each submittal plus the number requested back, unless otherwise indicated 4. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically- submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. 6. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 013300 - 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory - installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file, or: b. Four paper copies of Product Data plus number of copies requested to be returned. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project- specific information, drawn accurately to scale. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 013300 - 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 4. Samples for Initial Selection: ' Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full -size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in the project manual. H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Submit subcontract list in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. 013300 - 7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 013300 - 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. W. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED - DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated - Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance /Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 013300 - 9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action or will provide an equivalent transmittal form. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 - 10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality- assurance and - control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality - assurance and - control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Divisions 2 through 44 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality- Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality- Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 014000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on the project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies and subassemblies. 2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. E. Source Quality- Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. F. Field Quality- Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. H. Installer /Applicator /Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub - subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade - specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades. Experienced: If not overridden by specific requirements in divisions 2 -44: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five > previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 014000 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. B. Factory- Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory- authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory- authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed 014000 - 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. H. Factory- Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect three days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at the Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. J. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual specification sections, along with supporting materials. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Independent quality - control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility. Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. Contractor shall coordinate and schedule Owner's testing agency. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 014000 - 4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect field- assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." C. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality- control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and - control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. G. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. . 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency and/or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. 014000 - 5 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality - control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality- control services. END OF SECTION 014000 - 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 014200 REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved ": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed ": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated ": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations ": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish ": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install ": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide ": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site ": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 014200 - 1 REFERENCES B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358 -2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241 -7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737 -0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303 -5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation (202) 624 -5800 Officials www.transportation.org AATCC ABAA ABMA ACI ACPA AEIC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549 -8141 www.aatcc.org Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956 -5888 www.airbarrier.org American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367 -1155 www.abma - dc.org American Concrete Institute (248) 848 -3700 www.concrete.org American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506 -7216 www.concrete - pipe.org Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257 -2530 014200 - 2 REFERENCES AF &PA AGA AGC AHAM AHRI AI AIA AISC AISI AITC ALSC AMCA ANSI AOSA APA APA API ARI www.aeic.org American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org American Gas Association www.aga.org Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org Air - Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute www.ahrinet.org Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org American Institute of Architects www.aia.org American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc - glulam.org American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. www.aosaseed.com Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org American Petroleum Institute www.api.org Air - Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (Now AHRI) (800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700 (202) 824-7000 (703) 548 -3118 (202) 872 -5955 (703) 524-8800 (859) 288-4960 (800) 242 -3837 (202) 626-7300 (800) 644-2400 (312) 670 -2400 (202) 452 -7100 (303) 792 -9559 (301) 972 -1700 (847) 394 -0150 (202) 293-8020 (405) 780 -7372 (239) 454-6989 (253) 565-6600 (202) 682 -8000 014200 - 3 REFERENCES ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207 -0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548 -2723 www.asce.org (703) 295 -6300 ASCE /SEI American Society of Civil Engineers /Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- (800) 527 -4723 Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636 -8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843 -2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882 -1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers (847) 699 -2929 www.asse.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835 -3040 www.asse - plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832 -9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) 628 -6380 www.atis.org AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) 534 -8300 www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323 -3636 www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) 733 -4077 (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443 -9353 www.aws.org (305) 443 -9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926 -7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794 -7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297 -2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620 -0010 014200 - 4 REFERENCES www.bia.org BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) 242 -7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979 -1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285 -3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342 -4772 www.bissc.org BWF Badminton World Federation 6 -03 -9283 7155 (Formerly: IBF - International Badminton Federation) www.internationalbadminton.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527 -3880 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (212) 251 -7200 www.copper.org CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230 -9263 www.canelect.ca CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858 -1555 www.ce.org (703) 907 -7600 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241 -7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788 -2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881 -2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222 -2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584 -1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892 -0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596 -2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465 -2523 www.coolroofs.org (510) 485 -7175 CPA Composite Panel Association (703) 724 -1128 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510 -2772 www.plasticpipe.org (202) 462 -9607 014200 - 5 REFERENCES CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (706) 278 -3176 www.carpet - rug.com CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517 -1200 www.crsi.org CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463 -6727 (416) 747 -4000 CSA CSA International (866) 797 -4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747 -4000 www.csa- international.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272 -3744 www.caststone.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689 -2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684 -0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820 -7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583 -4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222 -2010 www.dhi.org ECA Electronic Components Association (703) 907 -8024 www.ec - central.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907 -7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294 -3462 www.eima.com (770) 968 -7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295 -5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332 -0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339 -6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org. ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (800) 967 -5352 (Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek - etlsemko.com FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) 014200 - 6 REFERENCES FIVB www.fiba.com Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.org 41 21 345 35 35 FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) 762 -4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401) 275 -3000 (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671 -3772 Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971 -4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289 -5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271 -0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Part of GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872 -6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522 -8440 www.geosynthetic - institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (973) 267 -9700 www.pumps.org HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464 -8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435 -2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838 -6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) 014200 - 7 REFERENCES IBF International Badminton Federation (Now BWF) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830 -0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827 -0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419 -7900 www.ieee.org IES Illuminating Engineering Society (212) 248 -5000 www.ies.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (Now IES) IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 981 -0100 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646 -2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233 -1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275 -4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293 -8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464 -7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567 -8150 ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264 -1690 www.kcma.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488 -6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241 -7333 014200 - 8 REFERENCES www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) 480 -9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644 -6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345 -1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676 -1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250 -9222 www.marble - institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674 -8937 www.paintinfo.com (604) 298 -7578 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings (703) 281 -6613 Industry Inc. www.mss - hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) 942 -6591 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797 -6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228 -6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737 -2926 www.nadca.com NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213 -7193, ext. 453 www.aahperd.org/nagws/ (703) 476 -3400 NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684 -0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557 -2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917 -6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713 -1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248 -9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775 -2300 www.ncta.com 014200 - 9 REFERENCES NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.com NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association www.nomma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) www.nsf. org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association www.nssga.org (301) 977 -3698 (301) 657 -3110 (207) 829-6901 (703) 841-3200 (888) 300 -6382 (269) 488-6382 (317) 972 -6900 (800) 344 -3555 (617) 770 -3000 (301) 589 -1776 (866) 342 -5642 (703) 442-4890 (800) 933-0318 (901) 377 -1818 (604) 524-2393 (901) 526 -5016 (888) 516-8585 (800) 323-9545 (847) 299-9070 (888) 846-7622 (301) 587 -1400 (800) 673-6275 (734) 769 -8010 (800) 342 -1415 (703) 525-8788 014200 - 10 REFERENCES NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323 -9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751 -0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) 422 -4556 www.woodfloors.org (636) 519 -9663 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786 -0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332 -7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514 -7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589 -8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557 -0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333 -3929 http: / /pgi- tp.cee.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395 -2522 www.landcarenetwork.org (703) 736 -9666 PTI Post - Tensioning Institute (602) 870 -7540 www.post - tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340 -8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (925) 935 -1499 www.redwoodinspection.com SAE SAE International (877) 606 -7323 www.sae.org (724) 776 -4841 SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) 542 -5040 www.scte.org (610) 363 -6888 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458 -4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899 -0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) 294 -5424 www.sefalabs.com (516) 294 -5424 SEUASCE Structural Engineering Institute /American Society of Civil 014200 - 11 REFERENCES Engineers (See ASCE) SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646 -2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817 -8888 www.siaonline.org (703) 683 -2075 SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626 -1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533 -0991 www.smainfo.org • SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803 -2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761 -1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523 -6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (850) 434 -2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647 -7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982 -0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342 -8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281 -7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281 -2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438 -8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241 -7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472 -7974 www.swrionline.org TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) 646 -8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries (703) 907 -7700 Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939 -9700 www.masonrysociety.org 014200 - 12 REFERENCES TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683 -1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405 -8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649 -5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670 -4177 www.tileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854 -3577 www.ul.com (847) 272 -8800 UNI Uni -Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243 -3902 www.uni- bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786 -5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228 -6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) 795 -1747 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938 -7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463 -6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424 -2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244 -4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283 -1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639 -0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 297 -2122 www.wcmanet.org WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506 -4636 www.windowcoverings.org (212) 297 -2109 WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223 -2301 www.wdma.com (847) 299 -5200 WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association www.wsrca.com WWPA Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org (916) 372 -9943 (800) 550 -7889 (530) 661 -9591 (800) 725-0333 (650) 570 -5441 (503) 224 -3930 014200 - 13 REFERENCES C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. DIN Deutsches Institut f?r Normung e.V. 49 30 2601 -0 www.din.de IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472 -4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422 -7233 www.iccsafe.org ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc - es.org UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) (800) 423 -6587 (562) 699-0543 D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761 -0011 www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638 -2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504 -7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482 -2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697 -6257 http: / /.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586 -9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272 -0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835 -5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225 -5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463 -6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488 -3111 www.gsa.gov 014200 - 14 REFERENCES HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA) (202) 708-1112 (510) 486 -4000 (301) 975 -6478 (800) 321 -6742 (202) 693-1999 PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690 -7694 www.hhs.gov /ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720 -9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647 -4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334 -2934 http: / /gulliver.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720 -2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268 -2000 www.usps.com E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872- 2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272- 0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board www.access - board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512 - 1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512 - 1800 www .gpoaccess.gov /cfr /index.html 014200 - 15 REFERENCES DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697- 2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697- 2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619 - 8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289- 7800 www.wbdg.org/ccb FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL -STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697- 2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http: / /dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872- 2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272- 0080 www.access-board.gov F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. Latest edition of the "Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construc- tion" prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the American Public Works Association as adopted by the City. All items in the Standard Specifications relating to payment, change orders claims, time and the like are not applicable to this contract 014200 - 16 REFERENCES PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 - 17 REFERENCES SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on work restrictions and utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's other contractors, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Contractor shall pay for temporary portable toilets. C. Temporary Water Service: Coordinate any temporary water with local utility at the contractor's cost. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. D. Temporary Electric Power Service: Coordinate any temporary power with PSE at the contractor's cost. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Moisture- Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage, including delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage, discarding water- damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged Work. 015000 - 1 TEMP. FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICBO as adopted by Washington State. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire- resistive sheet, 10 mils (0.25 mm) minimum thickness, with flame- spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84. B. Security Fence: Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2 -inch, 0.148 -inch- thick, galvanized- steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized -steel pipe posts; minimum 2 -3/8 -inch- (60 -mm -) OD line posts and 2 -7/8 -inch- (73 -mm -) OD corner and pull posts, with 1 -5/8 -inch- (42 -mm -) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or steel bases for supporting posts. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: If desired, the Contractor may, at his/her expense, furnish and install a field office building at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate staging and storage areas where they will serve Project adequately and result in . minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 015000 - 2 TEMP. FACILITIES AND CONTROLS B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. C. Water Service: Install temporary service. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Electric Power Service: Install temporary service. F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. Telephone Service: Ensure telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. 1. Post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire - fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated and as required for operations. 1. Provide dust - control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads 015000 - 3 TEMP. FACILITIES AND CONTROLS and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot -mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot -mix asphalt base - course pavement before installation of final course according to Section 321216 "Asphalt Paving." D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire - fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas or on -site for construction personnel as directed by the Architect. Do not use surrounding street parking. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for public and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste- collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 015000 - 4 TEMP. FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with City Permit Requirements. D. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation - control Drawings or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation - control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. A. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations and as indicated on Drawings. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Double lock with Owner's padlock. B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire- protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 015000 - 5 TEMP. FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire- prevention and - protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.5 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture- Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24 -hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 - 6 TEMP. FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis -of- Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis -of- design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 016000 - 1 Product Requirements 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis -of- Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long -term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather -tight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 016000 - 2 Product Requirements 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather - protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project - specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 016000 - 3 Product Requirements 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer /Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience may be considered by the Architect under terms of this section. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience may be considered by the Architect under terms of this section. 5. Basis -of- Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample ", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 - 4 Product Requirements SECTION 017300 EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner - installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner- accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 4. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for demolition and removal of selected portions of the asphalt. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in -place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer. 017300 - 1 EXECUTION B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor & professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land- surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 2. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the site or building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain ° on -site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in -place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in- place materials. 017300 2 EXECUTION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water - service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 1 "Project Management and Coordination." 017300 - 3 EXECUTION 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a Professional land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and layout site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work.' Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from °two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the 'Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. 017300 - 4 EXECUTION C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF WORK A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with 017300 - 5 EXECUTION integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in -place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in -place construction during cutting and patching to, prevent . damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services /systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where 'feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials: b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 017300 - 6 EXECUTION H. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 COORDINATION OF OWNER - INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. 017300 - 7 EXECUTION E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on -site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 017300 - 8 EXECUTION SECTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off -site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Maximize end -of- Project rates for salvage /recycling in contractor directed plan. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials. 017419 - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling ,and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. B. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of projects with similar requirements. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with ` operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. . Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 017419 - 2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 2. Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers with label indicating elements, date of removal, quantity, and location where removed. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site. C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use: 1. Any items as noted by Owner. 3.3 RECYCLING WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on -site workers. B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. 2. Stockpile processed materials on -site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 017419 - 3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on -site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut -Offs of Lumber and recycle. 3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on -site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage . on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property, provided required permits are obtained. Provide full -time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished. Disposal: Remove temporary soil waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 017419 - 4 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site 2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 34 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases, 4. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 5. Complete startup testing of systems. 6. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 8. Advise Owner of changeover in heat, water, and other utilities. 9. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 10. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1.. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Attachment G, Item 4 "Compensation" of Public Works Contract for Federal Way Town Square Park 2. Submit copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list" of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3 Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy -duty, three -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8- 1 /2 -by -11 -inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic - covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste- removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed 6y construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even- textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard - surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. s Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." END OF SECTION SECTION 017810 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Product Data. 3. Miscellaneous Record submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 44 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Submittal: Submit one paper copy set of marked -up record prints. Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Make revisions and re- submit. B. Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated in Project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked -up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 017810 - 1 Project Record Documents 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked -up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later: b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross - reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. L Changes made following Architect's written orders: 1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings:_ m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked -up record prints. 4. Mark .record sets with erasable, red - colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 017810 - 2 Project Record Documents 2.2 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy of marked up paper copy of Product Data. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy of marked up miscellaneous record submittals. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and Loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017810 - 3 Project Record Documents SECTION 017820 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in PDF and hard copy. 017820 - 1 Operation and Maintenance Data PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section fo'r each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross- reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 017820 - 2 Operation and Maintenance Data C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross - referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Manuals, Electronic copy: Submit one full manual in PDF format, formatted as indicated in paper copy, below. F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy -duty, three -ring, vinyl- covered, loose -leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8- 1/2- by -11- inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross - reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple - volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic- covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross - referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8- 1 /2 -by -11 -inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations ; in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. 017820 - 3 Operation and Maintenance Data B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: I. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special' operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information 1 System, (subsystem, - and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8.. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 017820 4 Operation and Maintenance Data C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break -in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color- coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross- reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 017820 - 5 Operation and Maintenance Data 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross - reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions: 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross - referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 017820 - 6 Operation and Maintenance Data PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 017820 - 7 Operation and Maintenance Data SECTION 018200 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 2 through 34 Sections for specific requirements -for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory- authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. 018200 - 1 Demonstration & Training PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance, curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break -in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. • i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 1. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 018200 - 2 Demonstration & Training m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 1 Section "Operations and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants upon request. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 018200 - 3 Demonstration & Training 1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. END OF SECTION 018200 - 4 Demonstration & Training SECTION 033000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS . Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on- grade. C. Sequencing: 1. Construction of restroom building to run concurrently with pervious concrete pathway /plaza construction. Restroom building exterior concrete slabs to be placed prior to plaza pervious concrete. This work to be performed in a timely manner to allow the pervious concrete contractor to finish his work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in -place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete Subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, curing procedures, construction contraction and control joints, and joint - filler strips, forms and form removal limitations, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, and concrete protection. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction/ Control Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. I. Location of construction joints is subject to approval ofthe Architect. E. Samples: For waterstops. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Fiber reinforcement. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Joint - filler strips. 8. Repair materials. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI301 (ACI301M). 2.2 FORM - FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth - Formed Finished Concrete: Form - facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. a. Medium- density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill - release agent treated and edge sealed. b. B -B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. C. Form- Release Agent: Commercially formulated form- release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 D. Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, removable or snap -off glass - fiber- reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, assembled with clips. C. Plain -Steel Welded -Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as- drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 , plain -steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded -wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture, bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 /C 150M, Type I, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM =C 618, Class F or C. B. Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. Retain coarse-aggregate size from three options in "Maximum Coarse- Aggregate Size" Subparagraph below; insert : gradation requirements if preferred. Aggregate size limits relate to spacing of steel reinforcement, depth of slab, or thickness of concrete member. 1. Maximum Coarse- Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000- 4 D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water - soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 2. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017 /C 1017M, Type II. E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Micro - Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro - fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116 /C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1 -1/2 inches long. B. Synthetic Macro- Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 4.O lb /cu. yd. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Moisture- Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane- Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane- Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation- Joint- Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement - based, polymer - modified, self - leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150 /C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 3. Aggregate: Well- graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 /C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water - reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Normal- weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 5 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high -range water - reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). B. Foundation Walls: Normal- weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 5 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high -range water - reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. C. Building Slabs -on- Grade: Normal- weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel - finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6. Synthetic Micro - Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.0 lb /cu. yd. 7. Synthetic Macro - Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 4.0 lb /cu. yd. D. Exterior Paving at Spray Park: Normal Weight 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb /cu. yd. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel - finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6. Synthetic Micro- Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.0 lb /cu. yd. 7. Synthetic- macro -fiber dosage rates in "Synthetic Macro - Fiber" Subparagraph below are examples only; verify minimum dosage rates with manufacturer. E. Other Exterior Paving (Sidewalks, loop trail, paving around restroom): Normal Weight 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 2500 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb /cu. yd. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel- finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2,14 CONCRETE SEALER A. Provide one of the following concrete sealers appropriate for the application at the restroom building and picnic shelter. 1. Sonneborne 2. GST International 3. SpecChem 2.15 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL A. Provide 3/8" asphalt impregnated cellulose fiber board. B. Provide void cap for all expansion joints. Fill with elastomeric caulk. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth - formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast - concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust- stained steel form- facing material. F. Set= edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished ,concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form- release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through -wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form- removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form- facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form- release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded -wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main . reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1 -1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, . and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on- Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one - fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond= rimmed'blades Cut 1 /8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. This work must be performed within 24 hours after concrete has been fully finished. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Terminate full -width joint - filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 2. Install joint- filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water- reducing admixtures to mixture. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open- textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth- Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form- facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed - surface irregularities. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Provide a hard trowel finish at the restroom building. C. Provide a fine broom finish on the picnic shelter slab. D. Provide a medium broom finish on spray park pad and all other exterior paving. E. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power - driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power- driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. F. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power - driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface: Finish and measure surface, so gap at : any point . between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft. long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 in. G. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine: broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel - finished floor surfaces. H. Broom Finish (medium): Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing and first trowel finish, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming ; with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Confirm required final finish with Architect before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated: Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling ; indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel - troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3. Cast anchor -bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection and ACI 301 for hot - weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb /sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer. 3. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13 application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner may engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare, test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples . of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive - strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 3.15 FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Install sealing compounds at the restrooms, pump rooms and picnic shelter at the coverage indicated by the manufacturer for the exact application. B. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer. END OF SECTION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15 SECTION 042113 BRICK VENEER MASONY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Face brick. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcing steel. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 8. Cleaning masonry 9. Sealing masonry B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells or between brick wythes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. ' Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end -dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. 042113- 1 Brick Veneer Masonry 3. Weep holes /vents. D. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Brick: a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For bricks, include size - variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For surface - coated brick, include material test report for durability of surface appearance after 50- cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing web. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. F. Cold - Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold - weather requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site and include Architect & Construction Manager. 042113- 2 Brick Veneer Masonry 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture - resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain - splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold- Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold- weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602. 042113- 3 Brick Veneer Masonry 1. Cold- Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot - Weather Requirements: Comply with hot - weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturer specified. 2.2 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS. 1. Color and Texture: From standard color chart, selected by Architect. 2. Products: Shall be a "Standard" unit, 3 -1/2" 2 -1 /2 "x 7 -1/2" brick veneer, as manufactured by Mutual Materials. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold - weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. 042113- 4 Brick Veneer Masonry D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. F. Cold- Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Available Products: a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix -NCA. Water - Repellent Admixture: Liquid water - repellent mortar admixture intended for use with brick veneer, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Available Products: a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture. c. Master Builders, Inc. H. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry- Veneer Anchors: Single 0.188 -inch- (4.8 -mm -) diameter, hot -dip galvanized, carbon continuous wire. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials.. Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B -2 coating. 2. Stainless -Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304. 3. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8 -inch (16 -mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer. C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide. 042113- 5 Brick Veneer Masonry 1. Z- shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50 mm) long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal. 2. Where wythes do not align or are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle- and -eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm). 3. Wire: Fabricate from 1/4 -inch- (6.4 -mm -) diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. D. Adjustable Masonry- Veneer Anchors 1. Seismic Masonry- Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to positively connect a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint in accordance with seismic requirements of ACI 5301. /ASCE 5- 05/TMSS 402 -05 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. a. Available Products: 1) Duro -wall; DA213 + DA213QT + DA320S Seismic Ladur joint reinforcement. 2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: HB -200 SIS =HB -200 + pintle + Seismiclip + #220 ladder wire joint reinforcement. 3) As approved by the Architect. 2. Polymer- Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 (4.8 -mm) diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt -spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117. a. Available Products: 1) ITW Buildex; Teks Maxiseal with Climaseal finish. 2) Textron Inc., Textron Fastening Systems; Elco Dril -Flex with Stalgard finish. 3. Stainless -Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Not allowed. 2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through -wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees. 4. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into wall and 1/2' inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees. 0421 13 - 6 Brick Veneer Masonry B. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Perm -A- Barrier wall flashing as manufactured by Grace Construction Products. a. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, or urethane. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene- butadiene - rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA -805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond - Breaker Strips: Asphalt - saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Mesh Weep /Vent: Free - draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: 1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents. 2) As accepted by the Architect. E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free - draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, full -depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings. b. Strips, not less than 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) wide, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar. c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. d. Sheets or strips not less than 2 inch thick and installed to full height of cavity with additional strips 4 inches (100 mm) high at weep holes and thick enough to fill entire depth of cavity and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar. 2. Available Products: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break II. 042113- 7 Brick Veneer Masonry b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. 2.8 MASONRY CLEANER & SEALER A. Cleaner: Shall be Fabrikem New Masonry Cleaner, Type R, or as expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned, designed for removing mortar /grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces, as approved by the Architect. B. Masonry Sealer: Shall be Fabrishield QMA 61/63 or as expressly approved for intended use by sealer manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being sealed, designed as a penetrating sealer, as approved by the Architect. 2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air - entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water - repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless, otherwise indicated. 1 Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materialsEin mortar to mortar cement and lime. 3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to mortar cement, and lime. 4. Add cold - weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with BIA Technical Notes 8A, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For exterior, above - grade, load- bearing and non -load- bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load - bearing walls; for interior rion- load - bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2 Provide grout with a slump of 8 to ` 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 042113- 8 Brick Veneer Masonry PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE WORK UNTIL CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED OR UNTIL DIRECTED TO PROCEED IN WRITING BY THE ARCHITECT. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built -in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single -wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full -size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor - driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g /30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external comers, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 042113- 9 Brick Veneer Masonry 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 min), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less- than - half -size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. Alter vertical joints uniformly along one row to remove small width brick areas. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch (100 -mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. D. Built -in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. F. Where built -in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 042113- 10 Brick Veneer Masonry 3.5 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 4.5 sq. ft. (0.42 sq. m) of wall area spaced not to exceed 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and space not more than 36 inches (915 mm) apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically. a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two - piece) type ties. b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two- piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. 3. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) 1. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (406 mm) o.c. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T- shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L- shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with seismic masonry- veneer anchors to comply. with the following requirements: 1. Fasten seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Insert slip -in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards. 3. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing as shown on the drawings. 042113- 11 Brick Veneer Masonry 4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in- plane wall or partition movement. B. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." C. Provide horizontal, pressure- relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch` (10 mm). 1. Locate horizontal, pressure- relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.9 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels as required. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY` DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: • L Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free . from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At masonry - veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm). 042113- 12 Brick Veneer Masonry 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 4. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep /vent products to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep /vent products to form vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through -wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspectors: Owner may engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3.12 PARGING A. Parge exterior faces of below -grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat. B. Use a steel - trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. C. Damp -cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 042113- 13 Brick Veneer Masonry 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In- Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one -half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. i 5. Clean brick by bucket -and -brush hand - cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. E. Sealing: Apply two coats of penetrating sealer in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste, and other masonry Waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042113 042113 -14 Brick Veneer Masonry SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. 2. Miscellaneous steel trim and fabrications. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections. 4. Grout. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061800 "Glue Laminated Construction ". 2. Section 055000 "Misc. Metal Fabrications" for smaller metal fabrications. 3. Section 099113 'Exterior Painting" for surface- preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Bellevue Golf Course project site. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 051200 - 1 Structural Steel Framing B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip - critical, high - strength bolted connections. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer Qualification: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC - Certified Erector. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC - Certified plant. C. Welding Certificates: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code — Steel" and carry current WABO certified cards. Post cards in Construction Manager's office. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC - Certified Plant, Category STD B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.IM, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" 2 AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No.2" 3. AISC's "Specifications for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections" 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 051200 - 2 Structural Steel Framing I. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes . repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A W- Shapes: ASTM A572/A 572M, Grade 50. B. Channels, Angles, M, S, Shapes: ASTM A572/A 572M, Grade 50. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A572/A 572M, Grade 50. D. Corrosion- Resisting Structural Steel: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50. E. Cold- Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Corrosion- Resisting Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847, structural tubing. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High- Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. B. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" C. Primer: SSPC -Paint 25, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. D. Primer: SSPC -Paint 25 BCS, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer. E. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust- inhibiting primer 'complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI# 18, ASTM A 780 051200 - 3 Structural Steel Framing 2.3 GROUT A. Metallic, Shrinkage - Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107 /C 1107M, factory- packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30- minute working time. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage- Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory- packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30- minute working time. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high- strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop - priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. _ Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 051200 - 4 Structural Steel Framing 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High - Strength Bolts: Shop install high - strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 /D1.IM for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2. Fire - Resistance Rating: As indicated. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces to be field welded. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC -SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.7 GALVANIZING A. Hot -Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot -dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. 051200 - 5 Structural Steel Framing B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop - bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop- welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete - and masonry - bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION` A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry - bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage - resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 051200 - 6 Structural Steel Framing 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS DI.1 /D1.1M. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High - Strength Bolts: Install high- strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 /D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. I. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs as indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built -up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material. 3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire - resistance rating indicated. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural -steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high- strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 051200 - 7 Structural Steel Framing C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1 /D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field- welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less- than - continuous 360- degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in .AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -PA 1 for touching up shop - painted surfaces. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC -SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC -SP 3 power -tool cleaning. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting ". END OF SECTION 051200 - 8 Structural Steel Framing SECTION 055000 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Miscellaneous steel fabrications. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for larger fabrications. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A Product Data For the following:, 1. Paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. WABO Welding certificates. 055000 - 1 Misc. Metal Fabrications 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code -- Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code -- Stainless Steel." 5. All welders must carry WABO certifications and shall post certificates at the job site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated on the drawings or required by structural loads. 055000 2 Misc. Metal Fabrications 2.3 NONFERROUS METALS A. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers, zinc coated in accordance with ASTM D153 (exterior). B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Provide hot -dip or mechanically deposited, zinc - coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. C. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B 18.6.7M). E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B 18.2.3.8M). F. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. G. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B 18.22.1 (ASME B 18.22M). H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). I. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. J. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc - plated to comply. with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless -steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast- curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI #79, Tnemec series 88H5 92eron 055000 - 3 Misc. Metal Fabrications C. Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC -Paint 20 or SSPC -Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Products: a. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme -Zinc 90 -97., local contact TNW, Inc., 206 762- 5755 D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc - dust - content .paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC -Paint 20. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory - packaged, ferrous - aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy -duty loading applications. G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. H. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in- Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air- entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. I. Plastic cover for bollards: 6" yellow plastic bollard sleeve, '/4" thick, as manufactured by IdealShield, or approved` equal. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 055000 - 4 Misc. Metal Fabrications F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1 -1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6 -inch (150 -mm) embedment and 2 -inch (50 -mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated. 1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated. 2. Drill girders and plates for field- bolted connections where indicated. 3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. E. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. F. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc -rich primer where indicated. 055000 - 5 Misc. Metal Fabrications 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, with zinc -rich primer as indicated in 2.12.B.2 2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B), interior trim and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc -Rich Primer: SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning ". Zinc rich primer must be blasted. 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning:" Except interior steel trim. C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those with sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 055000 - 6 Misc. Metal Fabrications PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. C. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. 055000 - 7 Misc. Metal Fabrications B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -PA 1 for touching up shop - painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Clean and touchup field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas with specified primer. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000 - 8 Misc. Metal Fabrications SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with timber. 3. Framing with engineered wood products. 4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 6. Wood furring. 7. Wood sleepers. 8. Roof Sheathing. 9. Wall Sheathing. 10. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Structural Glued- Laminated (Glulam) Timber" 2. Division 6 Section "Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses" 3. Division 5, Metals 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 061000 - 1 . Rough Carpentry 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood - preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Fastener Patterns: Full -size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Wood - preservative- treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Power - driven fasteners. 4. Powder - actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 061000'' 2 Rough Carpentry I. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated on the Drawings. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." 4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 2.2 WOOD - PRESERVATIVE- TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. D. Application: Treat items as required by code, as indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 061000 - 3 Rough Carpentry 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on- grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Interior Partitions: As indicated on the Drawings. C. Exterior and Load - Bearing Walls: Any species of machine stress -rated dimension lumber with a grade of not less than as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Ceiling Joists (Non- Load - Bearing): As indicated on the Drawings 2. Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Ceiling Joists. (Non- Load - Bearing): As indicated on the Drawings. E. Joists, Rafter, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: As indicated on the Drawings 2.4 TIMBER FRAMING A. For timber of 5 -inch nominal. (117 -mm actual) size and thicker, provide material complying with the following requirements: 1. Species and Grade: DF # 2 or better, or as indicated on the Drawings. 2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS Laminated- Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Manufacturers: Subj ect:to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia- Pacific. c. Louisiana- Pacific Corporation. d. Weyerhaeuser Company (TrusJoist). e. RedBuilt LLC 2. Extreme Fiber: Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20.0 MPa)] 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi (12 400 MPa)]. B. Parallel- Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Weyerhaeuser Company ( TrusJoist). 061000 - 4 Rough Carpentry b. Boise Cascade Corporation. c. Georgia - Pacific. d. Louisiana - Pacific Corporation. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi (20 MPa). 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13800 MPa). 2.6 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Thickness: Not less than as indicated on the Drawings. B. Oriented - Strand -Board Wall Sheathing: Not allowed C. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I, Pressure Treated sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Thickness: Not less than as indicated on the Drawings. D. Oriented- Strand -Board Roof Sheathing: Not allowed 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Hem -fir or hem -fir (north), 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 061000 - 5 Rough Carpentry F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.8 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, fire- retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4 -inch nominal thickness. 2.9 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure - preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power - Driven Fasteners: NES NER -272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5. 2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Simpson' Strong-Tie Co., Inc: B. Provide Zmax G185 coating on all Simpson Strong -Tie (or equivalent) connectors that are in contact with pressure treated wood C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc - coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 061000 - 6 Rough Carpentry D. Top Flange Hangers: U- shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 1. Strap Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Thickness: 0.062 inch (1.6 mm). E. Post Bases: Adjustable- socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch (25 mm) above base and with 2 -inch- (50 -mm -) minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch (2.8 mm) thick or as indicated on the Drawings. F. Rafter Tie -Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): HI rafter fastener or as indicated on the Drawings. G. Hold- Downs: ICC- Certified brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold -downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base or as indicated on the Drawings. 1. As indicated on the Drawings. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill- Sealer Gaskets: Glass - fiber- resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1 -inch (25 -mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Water - Repellent Preservative: NWWDA- tested and - accepted formulation containing 3- iodo -2- propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. C. Adhesive: Shall be "Liquid Nails Sub -Floor adhesive" or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF &PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 061000 - 7 Rough Carpentry E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood - framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 -inch nominal- (38 -mm actual -) thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c. H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative - treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated on the Drawings. If not indicated, comply with the following at a minimum: 1. ICC ESR -1539 for power- driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. K. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. L. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 061000 - 8 Rough Carpentry 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD FURRING & BUTT STRIP INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood or butt strips as required for tolerance of interior facing and finish work. Back check all work with a 72" straightedge. ANY WORK THAT FAILS TO CONFORM WITH SAID LEVEL TEST AFTER INSTALLATION OF GWB SHALL BE CORRECTED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non -load- bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2 -by -6 -inch nominal- (38 -by- 140 -mm actual -) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2 -by -4 -inch nominal- (38- by -89 -mm actual -) size wood studs spaced 24 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct corners and intersections, with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood -framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2 -inch nominal- (38 -mm actual -) thick lumber of same width as framing members. D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. 1. For non - load - bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs with headers not less than fl- inch nominal (89 -mm actual) depth for openings 48 inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6 -inch nominal (140 -mm actual) depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8 -inch nominal (184 -mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches 061000 - 9 Rough Carpentry (1800 to 3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10 -inch nominal (235 -mm actual) depth for openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width. 2. For load - bearing walls, provide double jamb studs for openings 72 inches (1800 mm) and less in width, and triple jamb studs for wider openings unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Provide headers of depth indicated on the Drawings. 3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. 1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any. 3.6 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No.'E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: :Residential`& Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above - referenced guide. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated on the Drawings, space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. 3.7 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches (102 mm) of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports as indicated if not continuous. B. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. C. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather and as required by code by dipping in water - repellent preservative for 15 minutes. 061000 - 10 Rough Carpentry 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron - treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA - registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 - 11 Rough Carpentry SECTION 061800 GLUED- LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using structural glued - laminated timber. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued - laminated timber. 2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Glued- Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress -rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For preservative- treated wood products. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. For connectors. Include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout of structural glued - laminated timber system and full dimensions of each member. 2. Indicate species and laminating combination. 3. Include large -scale details of connections. 061800 - 1 Glue Laminated Construction 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An AITC- or APA- EWS- licensed firm. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B. Individually wrap members using plastic- coated paper covering with water- resistant seams. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Structural glued laminated timber and connectors shall withstand the effects of structural loads shown on Drawings without exceeding allowable design working stresses listed in AITC 117 or determined according to ASTM D 3737 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 STRUCTURAL GLUED - LAMINATED TIMBER A. General: Provide structural glued - laminated timber that complies with AITC A190.1 and AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued - laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that are 'not exposed in the completed Work. 2. Provide structural glued - laminated timber made from single species. 3. Provide structural glued - laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. 4. Provide structural glued - laminated timber made with wet -use adhesive complying with AITC A190.1. B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued- Laminated Timber: Douglas fir -larch that complies with structural properties, combination symbols and beam stress classifications indicated. C. Appearance Grade: Architectural, complying with AITC 110. 2.3 FABRICATION Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. 1. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1 /500 of span. 061800 - 2 Glue Laminated Construction PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 I EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued - laminated timber, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect structural glued - laminated timber true and plumb and with uniform, close - fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Handle and temporarily support glued - laminated timber to prevent surface damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry; bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm); and do not embed more than 4 inches (102 mm) unless otherwise indicated. C. Install timber connectors as indicated. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install bolts with same orientation within each connection and in similar connections. 2. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued - laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose, including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. 2. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. END OF SECTION 061800 061800 - 3 Glue Laminated Construction SECTION 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior standing and running trim, siding trim and fascia. 2. Interior standing and running trim. 3. Finish grade rough sawn & MDO plywood. 4. Aluminum soffit vents. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 7 Section "Siding" for exterior plywood siding. 3. Division 7 Section "Caulking & Sealants" for seam/joint filling. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1.NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 2.NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and colors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer. 062000 -1 Finish Carpentry 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Standing and running trim: Profiles as indicated on the drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. C. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP -1. D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4 062000 -2 Finish Carpentry 2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Painted Applications: Kiln -dried or solid lumber with rough sawn - textured face, fir. B. Fascia and rakes shall be sized as noted on the drawings, rough sawn material as noted above, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Lumber Trim for painted finish: solid sawn material. 2.5 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD A. Wall sheathing for painted finish: ' /2" MDO plywood on walls, Y2" rough sawn fir plywood on soffits, and as noted on the drawings. 2.6 SOFFIT VENTS A. Continuous Soffit Vents: Aluminum, hat - channel shape, with stamped louvers; 2 inches (51 mm) wide and not less than 96 inches (2438 mm) long. 1. Net -Free Area: 6 sq. in. /linear ft. (420 sq. cm/m). 2. Finish: White paint. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer: 1. Hot -dip galvanized steel. B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. C. Paneling Adhesives: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives. D. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic -resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. E. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in finish carpentry. F. Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials required for sealing siding work. 062000 -3 Finish Carpentry 2.8 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16 -inch (1.5 -mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) radius. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. C. Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." 33 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3.Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32 -inch (0.8 -mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16 -inch (1.5 -mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 062000 -4 Finish Carpentry 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full - length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 48 inches (1220 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight - fitting joints with full- surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3.Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4.Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 3.5 ADJUSTING Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. . 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 062000 -5 Finish Carpentry SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation. 2. Underslab insulation 3. Vapor retarders. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Sections for mechanical insulation. 2. Section 033000: Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Submit 1 electronic copy of evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation products. B. Submit 1 electronic copy of Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface - Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire - Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 072100 -1 Thermal Insulation 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. c. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Corning. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. For all insulation concealed in walls: Unfaced Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass; with maximum flame- spread and smoke- developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Underslab Insulation: Shall be R -10 rigid insulation, suitable for underslab application. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor ` Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). Vapor- Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor- retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Miscellaneous Items: Other items as required to comply with Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code (NREC) or as indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to underslab rigid insulation, window, door & plate chinking, caulking, filling raised wood floor areas, wires and suspending rods, foam sill sealer and the like shall be provided by the contractor whether indicated on the drawings or not. 072100 -2 Thermal Insulation B. Eave ventilation troughs /baffles: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. Contractor is responsible for all means and methods of attachment to attain the desired installation. This includes but is not limited to wires, adhesives, Tfoil, & baffles. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water- Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness and/or R- value. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF BOARD INSULATION UNDER FOUNDATION A. Install boards horizontally under the building slab. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. Do not set insulation under the thickened edges of the slab. 072100 -3 Thermal Insulation 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. All insulation left exposed in walls, ceilings, attics or to open air shall be FSK faced insulation, without exception. C. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. D. Set vapor - retarder -faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. E. Install mineral -fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2 Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission under GWB. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates.' B. For unfaced insulation, Apply vapor barrier, sealing vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. C Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor- retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor - retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor - retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 072100 -4 Thermal Insulation 3.7 PROTECTION Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 072100 -5 Thermal Insulation SECTION 072270 FALL PROTECTION PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Roof tie -down system of fall restraint and fall arrest for worker safety. B. Related Sections: a. Section 051200 — Structural Steel Framing b. Section 061000 — Rough Carpentry c. Section 075419 — Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI Z359.1 -2007 — Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components b. ANSI Z359.6 -2009 — Specifications and Design Requirements for Active Fall Protection Systems C. Occupational Health And Safety Administration (OSHA) a. OSHA 1926.502 — Fall Prevention Systems Criteria and Practices 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide structural fall restraint and fall arrest system capable of withstanding loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in OSHA and other applicable safety codes. Provide fall protection anchors permanently attached to roof structure. B. Design Requirements: Anchors and accessories comprising system of following types: a. Guardian CB Anchors, spaced as indicated by manufacturer, for safety snap connection by individual workers capable of withstanding a 5,000 pound load or safety factor of 2 meeting the requirements of OSHA 1926.502(d)(8). C. Performance Requirements: System and components tested for the resistance of the following loads: a. Fall Restraint: 1 User b. Fall Arrest: 1 User c. Design fall protection anchors to resist a 5,000 pound load applied in any direction at maximum anchor height or provide engineered system designed meeting the requirements of OSHA 1926.502(d)(8). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of device specified, including manufacturer's standard fabrication details and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, profiles, and anchorage details. Shop drawings & calculations to be stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the project is located. C. Maintenance Data: Written instructions for maintenance of fall prevention safety devices to be included in the operation and maintenance manual. D. In -house Test Reports: Indicate anchor fabrication compliance with performance requirements. E. Signage: Provide laminated sign showing system layout and usage notes, to be installed at roof access locations. 072270 -1 Fall Protection 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm having at least 10 years continuous experience in manufacturing fall safety equipment similar to systems specified and exhibiting records of successful in- service acceptability and performance. Firm must employ personnel dedicated to provide regularly scheduled Authorized and Competent Person Training courses as mandated by OSHA 1926 and 1910 for owner's authorized safety personnel. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of roof anchors that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design and extent. C. OSHA Standards: Comply with Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards for the Construction Industry 29 CFR § 1926.500 Subpart M (Fall Protection), and with applicable State Administrative Code safety standards for Fall Restraint and Fall Arrest. D. Source Limitations: Obtain all roof anchors through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Testing: Perform quality control tests for each system per manufacturer's requirements. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Contractor to coordinate installation of structural deck to meet requirements of roof anchor manufacturer. a. Concrete Deck: Minimum concrete strength, Fc = 2,000 psi. Minimum 6" thickness for adhesive anchor connection; minimum 4" thickness for mechanical anchor connection.. b. Metal Deck: Minimum 18 gauge thickness, or provided with additional deck reinforcing per manufacturer's instructions. c. Wood Deck: Minimum 3/4" CDX plywood, or provided with additional deck reinforcing per manufacturer's instructions. d.. Structural' beant ftir weld -on or backer plate connection: structure must be capable of supporting a=5,000apound ultimate load: e. Concrete or composite metal deck for backer plate' or toggle anchor connection: Deck must be capable ofsupportiifg a 5,000 pound ultimate load: f. Other structural decks rot£listediabove shall be approved by a Qualified Person. B. Contractor to coordinate installation' of structural deck reinforcements and anchorages to receive fall protection anchors. C. Contractor to coordinate placement of roofing system, insulation and flashing to ensure water -tight integrity to roof. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty to guarantee products will be free from defects for a period of 12 months. Warranty period shall become effective on date of substantial completion. A. Provide fall protection system manufactured by Guardian Fall Protection Inc., 6305 South 231st Street Kent, WA, phone 800-466-6385, fax 800 - 670 -7892, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS 072270 -2 Fall Protection A. CB Anchor post: 2 -1/2" schedule 80 pipe, galvanized steel 18 ". 2.03 MANUFACTURED ASSEMBLIES A. Guardian CB -18 Galvanized Roof Anchors for wood installation. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate work true to dimension, square, plumb, level, and free from distortions or defects detrimental to appearance and performance. B. Prepare, treat and coat galvanized metal to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Prepare galvanized metal by removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing and substrate and verify conditions comply with structural requirements for proper system performance. B. Proceed with installation of roof anchors only after verifying conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation of Anchor Posts to be performed by contractor according to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. In addition to work provided by other subcontractors, provide necessary backing and fasteners as required. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test on site 100% of anchors relying upon chemical adhesive fasteners using load cell test apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND INSPECTION A. Ensure all manufactured anchors have been installed in accordance with fall protection manufacturer's engineering documentation and specifications. B. Provide plan drawings with any deviations in anchor locations as installed. 072270 -3 Fall Protection SECTION 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Weather barrier membrane (aka Weather Resistant Barrier, or WRB) B. Seam Tape C. Flashing D. Fasteners. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non -woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls 8. ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials B. AATCC — American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists 1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test C. TAPPI 1. Test Method T -410; Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) 2. Test Method T -460; Air Resistance (Gurley Hill Method) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component. C. Samples: Weather Barrier Membrane, minimum 8 -1/2 inches by 11 inch. D. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's Field Service Reports: Provide site reports from authorized field service 072500 -1 Thermal Barriers representative, indicating observation of weather barrier assembly installation. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Refer to Division 1 Project Closeout . 2. Weather Barrier Warranty: Manufacturer's executed warranty form with authorized signatures and endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of commercial weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide commercial weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. B. Pre - installation Meeting 1. Hold a pre - installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, Engineer, Installer, Owner's Representative, and Weather Barrier Manufacturer's Designated Representative. 2. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer's training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather -tight barrier assembly. B. Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier assembly installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. This warranty is above and beyond warranty requirements specified in division 1. B. Special Warranty 1. Special weather - barrier manufacturer's warranty for weather barrier assembly for a period of ten (10) years from date of final weather barrier installation. 2. Approval by weather barrier manufacturer for warranty is required prior to assembly installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1.800.44TYVEK (8- 9835); http: / /construction.tyvek.com, or approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: High - performance, spunbonded polyolefin, non - woven, non - perforated, weather barrier 072500 -2 Thermal Barriers is based upon DuPont"' Tyvek® CommercialWrap® and related assembly components. B. Performance Characteristics: 1. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: 2.7 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T -410. 5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: 38/35 lbs /in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A. 7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1117. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 10. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: 3 inch wide, DuPont" Tyvek® Tape for commercial applications. B. Fasteners: 1. DuPont'` Tyvek® Wrap Cap Screws, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: 1 -5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2 -inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1 -1/4" or 2" metal gasketed washer C. Sealants 1. Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions. 2. Products: a. Tremco 830 b. Tremco Butyl c. Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. D. Adhesives: 1. Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 2. Products: a. Liquid Nails® LN -109 b. Polyglaze® SM 5700 c. Denso Butyl Liquid d. 3M High Strength 90 e. SIA 655 f. Adhesives recommend by the weather barrier manufacturer. E. Primers: 1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing. 2. Products: a. 3M High Strength 90 b. Denso Butyl Spray c. SIA 655 d. Permagrip 105 072500 -3 Thermal Barriers e. ITW TACC Sta' Put SPH f. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer F. Flashing 1. DuPont' FlexWrap'', as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations. 2. DuPont"' StraightFlash" , as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: straight flashing membrane materials for doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc. 3. DuPont StraightFlashTM VF, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: dual -sided straight flashing membrane materials for brick mold. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION — WEATHER BARRIER A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. C. Start weather barrier installation at a building comer, leaving 6 -12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level. E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3 -6 inches. Secure.to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. F. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings. G. Overlap weather barrier 1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches. H. Weather Barrier Attachment: 1. Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather; barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally. I. Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont'"' StraightFlash'" to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation cladding anchors. 3.3 SEAMING A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 3.4 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with non -flanged windows — all cladding types) A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. B. Cut a head flap at 45- degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.5 FLASHING (for use with non - flanged windows — all cladding types) A. Cut 9 -inch wide DuPont FlexWrap"' a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. 072500 -4 Thermal Barriers Apply primer as required by manufacturer. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont"' FlexWrap"' edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPont"' FlexWrapm at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. Apply 9 -inch wide strips of DuPont'"' StraightFlash"' at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start DuPont at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill. E. Spray -apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. F. Install DuPont'-"' FlexWrap"' at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches. G. Coordinate flashing with window installation. H. On exterior, install backer -rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. I. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4 -inch wide DuPont"' StraightFlasht over the 45- degree seams. J. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. 3.6 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with flanged windows) A. Cut weather barrier in a modified "I -cut" pattern. 1. Cut weather barrier horizontally along the bottom of the header. 2. Cut weather barrier vertically 2/3 of the way down from top center of window opening. 3. Cut weather barrier diagonally from bottom of center vertical cut to the left and right corners of the opening. 4. Fold side and bottom weather barrier flaps into window opening and fasten. B. Cut a head flap at 45- degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.7 FLASHING (for use with flanged windows) A. Cut 9 -inch wide DuPont"' FlexWrap"' a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont"' FlexWrapt edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPont"' FlexWrap"' at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill. E. Install window according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Apply 4 -inch wide strips of DuPont"' StraightFlash"' at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange. Extend jamb flashing 1 -inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing. G. Apply 4 -inch wide strip of DuPont"' StraightFlash"' as head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings. H. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4 -inch wide DuPont"' 072500 -5 Thermal Barriers StraightFlashm over the 45- degree seams. I. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. J. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify manufacturer's designated representative to obtain required periodic observations of weather barrier assembly installation. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage. END OF SECTION 072500 -6 Thermal Barriers SECTION 074213 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install all uninsulated metal wall panels and all associated accessories to form a weathertight structure, as indicated on the architectural drawings and/or specified herein. Metal wall panel manufacturer shall provide adjacent flashing, trim, corner flashing, counter flashing, and contractor designed related flashing (if not shown). B. Work Included in this section: 1. Metal Wall Panels 2. Gutters & Downspouts C. Related work: 1. Roofing Underlayment 2. Flashing 3. Weather Barrier 4. Joint Sealants 5. Flashing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit Manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and recommendations for each type of wall panel required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. B. SAMPLES 1. Prior to ordering products, submit Manufacturer's standard color Samples for Architect's selection. 2. Prior to starting work, submit (quantity) 12" long Panel Samples showing shape and a representative color chip for Architect's/Engineer's acceptance. C. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Show panel layout, trim installation, and panel attachment. D. SITE CONDITIONS 1. Provide completed site condition form for the specified finish to suit project conditions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 074213 -1 Metal Wall Panels A. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS 1. Installation of panels and accessories by installers with a minimum of 5 years experience on panel projects of this nature. B. MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience supplying metal roofing/siding to the region where the work is to be done. 2. Manufacturer shall provide proof of $2,000,000 liability insurance for their metal roof system and comply with current independent testing and certification as specified. See specific product literature for testing information. 3. Panel manufacturers without full supporting literature, Flashings & Details Guides, Guide Specifications and Technical Support shall not be considered equal to the specified product. C. REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS 1. Comply with IBC and local Building Code requirements if more restrictive than those specified herein. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect against damage and discoloration B. Handle panels with non - marring slings. C. Do not bend panels. D. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage. E. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces. F. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth, and allow to air dry. G. Remove any strippable film coating prior to installation and do not allow it to remain on the panels in extreme cold, heat or in direct sunlight. 1.06 WARRANTY A. MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT WARRANTY 1. Manufacturer's standard coating performance warranty, as available for specified installation and environmental conditions. B. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY 1. Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and/or workmanship, to remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two (2) years following Project Substantial Completion date. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. AEP Span, Inc., Tacoma: 2141 Milwaukee Way, Tacoma, Washington 98421, 253- 383 -4955 or approved equal. B. PANEL DESIGNATION: 1. Reversed HR -36TM Wall. Net coverage 36 ", rib depth 1 -1/2" @7.2" o.c. 2.02 MATERIALS A. PANELS , GUTTERS, & DOWNSPOUTS 1. Base Metal: a. Material: 074213 -2 Metal Wall Panels (1) Steel conforming to ASTM A792 Zincalume ®, minimum yield 40,000 psi, thickness 24 gauge. b. Protective Coating: (1) Conform to ASTM A792, AZ50 (Zincalume®). 2. Exterior Finish: a. DuraTech® 5000 exterior finish includes a 0.2 mil thick corrosion- resistant primer and a 0.8 mil thick finish coat of Polyvinylidine Fluoride (PVF2), full 70% Kynar 500 ® /Hylar 5000® for a total 1.0 mil dry film thickness with a specular gloss of 10- 15% when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 523 -89 at 60o. 3. Interior Finish: a. Primer Coat Material: Corrosion - resistant primer; primer coat dry film thickness: 0.15 mils; finish coat material: polyester paint, finish coat dry film thickness: 0.35 mils. b. Total Interior Dry Film Thickness: 0.50 mils. c. Color: Off-White. 4. Color: One color of metal wall panels and one color of flashing as indicated on the drawings as selected by the Architect. 5. Provide painted fasteners to match panel color. C. HANGING GUTTERS: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in continuous long sections. Furnish flat -stock gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Style: Gutter profile as noted on drawings K style or ogee not permitted. Fabricate in as long lengths as possible. 2. Fabricate gutter from 24 gauge steel with Kynar color to match roof panels. Provide expansion joints at 50' Max. Miter corners & fasten with 1/8" stainless steel pop rivets. Seal laps with PSI 7000. D. DOWNSPOUTS AT RESTROOM BLD: Shall be schedule 40 PVC, painted. 2. Downspout brackets: 18 gauge steel, painted, offset type. E. DOWNSPOUTS AT PICNIC SHELTER: Downspouts at Picnic Shelter to be clear PVC pipe, Schedule 40, UV resistant as manufactured by GF Harvel or equal. Use galvanized pipe brackets to secure to building. F. FLASHING 1. Protective metallic coating, material, gauge and finish to match panels. Do not use lead or copper. Remove any strippable film prior to installation. 2. Material, gauge and finish to match panels. Do not use lead or copper. G.. FABRICATION 1. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified herein, panels shall be full length. Fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths. 2. Wall panels shall be factory formed. Field formed panels are not acceptable. 3. Gutter profile as shown on drawings. Fabricate in as long of lengths as possible. PART 3 — EXECUTION 074213 -3 Metal Wall Panels 3.01 EXAMINATION A. EXISTING CONDITIONS 1. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to a point where this work may continue. 2. Verify that installation may be made in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS 1. Verify prior to fabrication. 2. If field measurements differ from drawing dimensions, notify Architect prior to fabrication. B. PROTECTION 1. Treat, or isolate with protective material, and contacting surfaces of dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic corrosion. 2. Require workmen who will be walking on Roofing Panels to wear clean, soft -soled work shoes that will not pick up stones or other abrasive material, which could cause damage or discoloration: 3. Protect work of other trades against damage and discoloration. C. SURFACE PREPARATION 1. Clean and dry surfaces prior to applying sealant. 3.03 INSTALLATION A PANELS 1. Follow Wall panel manufacturer's directions. 2. Install panel seams vertically. 3. Lap panels away from prevailing wind direction. 4. Do not stretch or compress panel side-laps. 5. Secure panels without warp or deflection. B. ALLOWABLE ERECTION TOLERANCE 1. Maximum Alignment Variation: 1/2 inch in 40 feet. C. FLASHING & TRIM 1. Follow manufacturer's directions and architect approved Shop Drawings. 2. Overlap roof panels at least6 inches:' 3. Install flashings to allow for thermal movement. 4. Remove strippable protective film, if used, immediately preceding flashing installation. 5. All light fixtures, hose bibbs and other exterior attachments shall have a contractor designed, Architect approved flat panel with trim to attach the device, whether shown on the drawings or not. Show on the shop drawings for approval. D. CUTTING AND FITTING 1. Neat, square and true. Torch cutting is prohibited where cut is exposed to final view. 2. Openings 6 inches and larger in any direction: Shop fabricate and reinforce to maintain original load capacity. 3. Where necessary to saw -cut panels, debur cut edges. 074213 -4 Metal Wall Panels 3.04 CLEAN UP AND CLOSE OUT A. PANEL DAMAGE AND FINISH SCRATCHES 1. Do not apply touch -up paint to damaged paint areas that involve minor scratches. 2. Panels or flashings that have severe paint and/or substrate damage shall be replaced as directed by the Architect's or Owner's representative. B. CLEANING AND REPAIRING 1. At completion of each day's work and at work completion, sweep panels, flashings and gutters clean. Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, filings or scraps to accumulate. 2. Remove debris from project site upon work completion or sooner, if directed. END OF SECTION 074213 -5 Metal Wall Panels SECTION 074646 FIBER - CEMENT WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fiber- cement wall panels at restroom walls. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Section 079200 "Caulking & Sealants" for seam caulking. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Initial Selection: For fiber- cement panels including related accessories. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of fiber- cement panel. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 074646 - 1 Fiber Cement Wall Panels 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use. B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including cracking and deforming. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. 1. James Hardie "HardiePanel" Vertical Siding- Smooth 2.2 FIBER- CEMENT SIDING A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber- cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTME84. B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch (8 mm). 1. Texture: Smooth. C. Panel Texture: 48 -inch- (1200 -mm -) wide sheets with smooth texture. D. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 074646 - 2 Fiber Cement Wall Panels 1. For fastening to wood, use # 8 wafer -head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) into substrate. 2. For fastening fiber cement, use hot -dip galvanized or "Climacoat" fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber- cement panels and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Install fasteners no more than 12 inches o.c. See drawing for layout. B. Install with seams running horizontally. Space sheets with 1/8" joint for elastomeric caulking. Relieve sharp edges of panels at joints. Install screws flush to surface, do not countersink. C. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 074646 074646 - 3 Fiber Cement Wall Panels SECTION 075419 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1- GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope To install an adhered thermoplastic membrane waterproofing system with integral flashings and other components. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Substrate Preparation 2. Vapor Barrier 3. Cover Board 4. Waterproofing Membrane 5. Membrane Flashings 6. Metal Flashings 7. Drainage Composite 8. Sealants and Adhesives 9. Edge Restraints B. Work NOT in contract 1. Providing or Installation of Soil and Vegetative Cover 2. Providing or Installation Stone ballast 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. This waterproofing system shall be applied only by a waterproofing Applicator authorized by the manufacturer prior to bid. All work shall be completed by the manufacturer's trained personnel. B. Installation of all waterproofing system components up to and including the waterproofing membrane shall be the responsibility of the waterproofing applicator to ensure undivided responsibility. C. Obtain primary waterproofing, membrane and flashings, from a single manufacturer with not less than 20 years of successful experience in waterproofing applications. Provide other system components only as approved by manufacturer of primary materials. D. Pre - construction conference to be held with the owner, architect, Applicator's field superintendent, waterproofing foreman, manufacturer representative, landscaper, and other involved trades to discuss waterproofing practices applicable to the project. 075419 -1 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing E. There shall be no deviation made from the contract specification or the approved shop drawings without prior written approval by the owner or the owner's representative, and /or design professional, and manufacturer. F. The Applicator shall follow manufacturer's most current quality assurance procedures. G. Cross - section seam samples shall be taken by the applicator a minimum of two times a day (AM/PM) through completed seams and evaluated immediately. The samples must be dated and saved for evaluation by the manufacturer's Technical Representative. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicator. Membrane Testing for Water Tightness 1. Water Testing of Drains The Applicator shall water test drains according to the manufacturer's most current Quality Assurance Procedures. See Section 3.14. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Applicator shall submit to the owner's representative and/or design professional the following: 1. A letter from the manufacturer certifying" that the Applicator is an approved waterproofing applicator in good standing. 2. Specimen copy of the manufacturer's warranty. 3. Specimen copy of Applicator's warranty. 4. Sample of Self- Adhered Waterproofing Membrane. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All products 'delivered to the job site shall be in the original unopened containers or wrappings. B. Handle all materials to prevent damage. All materials shall be placed on pallets and fully protected from the elements with canvas tarpaulins. Membrane rolls shall be stored lying down on pallets and fully protected from moisture with canvas tarpaulins'. D. Membrane, adhesives, and surface conditioner shall be stored at temperatures above 40 degree F (5 degree C). E. All flammable materials shall be stored in a cool dry area away from sparks and open flames. Follow precautions outlined on container or supplied by the material manufacturer /supplier. 075419 -2 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing F. Any materials which the owner's representative and/or the manufacturer determine to be damaged are to be removed from the job site and replaced at no cost to the owner. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proceed with waterproofing membrane installation only after substrate preparation is complete. Owner's representative and/or design professional and waterproofing Applicator must accept substrate before proceeding with membrane installation. B. Substrate must be clean, smooth and dry. Do not work in rain or snow or adverse weather conditions. Severe temperatures, moisture and humidity may affect the installation of products during construction. Comply with applicable installation requirements for all components. Ambient and substrate temperature must meet the minimum requirements as outlined in the "the manufacturer's Self - Adhered Waterproofing System Installation Instructions." C. All work shall be scheduled and executed without exposing the completed waterproofing system and the building interior to the affects of inclement weather. The building and its contents shall be protected against all risks. D. The structure must be designed to support the system, including the vegetative cover. The adequacy of the structural support must be verified in writing by the owner, the owner's design professional, architect, or engineer. The Applicator shall take precautions that storage and/or application of materials and/or equipment does not overload the deck or building structure. E. All new and temporary construction, including equipment and accessories, shall be secured in such a manner, at all times, as to preclude wind blow -off or damage. F. Liquid materials such as solvents and adhesives shall be stored and used away from open flames, sparks and excessive heat. G. The Applicator should take necessary precautions when using adhesives or surface conditioner around air in- takes. The smell of the adhesive, primer, or surface conditioner could be a disturbance to the building owner and occupants. It is the Applicator's responsibility to notify the owner and take the proper precautions. H. The Applicator shall verify that all drain lines are connected and un- blocked before starting work. Report any blockages or non - connected drains to the owner's representative and /or design professional in writing. The Applicator is cautioned that the manufacturer's membranes are incompatible with asphalt, coal -tar, polystyrene, oil -based and plastic -based cements, creosote, penta -based materials, grease, fats, oils, and solvents. Such materials shall not come in contact with the waterproofing membrane at any time. If such contact occurs, the material shall be cut -out, discarded and patched. J. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly installed waterproofing for storage, walking surface, and equipment movement. Where such access is absolutely required, the Applicator shall provide all necessary temporary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent damage to adjacent areas. Adequate protection of the 075419 -3 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing membrane 'shall be provided for all waterproofing areas which receive traffic during construction. Any damage which occurs to the waterproofing membrane and/or system is to be brought to the attention of the owner's representative and/or design professional and the manufacturer. All damage is to be repaired according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The party responsible for damage shall bear the cost of repairs. K. All waterproofing materials, insulation, flashings and metal work removed for construction shall be immediately taken off the site to a legal dumping area authorized to receive such materials. L. If any unusual or concealed condition is discovered, stop work and notify the owner's representative and/or design professional and the manufacturer's rep immediately, in writing. M. Site cleanup, including both interior and exterior building areas in any way affected by the construction, shall be complete and to the owner's satisfaction. All landscaped areas affected' by waterproofing activities shall be raked clean and seeded, if required. All paved areas shall be swept clean. All areas stained, dirtied, and discolored or otherwise damaged due to waterproofing activities shall be cleaned, restored, and replaced as required. 1.06 SEQUENCING OF THE WORK A Do not allow the installation of vegetative cover by others over the completed sections of the waterproofing without the acceptance of the owner's representative, design professional, general contractor, and the manufacturer (when a Standard, System, or Single- Source' warranty is specified). A copy of the Final Inspection for Warranty is considered acceptance from the manufacturer. Protect the membrane and coordinate with other trades to avoid traffic over completed membrane surfaces. 1.07 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Site Visit: Bidders shall visit the site and carefully examine the areas in question as to conditions that may affect proper execution of the work. All dimensions and quantities shall be determined or verified by the contractor. No claims for extra costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of the existing conditions unless agreed to in advance with the Owner or Owner's Representative. 1.08 WARRANTIES General: The manufacturer's Representative's presence on a project regardless of reason, length, or frequency, does not imply that any additional coverage beyond that stated in the warranty is in effect. Applicator's Warranty The Applicator shall supply the owner with a minimum two -year workmanship warranty. 075419 -4 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing The warranty obligation shall run directly to the owner with a copy to the manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Warranty 1. Membrane Warranty (5 Years) The Applicator shall provide the manufacturer's membrane warranty to the building owner at the successful completion of the project. The warranty shall cover defective waterproofing membrane. 2. Single - Source Warranty — Extensive Green Roofs (5 Years) The Applicator shall provide a manufacturer's Single- Source warranty to the building owner at the successful completion of the project. The waterproofing membrane manufacturer shall warrant to the building owner the vegetative cover, and the repair of leaks in the waterproofing membrane resulting from defects in the membrane or workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE The manufacturer of the thermoplastic waterproofing membrane system shall have a track record of producing and marketing a reinforced PVC sheet system for waterproofing applications for at least 20 years and guarantee that the membrane thickness meets or exceeds [the specified thickness] when tested according to ASTM D751. Subject to this and other technical requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Sika Sarnafil, A Division of Sika Corporation (Basis of Design) 2. Acceptable alternative: Carlisle Roofing Self - adhered thermoplastic membrane: polyvinyl chloride (PVC) flexible sheets with non -woven fiberglass reinforcing and closed -cell foam backing layer. a) Sarnafil G476 -15 SA Waterproofing Membrane — a self - adhered, cold- applied composite sheet consisting of a 60 mil (1.5 mm), thermoplastic waterproofing membrane with fiberglass reinforcement and 60 mil (1.5 mm) closed -cell foam backing layer having an overall thickness of 120 mils (3 mm). The backing layer has a factory- applied pressure sensitive adhesive that is protected by a release liner which is removed during application. Membrane has a selvedge to allow a heat - welded overlap of adjoining sheets. Parameters ASTM Test MethodTypical Physical Properties Membrane thickness, inches (mm) D 638 0.060 (1.5) Tensile Strength, psi. D 751 1631 Elongation at Break, % D 751 279 MD, 267 CMD Seam Strength, % of Tensile Strength D 751 86% Retention of Properties After Heat Aging D 3045 Tensile Strength, % of original D 751 90% 075419 -5 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Elongation at Break, % of original D 751 90% Tear Resistance, lbf D 1004 21.0 Linear Dimensional Change, % D 1204 0.0 Weight Change after immersion in water, % D570 1.5 Static Puncture Resistance, 33 lbs. D5602 Pass Dynamic Puncture Resistance, 10 J D5635 Pass 2.02 SYSTEM FLASHING PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Flashing 1. Non - exposed flashings. a) Sarnafil G476 -15 SA Waterproofing Membrane. b) Sarnafil G476 -15, 60 mil (1.5 mm), thermoplastic flashing membrane with fiberglass reinforcement. 2. Exposed flashings a) Sarnafil G410 -15, 60 mil (1.5 mm), thermoplastic flashing membrane with fiberglass reinforcement. b) G459 -15, 60 mil (1.5 mm), thermoplastic, asphalt resistant, grid strip and flashing membrane with fiberglass reinforcement. 2.03 VAPOR BARRIER° A. Sarnavap -10 A 10 mil (0.25 mm) thick polyethylene vapor retarder /air retarder. B. Sarnavap Self- Adhered A 32 mil (0.8 mm) self - adhesive vapor barrier that can also serve as temporary roof protection. 2:04 INSULATION/THERMAL BARRIER/COVER BOARD Sarnatherm Polyisocyanurate A rigid polyisocyanurate foam insulation with black mat facers. Thicknesses and compressive strength as noted on Project Drawings. B. Sarnatherm XPS Extruded polystyrene closed -cell foam insulation. Thicknesses and compressive strength as noted on Project Drawings. C. DensDeck® Thermal Barrier A siliconized gypsum, fire- tested roof board with glass -mat facer used as a thermal 075419 -6 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing barrier underlayment in certain roof constructions. Thicknesses as noted on Project Drawings. D. DensDeck® Prime Cover Board A 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick fire - tested, gypsum cover board with glass -mat facers and a pre - primed surface on one side as a substrate for adhered membrane. 2.05 ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Fastening Components 1. Sarnaplate -Low Profile A 2 -3/4 inch (70 mm) square steel low profile plate used with various Sarnafasteners to attach insulation boards to roof deck. 2. Sarnaplate A 3 inch (75 mm) square or round steel plate used with various Sarnafasteners to attach insulation boards to roof deck. 3. Sarnafastener #12 A #12 fastener used with Sarnaplate to attach insulation boards to steel or wood roof decks. 4. Sarnafastener #14 A #14 fastener used with Sarnaplate to attach insulation boards to structural concrete or wood roof decks. 5. Sarnafastener -XP A #15 fastener used with Sarnaplate to attach insulation to steel roof decks. 6. Sarnafastener -CD 10 A nail -in fastener used with Sarnaplate to attach insulation to concrete roof decks. 7. Sarnafastener #12 Preassembled A preassembled 3 inch round plate and #12 fastener used to attach insulation boards to steel or wood roof decks. 8. Masonry Anchor A drive -pin expansion type fastener with zinc sheaths and stainless steel pins for attachment of Sarnastop to concrete, masonry, and brick. 075419 -7 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 9. Samastop An extruded aluminum, flat low profile bar used to terminate flashing membrane. B. Adhesives 1. Sarnaco12170 Solvent -based adhesive for membrane flashings in areas where self - adhered membrane is not used. 2. Sarnacol2121 Water -based adhesive for membrane flashings in areas where self - adhered membrane is not used. 3. Sikaflex -11FC Membrane adhesive for certain flashing details. C. Accessories 1. Surface Conditioner 150 For concrete and masonry substrates only. A water -based surface treatment specifically designed to bind dust ` and concrete efflorescence thereby providing a suitable surface to install self - adhered membrane. For use when substrate and ambient temperature is 40 degree F (5 degree C) or higher. 2. Sarnavap Self- Adhered Primer For use on all substrates. A solvent -based surface treatment specifically designed to bind dust and concrete efflorescence thereby providing a suitable surface to install self - adhered membrane. For use when substrate and ambient temperature is 25 degree F ( -4 degree C) or higher. 3. Sikaflex Primer 449 A solvent -based primer used to prime the back of G459 grid strip membrane to improve adhesion to Sikaflex- 1'1FC. 4. Sarnaclad -SS A PVC- coated, heat weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes and profiles. Sarnaclad -SS is a stainless steel sheet metal with an unsupported Sarnafil membrane laminated on one side for buried or concealed flashing conditions. 5. Sarnaclad A PVC - coated, heat - weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes and profiles. Sarnaclad is a 25 gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 075419 -8 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing mil (0.5 mm) unsupported Sarnafil membrane laminated on one side for above grade flashing locations. 6. Aluminum Tape A pressure - sensitive aluminum tape used as a separation layer between small areas of asphalt contamination and as a bond - breaker under the cover strip at Sarnaclad joints. 7. Sarnamatic 220 volt, self - propelled, hot -air welding machine used to seal long lengths of Samafil membrane seams. 8. Sarnacorner- Inside /Outside Prefabricated inside and outside flashing corners made of PVC membrane that are heat- welded to membrane or Sarnaclad base flashings. 9. Sikaflex ® -la Sealant used at flashing terminations and pitch pocket filler. 10. Multi- Purpose Tape A high performance sealant tape used with metal flashings as a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry. 11. Samacircle Circular 48 mil (1.2 mm) G410 membrane patch welded over T-joints formed by overlapping membranes. 2.06 DRAINAGE COMPOSITE A. Drainage Composite 3811R A 100% recycled polypropylene drainage core of fused, entangled filaments with a geotextile fabric bonded to each side. B. Geonet B A polymeric drainage net with polypropylene geotextile laminated to both sides. Recommended for heavy traffic areas requiring higher compressive strength but where lower flow rates are acceptable. 2.07 RELATED MATERIALS A. Wood Nailer 075419 -9 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Wood nailers shall be treated for fire and rot resistance (ACQ treated) and be #2 quality or better lumber. Creosote or asphalt- treated wood is not acceptable. Wood nailers shall conform to Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1 -49. All wood shall have a maximum moisture content of 19% by weight on a dry - weight basis. B. Plywood When adhering the flashing membrane directly to Marine Grade Plywood, note that any rough surfaces or high fastener heads will require the use of Sarnafelt behind the flashing membrane. Verify that plywood shall have a maximum moisture content of 19% by weight on a dry weight basis. C. Miscellaneous Fasteners and Anchors Fasteners are to be compatible with materials in contact with fasteners. All fasteners and anchors shall have a minimum embedment of 1 -1/4 inches (31.7 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the fastener manufacturer. Fasteners for attachment of metal to wood blocking shall be annular ring nails. Fasteners for attachment of metal to masonry shall be all -metal expansion type fasteners. All fasteners shall meet Factory Mutual Standard 4470 for corrosion resistance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine all surfaces scheduled to receive waterproofing membrane and flashing for roughness, contaminants, unsound structural substrates or other conditions that may impair the waterproofing application. Notify the owner and copy Sika Sarnafil in writing of any such conditions. Do not commence work until all defects are remedied. B. Applicator shall be responsible for acceptance or provision of proper substrate to receive new waterproofing materials. C. Applicator shall verify that the work done under related sections meets the following conditions: 1. Roof drains and/or scuppers have been reconditioned and/or replaced and installed properly. 2. Roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof penetrations are properly secured and prepared to receive new waterproofing materials. 3.A11 surfaces are smooth and free of dirt, debris and incompatible materials. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. New Construction 1. Wood Deck shall be installed according to the current local code requirements. 075419 -10 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 3.03 WOOD NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install continuous wood nailers at the perimeter of the entire area and around projections and penetrations as shown on the Project Drawings. Thickness shall be as required to match substrate and/or insulation height to allow a smooth transition. B. Nailers shall be anchored to resist a minimum force of 300 pounds per lineal foot (4,500 Newtons /lineal meter) in any direction. Individual nailer lengths shall not be less than 3 feet (0.9 meter) long. Nailer fastener spacing shall be at 12 inches (0.3 m) on center or 16 inches (0.4 m) on center if necessary to match the structural framing. Fasteners shall be staggered 1/3 the nailer width and installed within 6 inches (0.15 m) of each end. Two fasteners shall be installed at ends of nailer lengths. Nailer attachment shall also meet the requirements of the current Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. C. Stainless steel, corrosion resistant, fasteners are required when mechanically attaching any Sika Sarnafil product to wood nailers and wood products treated with ACQ (Alkaline copper Quaternary). When ACQ treated wood is used on steel roof decks or with metal edge detailing, a separation layer must be placed between the metal and ACQ treated wood. 3.04 SURFACE CONDITIONER/PRIMER APPLICATION A. Surface Conditioner 150 1. Apply Surface Conditioner 150 according to Sika Sarnafil's printed instructions. 2. Surface Conditioner 150 must be applied to all horizontal and vertical concrete and masonry substrates to receive G476 -15 SA membrane. Do not apply surface conditioner to cover board substrates. 3. Do not apply surface conditioner during periods of inclement weather or when ambient or substrate temperatures are below 40 degree F (5 degree C). Temperature must be a minimum of 40 degree F (5 degree C) for surface conditioner application. B. Sarnavap Self - Adhered Primer 1. Apply Sarnavap Self- Adhered Primer according to Sika Sarnafil's printed instructions. 2. Sarnavap Self- Adhered Primer must be applied to all horizontal and vertical concrete, masonry, and cover board substrates to receive G476 -15 SA membrane when the ambient temperature or substrate temperature is below 40 degree F (5 degree C). 3. Do not apply primer during periods of inclement weather or when ambient or substrate temperatures are below 25 degree F ( -4 degree C). Sarnavap Self - Adhered Primer is acceptable for use when application temperature is 25 degree F ( -4 degree C) or higher. 3.05 SELF - ADHERED THERMOPLASTIC WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE 075419-11 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing INSTALLATION A. Comply with Sika Sarnafil's most current installation instructions, specific recommendations and approved shop drawings for this project. B. Adhesion test strips are required prior to actual installation. Do not install G476 Self - Adhered membrane until a successful adhesion test has been completed. Refer to Sika Sarnafil's most current quality assurance requirements for additional information. C. All surfaces shall be dry and free of dirt, dust, and debris. D. Apply Sarnafil self - adhered waterproofing membrane only in dry weather, and when the membrane, air, and substrate temperature is a minimum of 25 degree F (-4 degree C) over substrates primed with Sarnavap Self - Adhered Primer, a minimum of 40 degree F (5 degree C) over concrete or masonry substrates conditioned with Surface Conditioner 150, and a minimum 40 degree F (5 degree C) over unprmed cover boards: E. Workmen and all others that walk on the waterproofing shall wear clean, soft-soled shoes so as not to damage materials. Heed all manufacturer's cautions and warnings in regard to product use. Membrane is slippery when wet or covered with frost, snow and ice. Take proper precautions. F. Lay out work to minimize traffic over installed areas. 3.06 HOT -AIR WELDING OF LAP AREAS A. - General 1. All surfaces to be welded shall be clean and dry. No contaminants shall be present within lap areas. 2. Adjacent sheets shall be hot -air welded in accordance with Sika Sarnafil's instructions. All seams shall be hot air welded. Lap area shall be a minimum of 2- 1/2 inch (64 mm) wide. Overlaps shall be!with the flow of water where possible. 3. All cover strips and patches shall be G476, G410, or G459 membrane. Self- adhered membrane cannot be used as cover strips or patches. 4. A minimum 8 inch (20.3 cm) wide cover strip shall be used where membranes meet at end laps and all non - selvedge edges. Butt adjoining sheets closely, center the cover strip over both membranes and hot -air weld. 5. Patch all 3- way membrane. overlaps (T joints) with a maximum 60 mil thick (1.5 mm), 4 inch (10.2 cm) round or square patch. 6. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by Sika Sarnafil. B. Machine Welding Machine welded seams are achieved by the use of automatic welding equipment. When using this equipment, Sika Sarnafil's instructions must be followed and local codes for 075419 -12 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing electric supply, grounding and over current protection observed. Dedicated circuit house power or a dedicated portable generator (30 A, 220 V, and recommended min: 7,500 Watts) is required. No other equipment shall be operated off the generator. C. Quality Control of Welded Seams All completed welded seams shall be checked by the waterproofing Applicator after cooling for continuity using a rounded screwdriver or other suitable blunt object. On -site evaluation of welded seams shall be made daily by the Applicator. Cross - section samples shall be taken a minimum of two times a day (AM/PM) through completed seams and evaluated immediately. The samples must be dated and saved for evaluation by a Sika Sarnafil Technical Representative. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicator. 3.07 MEMBRANE FLASHINGS A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the waterproofing membrane according to Sika Sarnafil approved details as the job progresses. Flashings shall be adhered to compatible, dry, smooth, and solvent - resistant surfaces. All masonry joints shall be struck flush. Rough or incompatible surfaces may be covered with minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) CDX plywood. (Do not apply surface conditioner to plywood flashing substrates). Flashing may be self - adhered waterproofing membrane or waterproofing membrane with field- applied adhesive installed according to Sika Sarnafil's printed instructions. B. When adhering to vertical surfaces greater than 30 inches (76.2 cm) in height, provide intermediate fastening of the flashing membrane according to Sika Sarnafil requirements. C. Complete the entire waterproofing assembly and flashing in a single working day; avoid exposure of any components to rain, snow, or dew. If rain threatens during the day, or in an emergency, protect the unfinished exposed waterproofing and flashing components. D. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the top edge according to approved Sika Sarnafil details. Acceptable fasteners shall be used to secure flashings to substrate. Seal top of termination with an acceptable sealant. E. All flashings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches (20.3 cm) above the overburden unless previously accepted by the owner's representative and /or design professional and Sika Sarnafil, in writing. F. A minimum 8 inch (20.3 cm) wide cover strip shall be used where self - adhered flashing membranes meet at end laps, butt joints, and all non - selvedge edges. Butt adjoining sheets closely, center the cover strip over both membranes and hot -air weld. Complete inside and outside corner flashing details with prefabricated corner patches (Sarnacorners). G. No bituminous residue shall be in contact with the underside of the membrane flashing, unless self - adhered membrane or asphalt resistant membrane is used. Flashing substrates contaminated with coal -tar shall be completely cleaned, or overlaid with minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick CDX plywood or minimum 24 gauge stainless steel sheet metal. 3.08 SARNACLAD METAL FLASHINGS 075419 -13 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing A. Complete all metal work in conjunction with waterproofing and flashings so that a watertight condition exists daily. B. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. C. Metal joints shall be watertight. D. Metal- flashings shall have a 4 inch (10.2 cm) minimum nailing flange and shall be fastened into solid wood blocking 4 inches (10.2 cm) on center staggered, or into concrete with acceptable concrete anchors 6 inches (15.2 cm) on center staggered. Fasteners shall penetrate the wood nailer a minimum of -1 -1/4 inch (31.7 mm) or into concrete a minimum of 1 inch (25.4 mm). E. Adjacent sheets of Sainaclad metal shall be spaced 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) apart. The end joints of the metal shall be fastened= 6 inches (15.2 cm) on center. The joints shall be covered with 2 inch (50.8 mm) wide aluminum tape. A 4 inch (10.2 cm) wide membrane flashing strip shall be hot air welded over the joint. 3.09 TEMPORARY CUT -OFF A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the membrane in order to maintain a watertight condition as the work progresses. Provide temporary cut -offs around exposed edges and at incomplete flashing areas from the new membrane to the structural deck or existing waterproofing. , Remove the cut =offs completely before proceeding with subsequent work. B. If inclement weather occurs while a temporary cut-off is in place, the-Applicator shall provide the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition. 3.10 SEPARATION LAYER`INSTALLATION (If Specified) A. Separation layer is installed above the membrane as additional protection as specified and according to the detail drawings lapping all edges a minimum of 4 inches (10.2 cm). B. Cut separation layer with scissors or utility blades. Do not use hot air welding equipment to cut the separation layer. 3.11 ' DRAINAGE COMPOSITE INSTALLATION A. Install drainage composite directly over the waterproofing membrane. Install drainage composite immediately after Sika < Sarnafil's inspection and acceptance of the waterproofing installation. Note: When pre - vegetated modules are specified, Drainage Composite 3811R must be used. Install with grey polyester fabric facing the pre - vegetated module and the black polypropylene fabric facing the waterproofing membrane. B. Neatly trim drainage composite to fit closely around penetrations and at the base of all drains to ensure that water will flow freely from composite into drain openings. 075419 -14 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing C. All cut edges of the drainage composite shall be covered in order to protect the waterproofing membrane from damage. D. Proceed with installation of vegetative cover promptly. 3.12 MONITORING THE VEGETATIVE COVER INSTALLATION A. The waterproofing Applicator shall monitor vegetative cover installation (by others) to assure no damage is done to the waterproofing membrane. B. Alert all parties concerned of any activities that might damage or adversely affect the long -term performance of the waterproofing. 3.13 DETAILS Refer to system specific details at http: / /usa.sarnafil.sika.com. END OF SECTION 075419 075419 -15 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing SECTION 076510 DOOR & WINDOW FLASHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Description of Work: The work of this Section shall include all labor, materials and equipment required to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. C. Work Included: The work of this Section shall include: 1. Door & Window Flexible Flashings (whether shown on the drawings or not). 2. Primers & fasteners D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Metal roof & wall panels, Division 7 2. Sheet Metal Flashings, Division 7 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 4. ASTM E331; Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 1. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each type of product. C. Samples: Each type of product specified. 4 inches by 4 inches. D. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have documented successful experience with installation of flexible flashing systems under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations. 076510 -1 Door & Window Flashing 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver flexible flashing materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store flexible flashing materials as recommended by manufacturer. Keep away from open flame or sources of ignition. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply flexible flashing on wet or damp surfaces. B. Apply to surfaces free of dirt, oils, lubricants and other debris. C. Install flexible flashing materials at temperatures above 40 °F. At temperatures below 40 °F, apply primer in accordance with flashing manufacturer recommendations, prior to installation of flashing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1- 800 -44 -TYVEK (8- 9835); http: / /construction.tyvek.com or approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Self - Adhering — Straight Flashing: 1. Basis of Design: Self- adhering straight flashing membrane tape is based on DuPont StraightFlash 2. Description: a. Face Material Composition: Textured polyethylene laminate barrier. b. Face color: white c. Adhesive composition: Butyl adhesive ; V d. Thickness: 30 mil e. Release Liner: 1 piece siliconized paper f. Dimension: [4 inches wide by 150 feet or 9, inches wide by 125 feet] B. Performance Characteristics: 1. Water intrusion: No leakage at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331. 2. Water Vapor Permeability: < 1 perm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: DuPont Tyvek® Tape as manufactured by .DuPont BuildingInnovations. 1. Description: Pressure sensitive, polypropylene substrate with acrylic based. adhesive.= � B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Frame Construction DuPont Tyvek® Wrap Cap Screws as manufactured by. DuPont Building Innovations: 1 -5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2- inch,diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1 -1/4 or 2 -inch metal gasketed washer. 2. Wood Frame Construction Tyvek® Wrap Caps, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: #4 nails with large 1 -inch plastic cap fasteners. C. Sealants 1. Provide sealant that complies with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions. 076510 -2 Door & Window Flashing 2. Products: a. Tremco 830 b. Tremco Butyl c. Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. D. Primer: 1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing 2. Products: a. 3M High Strength 90 b. Denso Butyl Spray c. SIA 655 d. Permagrip 105 ITW TACC Sta' Put SPH f. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with flexible flashing manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation. B. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of flexible flashing assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and wall penetrations to provide a weather -tight flashing assembly. 3.2 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with flanged windows installed after weather barrier) A. Cut weather barrier membrane in a modified "I -cut" pattern. 1. Cut weather barrier horizontally along the bottom of the header. 2. Cut weather barrier vertically 2/3 of the way down from top center of window opening. 3. Cut weather barrier diagonally from bottom of center vertical cut to the left and right corners of the opening. 4. Fold side and bottom weather barrier flaps into window opening and fasten. B. Cut a head flap at 45- degree angle in the weather barrier membrane at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier membrane flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.3 FLASHING (for use with flanged windows installed after weather barrier) A. Cut 9 -inch wide DuPont FlexWrap a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont FlexWrap edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPont FlexWrap at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill. E. Install window according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Apply 4 -inch wide strips of DuPont StraightFlash at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange. Extend jamb flashing 1 -inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing. 076510 -3 Door & Window Flashing G. Apply 4 -inch wide strip of DuPont StraightFlash as head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings. H. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4 -inch wide DuPont StraightFlash over the 45- degree seams. I. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations J. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify manufacturer's designated representative to obtain periodic observations of flexible flashing assembly installation. Submit field report from manufacturer's designated representative indicating that the installation conforms with manufacturers' requirements. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed flexible flashing from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 076510 -4 Door & Window Flashing SECTION 079200 CAULKING & SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Joints between different materials. b. Perimeter joints between dissimilar materials. c. Control and expansion joints. d. Other joints as necessary or indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs. b. Joints between different materials. c. Other joints as required for a complete installation. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water - resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. 079200 -1 Caulking & Sealants D. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. E. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint- sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period below. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. 079200 -2 Caulking & Sealants PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid- applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain- Test - Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. b. Tremco; Dymeric 511. c. Tremco; Vulkem 922. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 50. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) and T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates, O. D. Single- Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Available Products: a. Bostik Findley; Chem -Calk 900. b. Bostik Findley; Chem -Calk 915. c. Bostik Findley; Chem -Calk 916 Textured. d. Bostik Findley; Chem -Calk 2639. e. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I -XL. f. Polymeric Systems Inc.; Flexiprene 1000. g. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI -901. 079200 -3 Caulking & Sealants h. Schnee- Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100. i. Schnee- Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7108. j. Schnee - Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7110. k. Tremco; DyMonic. 1. Tremco; Vulkem 921. m. Tremco; Vulkem 931. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates, O. 2.4 JOINT- SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), 0 (open -cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint - sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint- filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self - adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint- sealant manufacturer `where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint - sealant - substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. 079200 -4 Caulking & Sealants PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting j oint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2 Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint - sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint - sealant - substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint - sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 079200 -5 Caulking & Sealants C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross- sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E Install bond - breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration. indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces: 3 Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM "C1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Installation of Preformed Silicone - Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint,' outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2 Apply silicone sealant to each side "of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone- sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6 mm) inside masking tape. 079200 -6 Caulking & Sealants 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field- Adhesion Testing: Field test joint- sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field- Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint- sealant application indicated. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field- adhesion -test log. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field- adhesion hand -pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Record test results in a field- adhesion -test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 079200 -7 Caulking & Sealants 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage' resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 079200 -8 Caulking & Sealants SECTION 081100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory - primed doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic- coated steel sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire- resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. 7. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. 081100 -1 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard- wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 -inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could 'create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4- inch (6 -mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames :'' 081100 -2 a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. c. Curries Company. d. Kewanee Corporation (The). e. Pioneer Industries Inc. f. Republic Builders Products. g. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll -Rand. Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 (ZF 120) zinc- iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher - leveled standard of flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher - leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. F. Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: Not allowed. H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." I. Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; consisting of fibers manufactured from rock wool with 6- to 12- lb /cu. ft. (96- to 192 - kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics for filling frame cavity for exterior frames and all interior frames with electric strikes. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft -paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral- board, or vertical steel- stiffener core. a. Thermal -Rated (Insulated) Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal - resistance value (R- value) of not less than R -10 or as indicated on the drawings when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042 -inch- (1.0 -mm -) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 081100 -3 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic - coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level B (Extra Heavy Duty), welded seams. a Width: 1 -3/4 inches (44.5 mm). C Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic - coated steel sheet. 1. Frames of 0.0747 -inch- (1.89 -mm -) thick steel sheet, full profile welded. 2. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners fully welded. C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single -door frames and two silencers on heads of double -door frames. Coordinate with 08710, Door Hardware. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042- inch - (1:0 -mm -) thick, electrolytic . zinc- coated or metallic - coated steel sheet. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc- coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153 /A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. F. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0.mm) thick. 2. Compression Type for Drywall Slip -on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 081100 -4 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. D. Core Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials that produce a door complying with SDI standards: 1. Resin - impregnated kraft/paper honeycomb. 2. Polyurethane. 3. Polystyrene. 4. Vertical steel stiffeners. 5. Rigid mineral -fiber board. E. Clearances for Non - Fire -Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch (3 2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. F. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." G. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. H. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. I. Insulating Assemblies: At exterior locations and at all frames with electric strikes, provide doors fabricated as thermal- insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Fully insulated frame with Rockwool to provide thermal -rated assemblies and sound control. 081100 -5 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames J. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 Sections. 2. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. K. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. L Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown or as required for the specific application. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. 2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. M. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface - applied hardware may be done at Project site N. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.8 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field- applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built -in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. 081100 -6 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire- protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Do not grout frames. 081100 -7 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a Floor anchors may be set with powder- actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non- Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. " Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 min) plus or Minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). c Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 nn). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation: C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying, rust- inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 081100-8 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames SECTION 087100 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project. Quantities listed are for the contractor's convenience only and are not • guaranteed. Items not specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, matching the items specified in quality and finish. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Qualification: 1. To assure a uniform high quality of materials for the project, it is intended that only specified items be furnished. Comparable products may be accepted upon prior approval of architect. 2. Hardware to be new, free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (Mechanical latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer except where specified. 3. Fire -Rated opening in compliance with NFPA80. Hardware UL10C /UBC -7 -2 (positive pressure) compliant for given type /size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non - flaming door closers, approved bearing hinges and smoke seal. Furnish openings complete. B. Supplier Qualifications 1. Hardware supplier will be a direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC) available at all reasonable times during the course of the work for project hardware consultation to owner, architect and contractor. 2. Supplier will be responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. 3. Conduct pre - installation conference at jobsite. Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and related trades. Coordinate materials and techniques and sequence complex hardware items and systems installation. 4. Key Conference shall be initiated and conducted with owner to determine system, keyway(s) and structure. C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer to have not less than 3 years experience specializing in installation of work in this section. Company must maintain qualified personnel trained and experienced in installing hardware. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA80 — Fire Doors and Windows B. NFPA 101— Life Safety Code C. NFPA105 — Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies 087100 -1 Finish Hardware D. ANSI A117.1 Specifications for making Buildings usable by physically handicapped people. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware schedule: Submit digital copy or 6 copies of schedule. Organize vertically formatted schedule into Hardware Sets with index of doors and headings, indication complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following: 1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items:" 2. Name, part number and manufacture of each item. 3. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule. 5. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing. B. Product Data: Submit digital copy or 4 copies for each product indicated. C. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other works specified to be prepared for installing door hardware. Wiring/Riser diagrams: as required for electric hardware indicated. E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 Keying Schedule: Prepared' by or under the supervision of supplier, after receipt of the approved finish hardware schedule, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Samples: Upon request submit material samples. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to project site under provisions of Division 1 and as specified herein B. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or Package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail. 1.6 WARRANTY A The finish hardware shall have a limited warranty against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of one year from date of substantial completions and the following items are as shown: 1. Closers Ten years 2. Exit Devices: Three years 3. Locksets Three years 087100 -2 Finish Hardware PART 2 2.1 A. Provide all door hardware for complete work, in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide items and quantities not specifically mentioned to ensure a proper and complete operational installation. PRODUCTS MATERIAL AND FABRICATION 2.2 MANUFACTURERS: 2.3 A. Any item shown in the hardware schedule, but not listed below shall be supplied as shown unless otherwise approved by the Architect. ITEM: MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE SUB: Hinges Locks Keying Exit Devices Closers Silencers Push & Pull Plates Kickplates Stops & Holders Overhead Stops Threshold Seals & Bottom HANGING (IVES) Ives (SCH) Schlage (BES) Best (VON) Von Duprin (LCN) LCN (IVE) Ives (IVE) Ives (IVE) Ives (IVE) Ives (GLY) Glynn- Johnson (NGP) National Guard (NGP) National Guard McKinney, Stanley None None None Norton Hager, Trimco Hager, Trimco Hager, Trimco Hager, Trimco Rixon Pemko Pemko A. Conventional Hinges: Hinge open width minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing. Steel or stainless steel pins. 1. Three hinges per leaf to 7 feet, 6 -inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in height or any fraction thereof. 2. Provide 4 'h x 4 Y2 for 1 3/4" thick doors up to 36 ". Provide 5 x 4 '/2 on doors over 36" 3. Exterior outswing doors to have non removable (NRP) pins. 4. Pin tips, flat button, finish to match leaves 5. Interior doors over 36" — Heavy weight 6. Interior doors up to 36" — Standard weight 2.4 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS A. Mortise type: 1. Provide mortise locksets that comply with ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, 2. Operational Grade 1 and Security Grade 2 with all standard trims. 3. Provide mortise locksets that comply with UL 10C and UBC 7 -2 positive pressure requirements. 087100 -3 Finish Hardware 4. Lock cases are to be multi - functional that transform into different functions without opening the lock case. 5. Latchbolts to have a standard 2 3/4" backset with a full 3/4" throw. 6. Latchbolts to be non - handed, field reversible without opening the lock case. 7. Deadbolts shall have standard 1" throw with a minimum 3/4" internal engagement when fully extended. 8. Strikes to be non - handed and bridged to ensure dead latching. Manufactures utilizing 11 rs-ofanylindfor- deadlatsh- engagement -are- not - acceptable. _ -- 9. Mounting tabs are to be automatic self adjusting, vertically and horizontally for door bevel and strike alignment. 10. Thumbturn and back -plate to be manufactured from castings and comply with ANSI 117 accessibility standard. 11. Provide locksets with Best interchangeable core cylinders. 12. Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Provide strike lips that do not project more than 1/8" beyond doorframe trim at single doors and have 7/8" lip to center at pairs of 1-3/4" doors. Provide wrought box strikes on all locks. 13. Hardware supplier shall verify all lock functions with Owner prior to ordering material. 2.6 CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: [4010/4111] 1. Full rack- and - pinion type cylinder with removable non - ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double heat - treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome - silicon steel spring. 2. ISO 2000 certified. Units •stamped with date -of- manufacture code. 3. Independent =labtested 10,000,000 cycles. 4. Thru -bolts and wood doors unless doors are provided with closer blocking. Non - sized and adjustable. Place closers inside building, stairs and rooms. 5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware. 6. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 lb., interior doors 5 lb., labeled fire doors 15 lb. 7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled. 8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units. 9. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data ott request: 10. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120 degrees F to —30 degrees E, furnish data on request. 11. Non - flaming fluid will not fuel door or floor covering fires. 27 OTHER HARDWARE A. Door stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide stops (wall, floor or overhead) at each leaf of every swinging door leaf. 2. Where wail ° or floor stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. 087100 -4 Finish Hardware B. Weatherstrip and Gasket 1. Provide continuous weather -strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. 2. Provide non - corrosive fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer for application indicated. C. Thresholds 1 Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as detailed or scheduled. D. Silencers 1. Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. E. Kick Plates: 1. Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled. Sheet -metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware. F. Electric Strikes: 1. Provided and installed by Owner. Contractor responsible for door frame prep. 2.8 HARDWARE FINISH Provide the following finishes unless noted differently in hardware groups. Hinges, Exterior 626 Satin Chrome Locksets 626 Satin Chrome Closers 626 Satin Chrome Kickplates 626 Satin Chrome Other hardware 626 Satin Chrome Thresholds ALUMINUM Weatherstrip /sweeps Clear Anodized Bronze 2.9 KEYING REQUIREMENTS A. Cylinders to be keyed into the existing Best key system. 1. Manufacturer's standard Interchangeable core type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 2. Number of Pins: Six. 3. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with required cam and trim ring(s). 4. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat -type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 5. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; interchangeable cores. 6. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. 7. Keys: Provide nickel - silver keys permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and "DO NOT DUPLICATE" notation. Furnish 10 keys PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS: 087100 -5 Finish Hardware A. Factory trained, certified, and carries a factory- issued card certifying that person as a "Certified Installer ". Alternative: can demonstrate suitably equivalent competence and Experience. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. B. Locate hardware per SDI -100 and applicable building, fire, life- safety, accessibility, and security codes. Notify Architect of any code conflicts before ordering materials. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, a plumb and true to line and location: Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. B. Locate floor stops not more than 4 inches from the wall. C. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. B. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods to be repaired or replaced to Owner's satisfaction. 3.5 FOLLOW UP INSPECTION A. Installer to provide letter of agreement to Owner that approximately 6 months after substantial completion, installer wili visit project with representative of the manufact- urer of the locking devices and door closers to accomplish the following: 1. Re- adjust locks and closers 2. Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instruct Owner's personnel. 3. Identify items that have deteriorated or failed. 4. Submit written report identifying problems and likely future problems. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware system including adjustment and maintenance procedures 3.7 PROTECTION /CLEANING A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation process. 087100 -6 Finish Hardware 3.8 HW 01 6 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2 EA 2 EA 1 EA 1 SET 1 EA 2 EA HW 02 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS HINGE DUST PROOF STRIKE RIM CYLINDER THRESHOLD FLUSH BOLT KICK PLATE DRIP CAP SEALS ASTRAGAL DOOR SWEEP HINGE DEAD LATCH OFFICE LOCK WALL STOP SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE ELECTRIC STRIKE OCCUPANCY DEADBOLT PULL WITH PLATE PUSH PLATE 5BB 1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP DP1 1E72 425E MS/LA FB457 US26D 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 16DKB 5050B 115NDKB C627D 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 B250 -80 -033 45H7A 14R WS401CVX 4111 AVB SCUSH 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 1006 -630 FURNISHED BY OWNER B571 -US26D 8302 -8 US26D 8200 -USS6D END OF SECTION Ives Ives Best Ives Ives Ives Ives Ives Ives Ives Ives Schlage Schlage Ives LCN IVES Hes Schlage Ives Ives 087100 -7 Finish Hardware SECTION 099113 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section B. Section Includes: 1. Painting of wood, except as noted below. 2. Painting HM Doors 3. Exterior wood soffits and truss tails. 4. Painting of structural steel. C. Work not included: 1. Painting of interior plywood in pump room. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. SSPC -SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 2. SSPC -SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 3. SSPC -SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. B. Material Safety Data Sheets / Environmental Data Sheets: Per manufacturer's MSDS/EDS for specific VOCs (calculated per 40 CFR 59.406). VOCs may vary by base and sheen. C. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD): Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including. 1. Product characteristics. 2. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Primer requirements and finish specification. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5. Application methods. 6. Cautions for storage, handling and installation. C. Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of manufacturer's products, colors and sheens available. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, submit samples that represent actual product, color, and sheen. 099113 -1 Painting E. Contractor must comply with the regulations regarding VOCs (CARB, OTC, SCAQMD, LADCO). To ensure compliance with district regulations and other rules, businesses that perform coating activities should contact the local district in each area where the coating will be used. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL: A. Provide a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin- Williams "Custodian" Project Color and Product Information report or equal. 1. Include a Paint Project Summary with finish schedule, including detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, Product Data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch -up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in- service performance. B. The installer must examine the building, substrates, and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and must notify the General Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the progress of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner that is acceptable to the installer. Commencement of the work of this section indicates acceptance of the existing conditions. C. Paint exposed surfaces. If a color of finish, or"a surface is not specifically mentioned, Architect will select from standard products, colors and sheens available. D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels unless indicated. E. Mock -Up: Provide a mock -up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. '' Finish surfaces for verification of products, colors and sheens. 2. Finish area designated by Architect. 3. Provide samples that designate primer and finish coats. 4. Do not proceed with remaining work until the Architect approves the mock -up. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver manufacturer's unopened containers to the work site Packaging shall bear the manufacturer's name, label, and the following list of information. 1. Product name, and type (description). 2. Application and use instructions. 3. Surface preparation. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling. 6. Batch date. 7. Color number. B. Storage: Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 099113 -2 Painting C. Store materials in an area that is within the acceptable temperature range, per manufacturer's instructions. Protect from freezing. D. Handling: Maintain a clean, dry storage area, to prevent contamination or damage to the coatings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. B. Furnish Owner with an additional one percent of each material and color, but not less than 1 gal (3.8 1) or 1 case, as appropriate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sherwin - Williams or approved equal. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 1. 2.2 APPLICATIONS /SCOPE A. Paints and Coatings: 1. Metal: galvanized steel. 2. Metal: Structural steel, shop primed ferrous metal, Hollow Metal Doors. 3. Wood: Siding, trim, siding, and miscellaneous materials. 2.3 PAINT MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide factory-mixed coatings. When required, mix coatings to correct consistency in accordance with manufacturer's instructions before application. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. 2. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one - half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. Or follow manufactures product instructions for optimal color conformance. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Coating Application Accessories: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean -up materials required, per manufacturer's specifications. D. Color: As indicated on the drawings or as selected by the Architect. 099113 -3 Painting 2.4 INTERIOR & EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. METAL: Galvanized. 1. Field applied Epoxy / Polyurethane System: a. Field Prep to SSPC -SP2 /3 where necessary, surfaces damaged in transportation and erection, then spot prime with appropriate primer. b. Gloss Finish: 1) 1st Coat: S -W Pro Industrial WP Acrylic, B66 Series. 2) 2nd Coat S -W Pro Industrial WP Acrylic, B66 Series. B. METAL: Hollow Metal Door, Misc. Steel, Ferrous Metal. 1. Field applied Epoxy / Polyurethane System: a. Field Prep to SSPC -SP2 /3 where necessary, surfaces damaged in transportation and erection, then spot, prime with appropriate primer. b. Gloss Finish: 1) 1st Coat: S -W Pro Industrial WP Acrylic, B66 Series. 2) 2 °d Coat: S -W Pro Industrial H/P Acrylic, B66 Series. C. WOOD: Trim and Hard -i- board: 1. Latex System: a. Gloss Finish: 1) 1st Coat: S -W Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W8041 (4 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry). 2) 2nd Coat: S -W Resilience Exterior Latex Gloss, K44 Series. 3) 3rd Coat: S -W Resilience Exterior Latex Gloss, K44 Series (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared; notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. B. Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected and approved by all parties, otherwise applicationof coatings will be considered as an acceptance of surface conditions. C Previously Painted Surfaces: Verify that existing painted surfaces do not contain lead based paints, notify Architect immediately if lead based paints are encountered. D. IT IS HEREBY AGREED BY BOTH PARTIES THAT CONTRACT TIME WILL BE EXTENDED AT NO CHARGE BY EITHER PARTY TO ALLOW =FOR ,PROPER DRYING TIME of the wood and prior to painting, if necessary. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Surfaces shall be dry and in sound condition. Remove oil, dust, dirt, loose rust, peeling paint or other contamination to ensure good adhesion. 1. Remove items including but not limited to electrical outlets, switch covers and similar items prior to painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. 099113 -4 Painting 2. No exterior painting should be done immediately after a rain, during foggy weather, when rain is predicted, or when the temperature is below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C), unless products are designed specifically for these conditions. On large expanses of metal siding, the air, surface and material temperatures must be 50 degrees F (10 degrees F) or higher to use low temperature products. B. Exterior Composition Board (Hardboard): Some composition boards may exude a waxy material that must be removed with a solvent prior to coating. Whether factory primed or unprimed, exterior composition board siding (hardboard) must be cleaned thoroughly and primed with an alkyd primer. C. Galvanized Metal: Clean per SSPC -SP1 using detergent and water or a degreasing cleaner to remove greases and oils. Apply a test area, priming as required. Allow the coating to dry at least one week before testing. If adhesion is poor, Brush Blast per SSPC -SP7 is necessary to remove these treatments. D. Steel: Structural, Plate, And Similar Items: Should be cleaned by one or more of the surface preparations described below. These methods are used throughout the world for describing methods for cleaning structural steel. Visual standards are available through the Society of Protective Coatings. A brief description of these standards together with numbers by which they can be specified follow. 1. Solvent Cleaning, SSPC -SP1: Solvent cleaning is a method for removing all visible oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants. Solvent cleaning does not remove rust or mill scale. Change rags and cleaning solution frequently so that deposits of oil and grease are not spread over additional areas in the cleaning process. Be sure to allow adequate ventilation. 2. Hand Tool Cleaning, SSPC -SP2: Hand Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before hand tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC -SP 1. 3. Power Tool Cleaning, SSPC -SP3: Power Tool Cleaning removes all loose mill scale, loose rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process. Before power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residues, and salts by the methods outlined in SSPC-SP1. E. Opaque Wood: Must be clean and dry. Prime and paint as soon as possible. Knots and pitch streaks must be scraped, sanded, and spot primed before a full priming coat is applied. Patch all nail holes and imperfections with a wood filler or putty and sand smooth. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply all coatings and materials with the manufacturer's specifications in mind. Mix and thin coatings according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not apply to wet or damp surfaces. Wait at least 30 days before applying to new concrete or masonry. Or follow manufacturer's procedures to apply appropriate coatings prior to 30 days. Test new concrete for moisture content. Wait until wood is fully dry after rain or morning fog or dew. C. Apply coatings using methods recommended by manufacturer. 099113 -5 Painting D. Uniformly apply coatings without runs, drips, or sags, without brush marks, and with consistent sheen. E. Apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve the manufacturers recommended dry film thickness. F. Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide, and uniform appearance. G Inspection: The coated surface must be inspected and approved by the Architect just prior to the application of each coat. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings from damage until completion of project. B. Touch -up damaged coatings after substantial completion, following manufacturer's recommendation for touch up or repair of damaged coatings. Repair any defects that will hinder the performance of the coatings. END OF SECTION 099113 -6 Painting SECTION 101423 SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Post and Panel signs. 2. Dimensional characters and symbols (letters and numbers) for exterior use. 3. Signage accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. See drawings for temporary project identification signs. 2. Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 3. Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 4. Plans for electrical service and connections for labeling electrical panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large- scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign, including large -scale details of wording, lettering and braille layout. C. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer. 101423 -1 Signs B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs. 1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates for installation of anchorage devices. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Manufacturer: TubeArt, Seattle, WA; Tel (206) 223 -1122; www.tubeart.com or Evergreen Signs, (253) 852 -1354. 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally. B. Cast- Acrylic Sheet: ' Manufacturer's standard and as follows: 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to comply with the following requirements: 1. Edge Condition: Square cut. 2. Corner Condition: Square. D. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC /ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. 101423 -2 Signs 1. Panel Material: Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied. 2. Raised -Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). E. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for application intended. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Manufacturer: TubeArt, Seattle, WA; Tel (206) 223 -1122; or Evergreen Signs, (253) 852 -1354. B. Cast Characters: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Character Height: a. Building numbers: "12345" 6 inches x 1/4 inch. Verify address numbers b. Character Style: Times Roman. 2.4 PANEL SIGN TYPES A. Room Signs: 1. Material: Cast - acrylic sheet. 2. Perimeter: Unframed. 3. Copy: Tactile and Braille, Subsurface. 4. Character Style: Helvetica. 5. Text: As indicated on the drawings. 6. Message: Fixed. 7. Sizes: Sign: As indicated on the drawings. 8. Character: Minimum 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) high characters. 9. Symbols: As required by the ADA and for the application. 10. Quantity: 4 total 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Methods: Use approved vandal resistant fastening method approved by the Architect, fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface. B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion -bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 101423 -3 Signs 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one -half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall - Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods as approved. 1. Mount signs using vandal resistant standard fastening methods recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using vandal resistant standard pin fastening methods recommended in writing by manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 101423 -4 Signs 1. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101423 -5 Signs SECTION 20 0100 — BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Basic and supplemental requirements common to Plumbing and HVAC Work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the Contract Documents. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. These definitions are included to clarify the direction and intention of these Specifications. For further clarification, contact the Architect/Engineer. 1. Concealed / Exposed: "Concealed" areas are those areas that cannot be seen by the building occupants. "Exposed" areas are all areas, which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including under counters, inside cabinets and closets, plus all mechanical rooms. "Exterior" areas are those that are outside the building exterior envelope and exposed to the outdoors. 2. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. 3. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project Site including the actual "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 4. Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Plumbing and HVAC systems shall be coordinated with other systems and trades to include but not be limited to: Electrical systems, fire alarm, security systems, transport systems, telephone and data systems. BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS 20 01 00 - 1 B. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper relation of Contractor's Work to the building structure and to the Work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the premises and become thoroughly familiar with all details of the Work and working conditions, to verify all dimensions in the field, s and to advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancy before performing any Work. Adjustments to the Work required in order to facilitate a coordinated installation shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner or the Architect/Engineer. C. All dimensional information related to new structures shall be taken from the appropriate Drawings. All dimensional information related to existing facilities shall be taken from actual measurements made by the Contractor on the Site. D. The Drawings are subject to the requirements of Reference Standards, structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of Work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed Work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. E. When the Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping and duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control Iines pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. F. Where core drilling of floor or wall penetrations is required, Work shall be performed in accordance with Division 03 Specifications. Where applicable Division 03 Specifications are not included in the Project, core drilling shall be in accordance with generally accepted standards, and be performed by licensed personnel where applicable. G. Certify in writing that neither the Contractor nor any of Contractor's subcontractors or suppliers will supply any materials that contain any asbestos in any form for this Project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All equipment, ductwork, and materials shall be delivered to the Project Site clean and sealed for protection. B. Take particular care not to damage the existing construction in performing Work. All finished floors, step treads and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workers or their tools and equipment during the construction of the Project. C. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust and dust/debris both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. D. All material affected by weather shall be covered and protected to keep the material free from damage while material is being transported to the Site and while stored at the Project Site. BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS 20 0'1 00 - 2 E. During the execution of the Work, open ends of all piping and conduit, and all openings in equipment shall be closed when Work is not in progress, and shall be capped and sealed prior to completion of final connections, so as to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. F. All equipment shall be protected during the execution of the Work. All ductwork and equipment shall be sealed with heavy plastic and tape to prevent build -up of dust and debris. G. All ductwork and air handling equipment shall be wiped down with a damp cloth immediately before installation to ensure complete removal of accumulated dusts and foreign matter. H. All plumbing fixtures shall be protected and covered to prohibit usage. All drains shall be covered until placed in service to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All equipment installed shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts. C. Responsibility for furnishing proper equipment and/or material and ensuring that equipment and/or material is installed as intended by the manufacturer, rests entirely upon the Contractor. Contractor shall request advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of specific manufacturers during the installation. D. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new, free from all defects, suitable for the intended use and of the best quality of their respective kinds. Materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the best standard practice for the type of Work involved. All Work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in their respective trades, and the installations shall provide a neat, precise appearance. Materials and/or equipment damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged prior to installation shall not be repaired at the job Site but shall be replaced with new materials and/or equipment. E. Materials and equipment manufactured domestically are preferred when possible. Materials and equipment that are not available from a domestic manufacturer may be by a non- domestic manufacturer provided they fully comply with Contract Documents. F. Prevention of Rust: Standard factory finish will be acceptable on equipment specified by model number; otherwise, surfaces of ferrous metal shall be given a rust inhibiting coating. 2.02 MECHANICAL SYSTEM LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION: A. Provide clearly visible nameplate data on all mechanical equipment. B. Provide labels for each valve, fire damper, control device and balancing device. C. Provide 2 inch (50mm) high black letters with system name on each major piece of mechanical equipment. BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS 20 01 00 - 3 D. All piping to be painted and labeled in accordance with the following schedule: SERVICE COLOR SHERWIN- WILLIAMS PAINT NO OR TYPE Cold water (domestic) Blue 1782 Promar semi -gloss Hot water (domestic) Green 1720 Natural gas Yellow 1671 Fire service (wet) Red Metalatex Fire standby Dark green Fire system (wet/dry) Lt yellow Waste, soil, vent and rain leader Brown VCA 7983 Meta latex E. F. Provide labeling for mechanical piping and ductwork above the ceiling or in non- mechanical areas, with markers spaced every 25 ft (7.6m). Label to correspond with service. G. Provide visible indication marking the location above a dropped ceiling of each valve, fire damper, control device, balancing device or maintenance access point for each piece of mechanical equipment. H. Label to correspond with service color with permanent adhesive color coded dot, 3/8" diameter minimum. Secure dot to nearest suspension `T' in lieu of tile. 2.03. NAMEPLATES A. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog number on a plate securely attached to the item of equipment All data on nameplates shall be legible at the time of Final Inspection. B. Nameplates shall be black laminated rigid phenolic with white core. Nameplate minimum size shall be 1 inch high by 3 inches long with 3 /16- inch -high engraved white letters. C. Nameplate Fasteners: Fasten nameplates to the front of equipment only by means of stainless steel self- tapping screws. Stick -ons or adhesives will not be allowed unless the NEMA enclosure rating is compromised, then only epoxy adhesive shall be used to attach nameplates. D. Nameplate Information: In general, the following information is to be provided for the types of electrical components or enclosures supplied with equipment. 1. Individual Starters, Contactors, Disconnect Switches, and Similar Equipment: ':Identify the device, and voltage characteristics source and load served. 2.04 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS) A. Except as otherwise noted, provide stainless steel or chrome plated brass floor and ceiling plates around all pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., passing exposed through walls, floors or ceilings, in any spaces except underfloor and plenum spaces. BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS 20 01 00 - 4 B. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe or against the insulation on lines that are insulated and positively secured to such pipe or insulation. C. For finished ceiling installation, secure escutcheons to ceiling with escutcheon fasteners. D. Plates will not be required for piping where pipe sleeves extend 3/4 -inch or more above finished floor. E. Round and rectangular ducts shall have closure plates (not chrome plated) made to fit accurately at all floor, wall and ceiling penetrations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Cooperate with trades of adjacent, related or affected materials or operations, and with trades performing continuations of this Work in order to effect timely and accurate placing of Work and to coordinate, in proper and correct sequence, the Work of such trades. B. The size of equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine that the equipment proposed will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement. C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. D. Space Requirements: 1. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous Work in location of equipment and material. Do not provide equipment or material which is not suitable in this respect. 2. Make changes in material and equipment locations of up to five (5) feet, to allow for field conditions prior to actual installation, and as directed by the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Contractor shall note that the electrical design and Drawings are based on the equipment scheduled and indicated on the Drawings. Should any equipment be provided requiring changes to the electrical design, the required electrical changes shall be made at no cost to the Owner. F. Connections for equipment other than Divisions 21, 22, 23: 1. Rough -in and provide all gas, water, sewer, etc. connections to all fixtures, equipment, machinery, etc., furnished by the Owner and/or other trades in accordance with detailed rough -in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed. 2. After the equipment is set in place, make all final connections and provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc. BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS 20 01 00 - 5 3. Provide all backflow preventers and air gap fittings required, using approved devices. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap. 4. Provide all ductwork, transition pieces, etc., required for a complete installation of vent hoods, fume hoods, etc. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Piping may be run exposed in rooms typically without ceilings such as mechanical rooms, janitor's closets, tight against pan soffits in exposed "tee" structures, or storage spaces, but only where necessary. Shutoff and isolation valves shall be easily accessible. D. All pipe, conduits, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All ducts, pipes and conduits run exposed in machinery and equipment rooms shall be installed parallel to the building lines, except that piping shall be sloped to obtain the proper pitch. Piping and ducts run in furred ceilings, etc., shall be similarly installed, except as otherwise shown. All pipe openings shall be kept closed until the systems are closed with final connections. E. Prior to the installation of any ceiling material, gypsum, plaster or acoustical board, the Contractor shall notify Owner's Project Manager so that arrangement can be made for an inspection of the above - ceiling area about to be "sealed" off The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Owner at least five (5) calendar days prior to the inspection. F. Precedence of Materials: 1. The Specifications determine the nature and setting of materials and equipment. The Drawings establish quantities, dimensions and details. 3.03 TESTING A. When any piece of mechanical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, Contractor may do so, provided that Contractor properly supervises the operation, and has the Owner's written permission . to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of Substantial Completion, whichever occurs first. B. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. C. Check inspections shall include piping, equipment, heating, air conditioning, insulation, ventilating equipment, controls, mechanical equipment and such other items hereinafter specified or specifically designated by the Architect/Engineer. BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS 20 01 00 6 D. Notify the Owner's Project Manager and the Architect/Engineer in writing at least seven (7) calendar days prior to each test and prior to other Specification requirements requiring Owner and Architect/Engineer to observe and/or approve tests. E. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall include date, time, personnel performing, observing and inspecting, description of the test and extent of system tested, test conditions, test results, specified results an other pertinent data. Data shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer as specified under "Requirements for Final Acceptance." The Contractor or Contractor's authorized job superintendent shall legibly sign all Test Log entries. F. Refer to Commissioning Specification Sections for additional Start -up, prefunctional and operational checkout, and for functional performance test procedures. 3.04 TRAINING A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and instruction shall be provided as specified under the Division 01 Section entitled "Project Closeout Procedures." B. Specific training and operating instructions for individual equipment components shall be as specified in the individual Specification Sections. C. All equipment, piping, conduit, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas shall be cleaned, prepared and painted as specified in Division 09. END OF SECTION 20 0100 BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS 20 01 00 - 7 SECTION 20 07 19 — PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Perform all Work required to provide and install piping insulation, jackets and accessories indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and Workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ASTM C168 - Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation Materials. 2. ASTM C335 - Steady -State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation. 3. ASTM C518 - Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 4. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 5. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 6. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 7. ASTM C578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 9. ASTM C591 - Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 10. ASTM C610 - Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 11. ASTM C921 - Jackets for Thermal Insulation. PIPING INSULATION 20 07 19 - 1 12. ASTM C1126 - Faced or Unfaced Rigid Celluar Phenolic Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 14. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed Cell Foam). 15. ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 16. ASTM C795 - Insulation For Use Over Austenitic Steel. 17. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 18. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 19. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 20. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed: Areas that cannot be seen by the building occupants. B. Interior Exposed: Areas that are exposed to view by the building occupants, including underneath countertops, inside cabinets and closets, and all equipment rooms. C. Interior: Areas inside the building exterior envelope that are not exposed to the outdoors. D. Exterior: Areas . outside the building; exterior envelope that are exposed to the outdoors, including building crawl spaces and loading dock areas. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All piping; requiring insulation shall be insulated as specified herein and as required for a complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equivalent to that specified and materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications. B. All insulation, jacket, adhesives, mastics, sealers, etc., utilized in the fabrication of these systems shall meet NFPA for fire resistant ratings (maximum of 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed ratings) and shall be approved by the insulation manufacturer for guaranteed performances when incorporated into their insulation system, unless a specific product is specified for a specific application and is stated as an exception to this requirement. 1. Certificates to this effect shall be submitted along with Contractor's submittal data for this Section of the Specifications. 2. No material shall be used that, when tested by the ASTM E84 -89 test method, is found to melt, drip or delaminate to such a degree that the continuity of the flame front is destroyed, thereby resulting in an artificially low flame spread rating. C. Application Company Qualifications: Company performing the Work of this Section must have minimum three (3) years experience specializing in the trade. PIPING INSULATION 20 07 19 '- 2 D. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in this particular Work and regularly engaged in such occupation. E. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and with factory printed recommendations on items not herein mentioned. Unsightly, inadequate, or sloppy Work will not be acceptable. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide product description, list of materials, "k" value, "R" value, mean temperature range, and thickness for each service and location. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Indicate procedures that ensure acceptable standards will be achieved. Submit certificates to this effect. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification including product thermal ratings and thickness. B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage. C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and insulation cements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation: 1. Johns Manville Corporation. 2. Owens- Corning. 3. Certainteed Corporation. 4. Approved Equal. B. Jackets: 1. Childers Products Company. 2. PABCO. PIPING INSULATION 20 07 19 - 3 3. RPR Products, Inc. 4. Alpha. 5. Venture Tape Corporation 6. Foamglas 2.03 INSULATION A. Type Pland P2: Fiberglass preformed insulation with factory applied vapor barrier all - service jack; ASTM C 547; minimum 3.0 lb /cu ft density, ASTM C335,'k' value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; noncombustible. Staple longitudinal edges every. 12 inches (305mm). Tape all circumferential joints and longitudinal joints. Acceptable Product: Johns Manville Micro -Lok. _ -ASTM C547. Prohibit ASTM C552 cellular glass "Foamglas" insulation on hot water systems. B. Type P3 Insulation: Finish coat is not required. C. Type P4: Mineral Wool; ASTM C 547; preformed insulation high temperature insulation; 'k' value of 0.35 at 300 degrees F. D. Type P5: Phenolic closed cell, ASTM C1126 rigid foam, 2.2 lbs. nominal density, CFC free; ASTM C518, 'k' value of 0.13 at 75 degrees F. (Note material thickness limit is 3 inches as tested in accordance with ASTM E84 E. Type P6: Cellular Glass, ASTM C552, 7.5lbs. /cu.ft, density, ASTM E96 (Wet Cup Method) 0.00 water vapor perm , ASTM C518 `k' value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F. 2.04 JACKETS A. Metal shall be uniformly corrugated or embossed aluminum, minimum 0.016 inch ''(0.4lmm)' thick, with factory bonded moisture barrier lining. B. Provide caps on all ends. C. Acceptable product: Pabco Childers Surefit. ASTM B209. D. Metal fitting insulation and covers: Factory prefabricated aluminum insulation covers. E. Insulating performance and moisture barrier requirements of the fitting insulation shall meet the requirements of the adjacent piping. F. Metal jacketing bands: Stainless steel blue banding (designates non - asbestos). G. Protect all raw edges and tag ends of banding clips to prevent danger to personnel coming in contact. H. Rotate band ends away from traffic areas. 2.05 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fitting Covers: Pre - formed PVC insulation fitting covers over fiberglass insulation on all elbows and fittings. Pre formed mineral wool insulation on all steam and condensate return fittings. PIPING INSULATION 20 07 19 - 4 B. Insulating performance and vapor barrier requirements of the fitting insulation shall meet the requirements of the adjacent piping. Acceptable product: Johns Manville Zeston or Ceel -co. C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting mineral wool; Ryder One -Coat. D. Sealants: Use at valves, fittings and where insulation is terminated. Brush apply sealant to end of insulation and continue along pipe surface. Provide Childers CP- 70/CP -76 or equivalent sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that piping has been pressure tested before applying paint and insulation materials. B. Thoroughly clean all surfaces to be insulated as required to remove all oil, grease, loose scale, rust, and foreign matter. Piping must be completely dry at the time of application of primer paint. Painting on piping where condensation is occurring on the pipe surface is strictly prohibited. C. Provide primer coat on all piping, to include field welds and over factory applied paint/coating, in total compliance with Contract Documents and compatible with and approved by the insulation manufacturer. Painting must be completed and approved prior to installation of insulation. Paint shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufactures instructions, environment, and pipe surface temperatures. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Installation of insulation and jacket materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. C. Handle and install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in the absence of specific instructions herein. D. Provide insulation with air tight vapor barrier jacket for domestic and lab cold water pipes. E. Provide removable insulation on the following:: a. Provide removable insulation on all equipment and components requiring periodic maintenance and operation. b. In mechanical rooms, provide blankets on all valves and components on systems with insulated piping. c. On pipe flanges. F. Do not provide insulation on valve handles, test ports, balancing valves, name plates. PIPING INSULATION 20 07 19 - 5 G. Fiberglass pipe insulation with factory applied vapor barrier all- service jacket. Staple longitudinal edges every 12 inches (305mm). Tape all circumferential joints and longitudinal joints. H. Provide pre - formed PVC insulation fitting covers over fiberglass insulation on all elbows and fittings. Insulating performance and vapor barrier requirements of the fitting insulation shall meet the requirements of the adjacent piping. I. ASTM C552 cellular glass "Foamglas" insulation on hot water, steam and steam condensate systems is prohibited. J. On exposed piping, locate insulation cover seams with the ridge of the lap joint is directed down. K. Exposed Insulated piping within eight feet of the floor shall be protected with an aluminum or stainless jacket material to, protect the insulation. L. Insulate fittings, joints and valves with molded insulation of the same material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Open voids and cracks insulation shall be kept at a minimum when placing insulation on abnormal or irregular shapes. Use closed cell or recommended fill material as instructed by the insulation manufacturer to close openings. Fiberglass insulation shall not be used as a fill material on chilled water piping or fittings. M. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, floors, and other pipe penetrations. N. Provide dams in insulation at intervals not to exceed 20 feet on cold piping systems to prevent migration of condensation or fluid leaks. Indicate visually where the dams are located for maintenance personnel to identify and also provide dams at butt joints of insulation at fittings, flanges, valves, and hangers. O. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, flanges and strainers. Use closed cell insulation on cold piping system, flexible connections, expansion joints and unions, bevel and seal ends of insulation and continue sealant a minimum of 4 inches along the piping, unless stated otherwise. P. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. Continue sealant a minimum of 4 inches along the piping. Q. All sections of molded pipe covering shall be firmly butted together. Where an insulation covering is applied, it shall lap the adjoining section of insulation by at least three inches (3 inches). Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. All materials used shall be fire retardant or nonflammable. R. Where vapor barriers are required; the vapor barrier shall be on the outside. Extreme care shall be taken that the vapor barrier is unbroken. Joints, etc., shall be sealed. Where insulation with a vapor barrier terminates, seal off with vapor barrier continuous to the surface being insulated. Ends shall not be left raw. S. Do not insulate pipes until the system has passed static pressure tests. T. Apply duct insulation tightly and smoothly. Do not notch insulation. PIPING INSULATION 20 07 19 - 6 U. Provide shields or saddles to prevent crushing insulation. Shields shall be minimum 6" long and centered under hanger. V. Apply jackets and coatings over clean and dry insulation. W. Fill joints, breaks, punctures and voids in vapor barrier jacket watertight. Replace ripped, damaged, wet, dirty or moldy mechanical insulation before system is turned over to the owner. X. Repair or replace dented jackets. Do not leave any raw fiberglass fibers exposed. Seal all joints. Y. Do not compress insulation. When patching existing systems, match insulation thickness of adjacent insulation. 3.03 INSERTS, SUPPORTS, AND SHIELDS 1. Shields a. Install between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. Curved metal shields shall be used between the hangers or support points and at the bottom of insulated pipe 2 inches and larger. b. Hangers shall support the load of the insulated pipe section on the outside of the insulation and shall not be in direct contact with the pipe. c Manufacturer shall be responsible to size the length of shield required to prevent insulation from breaking. d. Provide rigid insulation at each support point, a minimum of 4 inches longer than shield length. e. Curved metal shields shall be designed to limit the bearing stress on the insulation to 35 psi and shall be curved to fit up to mid-perimeter of the insulated pipe. 2. Seal all insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions. Maintain vapor barrier with finish coat. PIPING INSULATION 20 07 19 - 7 3.04 PIPING INSULATION APPLICATION AND THICKNESS SCHEDULE A. In no case shall installed piping insulation have insulation thicknesses that are less than what is required by local energy codes and ASHRAE 90.1 (whichever is more stringent), based on comparable insulation conductivity values at the specified mean rating temperature. Piping Systems Location Type Pipe Size Insulation Thickness Domestic Hot Water, (Maximum 200 Degrees F) Interior Concealed P 1 2" & Smaller 1" 2 -1/2 "& Larger 1 -1/2" Interior Exposed P5 P6 1-1 /2" & Smaller 3/4" 2" to 4" 1" 5" & Larger 4" and Smaller 5" & Larger 1 -1/2" 1" 1 -1/2" Exterior P5 P6 All Sizes All Sizes 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" Domestic Cold Water Interior Concealed P1 1 -1/2" & Smaller 1/2" Interior Exposed P1 P 1 I -1/2" &Smaller 3/4" Interior Exposed 1 -1/2" & Smaller 1" END OF SECTION 20 0719 PIPING INSULATION 20 07 19 - 8 SECTION 22 10 00 — PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B.6 Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide materials and installation for complete first class plumbing systems, within and to five feet beyond building perimeter unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings; Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping, Domestic Water Piping, Domestic Water Valves, Testing and other normal parts that make the systems operable, code compliant and acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with City of Bellingham Public Works Department Standards. B. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. C. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. D. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 2012 Edition of the International Plumbing Code. 2012 Edition of International Mechanical Code with WA State Amendments. 2012 Edition of International Building Code with WA State Amendments. ANSI/NSF Standard 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1,04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be permanently marked on valve body. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 1 B. The Contractor shall notify the manufacturer's representative prior to installing any copper press fittings. The Contractor shall obtain the representative's guidance in any unfamiliar installation procedures. The manufacturer's representative of copper press fittings or shall conduct periodic inspections of the installation and shall report in writing to the Contractor and Owner of any observed deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation practices. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company shall have minimum . three years of experience specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. All pipe, fittings, couplings, gaskets and valves shall be manufactured domestically. D. Installer Qualifications: Company shall have minimum three years of experience specializing in performing the, work of this section. All installers of copper press fittings shall be trained by the fitting manufacturer's appointed representative. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Code and Standards compliance, manufacturer's data for pipe, fittings, valves and all other products included within this specification section. Manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, etc. and prepare valve charts. Test reports and inspection certification for all systems listed herein. Provide a certificate of completion detailing the domestic water system chlorination procedure and all laboratory test results. Submit proposed location of access panels which vary from quantities or locations indicated on Contract Drawings. Provide full written description of manufacturer's warranty. C. Operation and Maintenance. Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, Record Drawings, inspection data, installation instructions, exploded assembly views, replacement part numbers and availability, location and contact numbers of service depot. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All materials shall be new, undamaged, and free of rust. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 -'2 B. Accept valves on Site in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. C. Provide temporary protective coating and end plugs on valves not packaged within containers. Maintain in place until installation. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on pipe and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect installed piping, valves and associated materials during progression of the construction period to avoid clogging with dirt, and debris and to prevent damage, rust, etc. Remove dirt and debris and repair materials as work progresses and isolate parts of completed system from uncompleted parts. F. Protect all materials that are to be installed within this project from exposure to rain, freezing temperatures and direct sunlight. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide materials as specified herein and indicated on Contract Drawings. All materials and work shall meet or exceed all applicable Federal and State requirements and conform to adopted codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Pressure ratings of pipe, fittings, couplings, valves, and all other appurtenances shall be suitable for the anticipated system pressures in which they are installed. 2.02 EXTERIOR BURIED DRAINAGE LINES A. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub and spigot per ,the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A74. B. PVC sewer pipe and fittings per ASTM D2729. 2.03 ABOVE GROUND DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT (DWV) PIPING WITHIN BUILDINGS (SANITARY AND ROOF DRAINAGE): A. 2 -1/2" (63mm) diameter and smaller: Copper DWV drainage tube or seamless copper pipe with cast bronze threaded or copper solder joints drainage fittings. PVC plastic DWV piping with solvent cement is allowed for buildings less than two stories tall. B. 3" (76mm) diameter and larger: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, service weight hubless with stainless steel couplings. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 3 2.04 BURIED OR BELOW SLAB DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING WITHIN BUILDINGS: A. Service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings with hubless connections using clamp type gasketed mechanical fasteners above ground and hub and spigot DWV pipe and fittings with neoprene compression gasket joints for all buried pipe. Cast iron soil pipe, fittings and hub gaskets shall be manufactured by Tyler Pipe or Charlotte Pipe and Foundry. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be of the same manufacturer. B. Unburied sanitary waste and vent piping for sizes 4" and smaller may be seamless copper DWV tube with wrought copper or wrought copper alloy solder joint drainage pattern DWV fittings. C. Indirect waste piping sizes 1 -1/4" through 2" serving fixtures and equipment shall be seamless copper DWV tube with wrought copper or wrought copper alloy solder joint drainage pattern DWV fittings. D. Indirect waste piping sizes 1" and smaller serving equipment shall be type "L" hard drawn copper pipe and wrought copper or cast copper alloy solder joint fittings using lead -free solder and non - corrosive flux. Elbows shall be long radius type. Tee fittings shall be combination wye with 45 degree elbow. E. Cast iron soil pipe compression gaskets shall be monolithically molded from an elastomer meeting ASTM C 564 and shall be of same manufacturer as pipe and fittings. F. Clamps for joining hubless cast iron pipe and fittings sizes 10" and smaller shall meet the performance,criteria of FM 1680, have 28 gauge type 304 stainless steel jacket, minimum .094 inch thick ASTM C 564 neoprene gasket and. type 305 stainless steel band screws designed to be installed with a pre -set torque wrench calibrated at 80 inch pounds. Couplings shall be manufactured by Clamp - All, Inc. ° HI -TORQ 80 or Husky, Inc., Orangeshield HD 4000. G. Hubless piping systems shall not be used in a directly buried, underground application. EXCEPTION: No -hub type fittings with clamp type coupling joints may be used below ground for pipe sizes up to 10" at connections to existing cast iron sewers provided couplings are cast iron with stainless steel bolts as manufactured by MG Piping Products. H. Solder for copper piping shall be 95.5% Tin, 4% Copper and 0.05% Silver solder conforming to ASTM B32. Use flux recommended by solder manufacturer and conforming to ASTM B813. I. Lubricant for drainage cleanout plugs shall be Loctite Marine Grade Anti -Seize or approved equal by Bostik Chemical Group, or Dow Corning Corporation. J. Double sanitary tee fittings shall be not be used as a drainage fitting.' K. Provide IAPMO figure one, IAPMO figure five `or double wye and eighth bend fittings on vertical lines serving back -to -back fixture drains. L. Double wye and eighth bend fittings shall not be installed in horizontal drain lines. M. All P -traps for floor drains, floor sinks and hub drains shall be deep -seal type. PLUMBING PIPING 2210 00 - 4' N. Provide threaded brass or copper adapters to connect fixture supply stops and waste to service piping within walls. Galvanized nipples shall not be acceptable. Provide DWV copper trap adapters to connect lavatory, sink and drinking fountain trap outlets to sanitary system. 2.05 JOINTS: ASTM D2235, SOLVENT WELD. A. Minimize piping below concrete slab. Provide clean outs as required for ready access to under slab piping. 2.06 EXTERIOR BURIED WATER MAINS: A. Comply with City of SeaTac Public Works Department Standards. B. Ductile iron pipe, American Water Works Association (AWWA) C151. 2.07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND VALVES (INCLUDING COLD AND HOT WATER) A. 4" (100mm) and smaller: ASTM B88 seamless, hard copper tube, Type L for aboveground piping, Type K for buried piping. B. Wrought copper solder joint fittings and 95/5 or Plumbing Code approved lead free solder above ground. Flare fittings or silver solder below ground. C. Copper pipe nipples with threaded end connections at valves and unions. D. 5" (125mm) and larger: Seamless copper pipe with mechanically grooved fittings, or steel piping, Schedule 40, with seamless welded fittings. E. Prohibit CPVC plastic piping. F. All materials within domestic water distribution systems that may come in contact with the potable water delivered shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 61. G. All brass and bronze piping materials within domestic water distribution systems that may come in contact with the potable water delivered shall have no more than 15% zinc content. H. Solder for copper piping shall be 95.5% Tin, 4% Copper and .05% Silver conforming to ASTM B32. Use water soluble flux recommended by solder manufacturer and conforming to ASTM B813 and NSF 61. I. Dielectric waterway fittings shall have zinc electroplated steel pipe body with high temperature stabilized polyoleftn polymer liner; manufactured by Victaulic, Style 47 or PPP, Inc. Series 19000. J. Dielectric unions shall be rated at 250 psi, ground joint type with inert, non - corrosive thermoplastic sleeve. End connection materials shall be compatible with respective piping materials; manufactured by EPCO Sales, Inc. Provide models to suit applicable transitions. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 5 K. Pipe joint compound shall be lead -free, non - toxic, non - hardening and compliant with ANSI/NSF 61 and Federal Specification TT -S -1732. Temperature service range of -15 °F to +400 °F, manufactured by Hercules "MegaLoc" or approved equal by Rectorseal, La -Co or Oatey. L. Isolation valves: 1 3" (76mm) and smaller: Apollo brand bronze or steel ball valves with appropriate trim. Provide 1/4 turn supply stops with handles at lavatories. 2. End connections: Up to 3" (76mm) shall be threaded; greater than 3" (76mm) shall be flanged. 3. Require adequate unions and flanges at the valve for removal and repair, or provide a design which permits inspection and repair of seats and seals without removing vale body from line. Provide label on all valves pertaining to area serviced along with label schedule in mechanical room. 5. Provide valve extensions on handles for insulated pipe. M. Line Shut -Off Valves up to and including 2" shall be two -piece bronze body of ASTM B584 Alloy 844, ASTM B61, or ASTM B62, full port ball type rated at 600 WOG with threaded connections, blow -out proof stem, plastic coated handle, Teflon packing, 316 stainless steel ball and stem. Acceptable valves are NIBCO Model T- 585- 70 -66, or approved equivalent model by Crane, Milwaukee or Apollo. N. Line Shut -Off Valves sizes 2 -1/2" and 3" shall be full port ball type rated at 400 WOG with threaded connections, two-piece bronze body ASTM B584 witty 316 stainless steel ball and stem, plastic coated handle; blow out proof stem and reinforced Teflon seats. Acceptable valves are Kitz Model 68PM, or approved equivalent model by Crane, NIBCO, Milwaukee or Apollo. O Provide line shut -off valves that have the same inside diameter of the upstream' pipe in which they are installed. P. Domestic Hot Water Return Circuit Balancing Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be `Y or T' pattern with threaded inlet and outlet connections, equal percentage globe -style and= provide precise flow measurement, precision flow balancing and positive drip -tight shut -off. Valves shall provide multi -turn, 360° adjustnient with micrometer type indicators located on the valve handwheel. Valves shall "have a minimum of five full 360° handwheel turns. 90 °'circuit- setter' style ball valves are not acceptable. Valve handle shall have hidden memory feature to provide a means for locking the valve position after the system is balanced. PLUMBING PIPING 22 1000 -6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before commencing work, check final grade and pipe invert elevations required for drain terminations and connections to ensure proper slope., 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipes and tubes. Remove burrs, scale and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly. Remove foreign material from piping. B. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Care shall be exercised to avoid all cross connections and to construct the plumbing systems in a manner which eliminates the possibility of water contamination. D. Install all materials and products in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. Use tools manufactured for the installation of the specific material or product. E. Heat generated by soldering procedures shall not be transmitted to valves, copper alloy roll groove fittings, copper press fittings, no -hub clamps, or any other components installed within the piping system that may be damaged due to high temperatures. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary, including utilizing wet wrapping or allowing heated piping to cool to ambient temperature ]before attachment. F. Pipe joints, no -hub clamps, flanges, unions, etc., shall not directly contact or be encased in concrete, or be located within wall, floor or roof penetrations. G. Route piping in direct orderly manner and maintain proper grades. Installation shall conserve headroom and interfere as little as possible with use of spaces. Route exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. H. Install piping to allow for expansion and Contraction without stressing pipe, joints or connected equipment. I. Furnish all supports required by the piping included in this specification section. J. Penetrations through fire rated walls, floors and partitions shall be sealed to provide a U.L. rating equal to or greater than the wall, floor or partition. K. Seal all penetrations through floors, exterior building walls and grade beams air and water tight. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 7 L. Each plumbing pipe projecting through roof shall be installed in accordance with Contract Specifications and Drawings. Penetrations shall be sealed air and water tight. Refer to details on Contract Drawings and coordinate with General Contractor for flashing requirements. M. Furnish and install all necessary valves, traps, gauges, strainers, unions, etc. for each piece of equipment (including Owner furnished equipment) having plumbing connections, to facilitate proper functioning, servicing and compliance with code. N. Provide code - approved transition adapters when joining dissimilar piping materials. Adaptors installed shall be manufactured specifically for the particular transition. O. All piping shall have reducing fittings used for reducing or increasing where any change in the pipe sizes occurs. No bushing of any nature shall be allowed in piping. P. Piping shall be insulated in accordance with Contract Documents. Q. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents, drains, unions, etc: R. Provide dielectric isolation device where non - ferrous components connect to ferrous components. Devices shall be dielectric union, coupling or dielectric flange fitting. S. All piping shall be isolated from building structures, including partition studs, to prevent transmission of vibration and noise. T. Isolate all bare copper pipe from ferrous building materials. "Tape is not an acceptable isolator. 3.04 SANITARY WASTE PIPING INSTALLATION A. Slope drainage lines uniformly at 1/4" per foot, for lines 3" and less, and 1 /8" per foot for larger lines, unless noted -otherwise" on Contract' Drawings. Maintain gradients through each joint of pipe and throughout system. B. The size of drainage piping shall not be reduced in size in the direction of flow. Drainage and vent piping shall conform to the sizes indicated on the Contract Drawings. Waste lines from water closets shall not be smaller than four inches. Under no circumstances shall any drain or vent line below slab be smaller than two inches. C. Unburied horizontal cast iron soil piping shall be supported at least at every other joint except that when the developed' length between supports exceeds four feet, they shall be provided at each joint. Supports shall also be provided at each horizontal branch connection and at the base of each vertical rise. Supports shall be placed immediately adjacent to the joint. Suspended lines shall be braced to prevent horizontal movement.' Unburied vertical cast iron soil piping rising through more than one floor level shall be supported with riser clamps at each floor level. D. Install couplings for hubless pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. Use pre -set torque wrench and tighten band screws to 80 inch pounds minimum or as required by manufacturer's published instructions. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 8 E. All unburied change of direction fittings within the roof drainage system shall be braced against thrust loads that might result in joint separation due to dynamic forces caused by sudden, heavy rainfall conditions. Bracing shall incorporate galvanized steel pipe clamps and tie rods. F. Provide cleanouts within sanitary waste systems at locations and with clearances as required by the code, at the base of each waste stack and at intervals not exceeding 90 feet in horizontal runs. G. A removable sink or lavatory p -trap with cleanout plug shall be considered as an approved cleanout for 2" diameter pipe. H. All interior cleanouts shall be accessible from walls or floors. Provide wall cleanouts in lieu of floor cleanouts wherever possible. A floor cleanout shall be installed only where installation of a wall cleanout is not practical. I. Coordinate the location of all cleanouts with the architectural features of the building and obtain approval of locations from the Project Architect. J. Lubricate cleanout plugs with anti -seize lubricant before installation. Prior to final completion, remove cleanout plugs, re- lubricate and reinstall using only enough force to provide a water and gas tight seal. 3.05 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING INSTALLATION A. On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply discharge outlet below the overflow rim, or where cross contamination may occur, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker or backflow preventer. Installation of vacuum breakers shall prevent any possible backflow through them. B. Copper piping shall be supported at no greater than six foot intervals for piping 1 -1/2" and smaller and ten foot intervals for piping 2" and larger in diameter. C. Install all water piping to allow all piping within the system to be drained at low points. D. Air chambers, dead -legs, or any other piping arrangement that may allow water to stagnate shall not be installed within domestic water systems. Valves installed for future connections shall not extend more than 24" from an active main. E. Provide manufactured water hammer arrestors in water supply lines as indicated on Contract Drawings and in accordance with Standard PDI- WH2O1. F. Install union type fitting downstream of isolation valves at equipment connections. G. Solder joint fittings shall not be installed within 24" of a copper press fitting. H. Threaded adaptors shall be of the same manufacture and type as the system's copper fittings. I. Threaded adaptors on supply stub -outs shall be installed prior to construction of wall and shall not extend more than 1" beyond wall face. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 9 3.06 DOMESTIC WATER VALVES INSTALLATION A. Domestic water shut -off valves shall be installed where shown on Drawings, at each fixture and piece of equipment, at each branch take -off from mains, at the base of each riser, and at each battery of fixtures. B. Install shut -off valves in accessible locations. Provide access panels where valves would otherwise be inaccessible. Coordinate quantity, size and location requirements of access panels with General Contractor. C. Install shut -off valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. D. Where threaded valves are installed in copper piping systems special care shall be taken to avoid damaging the valve or its parts due to overheating. Install copper or bronze male adapters in each inlet of threaded valves. Sweat solder adapters to pipe prior to connecting to valve body. E. Provide accessible check valves in the individual cold and hot water fixture supply lines serving mixing valve type faucets or assemblies having hose connection outlets that are not equipped with integral check stops: F. Install domestic hot water return circuit balancing valves where indicated on Contract Drawings and locate a minimum of five pipe diameters downstream and three pipe diameters upstream of all fittings and/or line shut -off valves. Location of valves shall allow unobstructed access for monitoring and adjustment. G. Adjust and set domestic hot water return circuit balancing valves to flows indicated on Contract Drawings and in accordance with valve manufacturer's published •instructions. Use flow meter recommended by valve manufacturer. H. Provide a temperature gauge, strainer,; union and line shut -off valve upstream of each hot water return circuit balancing valve. 3.07 TESTING A. General Testing of Piping: 1. Equipment, material, power, and labor necessary for the cleaning, flushing, sterilization, inspection and testing of systems covered within this Specification Section shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor. All testing and inspection procedures shall be in accordance with Division 1 and Special Condition requirements of this Contract. 2. All new and parts of existing altered, extended, or repaired plumbing system piping shall be tested and inspected for leaks and defects. Piping being tested shall not leak nor show any loss in test pressure for duration specified. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 10 3. In cases of minor installation and repairs where specified water and/or air test procedures are deemed impractical, Contractor shall obtain written approval from Owner's Representative to perform alternate testing and inspection procedures. Alternate testing and inspection procedures for minor installation and repairs shall include visual evaluation of installed components by Owner's Representative during a simulation of use. 4. The water utilized for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply. 5. Prepare testing reports. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each segment, complete with diagram or clear description of applicable portion of piping. After inspection has been approved or portions thereof, certify in writing the time, date, name and title of the persons reviewing the test. This shall also include the description of what portion of the system has been approved. Obtain approval signature by Owner's Representative. A complete record shall be maintained of all testing that has been approved, and shall be made available at the job Site. Upon completion of the work, all records and certifications approving testing requirements shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative before final payment is made. 6. Verify systems are complete, flushed and clean prior to testing. Isolate all equipment subject to damage from test pressure. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. Leave piping uninsulated, uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Where any portion of piping system must be concealed before completion of entire system, the portion shall be tested separately as specified for the entire system prior to concealment. Contractor shall expose all untested covered or concealed piping. 7. Gauges used for testing shall have increments as follows: a. Tests requiring a pressure of 10 psi or less shall utilize a testing gauge having increments of 0.10 psi or less. b. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 10 psi but less than or equal to 100 psi shall utilize a testing gauge having increments of 1 psi or less. c. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 100 psi shall utilize a testing gauge having increments of 2 psi or less. 8. Separately test above and below ground piping. 9. Do not introduce test water into piping systems when exposure to freezing temperatures is possible. 10. Do not introduce test water into sections of piping located above existing sensitive areas and/or equipment that may be damaged or contaminated by water leakage. Coordinate with Owner's Representative to determine areas and/or equipment considered as being sensitive. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 11 11. Defective work or material shall be reworked and replaced, and inspection and test repeated. Repairs shall be made with new materials. Pipe dope, caulking, tape, dresser couplings, etc., shall not be used to correct deficiencies. 12. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning up any leakage during flushing, testing, repairing and disinfecting to the original condition any building parts subjected to spills or leakage. B. Drainage and Vent system testing: 1. Subject gravity drainage and vent piping and joints to a vertical water column pressure of at least ten feet. If after 12 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped and the water level shall again be raised to the level described and the test repeated until, after a 12 hour retention period, there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested. 2. Piping located above sensitive areas and/or equipment that may be damaged or become contaminated due to test water leakage shall be tested with air. Isolate the test section from all other sections and slowly fill pipe with oil -free air until there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds per square inch (34.5 kPa) or sufficient pressure to balance a 10- inch (254 mm) column of mercury. The air pressure shall be regulated to prevent the pressure inside the pipe from exceeding 5.0 PSIG. This pressure shall be held for a test period of at least 15 minutes. Any adjustments to the test pressure required because of changes in ambient temperature or the seating of gaskets shall be made prior to the beginning of the test period. 3. Test forced (pumped) drainage piping by plugging the end of the piping at the point of connection with the gravity drainage system -and applying a pressure of5psi (34.5 kPa) greater than the pump rating, and maintaining such pressure for 15 minutes. 4 After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent and drain piping as required to isolate system being tested. Introduce' air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 -inch wg (250 Pa). Use U -tube or manometer inserted in fixture trap to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection.` Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question of a doubt relative to the integrity of the installation, additional tests or 'measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. 6 Test plugs must extend, outside the end of pipe to provide a visible indication for removal after the test has been completed. C. Domestic Water System Piping Testing: PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 12 1. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 125 pounds per square inch gauge, but not less than the operating pressure under which it is to be used, for a period of no less than 12 hours. During test period, all pipe, fittings and accessories in the particular piping system that is being tested shall be carefully inspected. If leaks are detected, such leaks shall be stopped and the hydrostatic test shall again be applied. This procedure shall be repeated until, for an entire 12 hour period. 2. After completion of the testing, all new and /or altered water piping systems shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing not .less than 50 -parts per million of available chlorine. Do not exceed 150 parts per million at any time. Introduce chlorine into the supply stream at a rate sufficient to provide a uniform concentration throughout the system. All outlets shall be opened and closed several times. When the specified level of chlorine is detected at every outlet in the system, close all valves to prevent release of water from the system for 24 hours. At the completion of the 24 hour disinfection period, test every outlet for a minimum chlorine residual of fifty parts per million. This minimum residual must be present to proceed with flushing. Flush the system with clean water at a sufficient velocity until the residual chlorine detected at every outlet is within 0.2 parts per million of the normal water supply's level. 3. Sufficient samples must be taken no sooner than 24 hours after sterilization and flushing to represent the extent and complexity of the affected water system, along with a control sample to indicate municipal water quality at the time of testing. Send water samples to an accredited laboratory to perform qualitative and quantitative bacteriological analysis in accordance with AWWA C651. Contractor shall obtain written certification from the independent testing agency stating that the water samples meet Federal and State guidelines for safe drinking water. Upon satisfactory completion of all procedures, and receipt of acceptable laboratory test results, obtain written approval by Owner's representative. Failure to fully comply with the above procedures will result in a requirement to repeat the procedure until acceptable results are achieved, at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Isolate or bypass equipment_ that would be detrimentally affected by disinfecting solution. Isolate all other sections of the domestic water system not being disinfected to prevent migration of chlorine. 5. Prior to injection of chlorine into the piping system, strategically place signs stating "Heavily Chlorinated Water - Do Not Drink ", and protect all outlets to prevent use during disinfection and flushing procedures. 6. A bacteria test is not necessary for small scale work. However, disinfection is required. Examples of small scale work are less than 20 feet of pipe, replacement and/or installation of a sink, drinking fountain, eyewash, backflow preventer, isolation valve, etc. Disinfect individual parts, fixtures, isolation valves, pipes, etc. by swabbing with full strength bleach (5.25 %) or soaking for at least 30 minutes in a 500 ppm chlorine solution. The 500 ppm solution can be made by adding one part 5.25% bleach (household bleach) to 100 parts drinking water. For example 3 -1/2 ounces of bleach can be added to 2 -1/2 gallons drinking water. Materials should then be thoroughly rinsed before putting into service. PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00 - 13 END OF SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING 22 110 00 14 SECTION 22 10 30 — PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide all materials and installation for plumbing specialties within building domestic water and sanitary waste drainage systems; floor drains, cleanouts, backflow preventers, vacuum breakers, water hammer arrestors, wall hydrants, hose bibbs, trap primer units, strainers, and other normal parts that make the systems complete, operable, code compliant and acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. 2012 Edition of the International Plumbing Code. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be permanently marked on valve body. 2. All materials shall be new, undamaged, and free of rust. Protect installed products and associated materials during progression of the construction period to avoid clogging with dirt, and debris and to prevent damage, rust, etc. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company shall have minimum three years of experience specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. 4. Installer Qualifications: Company shall have minimum three years of experience specializing in performing the work of this section. Installation of plumbing systems shall be performed by individuals licensed in the state of WA. All installation shall be supervised by a licensed Master Plumber. PLUMBING SPECIALITIES 22 10 30 - 1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide Code and Standards compliance, component dimensions, service sizes and finishes. B. Record Documents: 1. Manufacturer's certification documentation for backflow preventers. 2. Submit proposed location of access panels which vary from quantities or locations indicated on Contract Drawings. 3. Provide full written description of manufacturer's warranty. 4. Record actual locations of plumbing specialties installed. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include testing procedures for backflow preventers, adjustment procedures for water pressure regulating valves. 2. Include installation instructions, exploded assembly views. servicing requirements, inspection data, installation instructions, spare parts lists, replacement part numbers and availability, location and contact numbers of service depot, for all plumbing specialties installed 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept - specialties on site in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. B. Provide temporary protective coating and end plugs on valves not packaged within containers. Maintain in place until installation. C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work and isolating parts of completed system. D. Protect all materials before and after installation from exposure to rain, freezing temperatures and direct . sunlight. EXCEPTION: Materials manufactured for installation within exterior environments. 1.0,7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide two loose keys for each type of wall' hydrant box. B. Provide manufacturer's standard test kit for each type of backflow preventer installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. PLUMBING SPECIALITIES 22 10 30 2 B. Provide plumbing specialties as indicated and scheduled on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. All materials and work shall meet or exceed all applicable Federal and State requirements and conform to adopted codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Pressure ratings of plumbing specialties shall be suitable for the anticipated system pressures in which they are installed. D. All materials within domestic water distribution systems that may come in contact with the potable water delivered shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 61. E. All brass and bronze plumbing specialties within domestic water distribution systems that may come in contact with the potable water delivered shall have no more than 15% zinc content. F. Specialties of same type shall be product of one manufacturer. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Floor Drains: Wade, Zurn, Smith, Josam. B. Wall/Floor Cleanouts: Wade, Zurn, Smith, Josam. C. Backflow Preventers: Watts Regulator, Febco, Conbraco. D. Water Pressure Regulating Valves: Wilkins, Watts Regulator. E. Water Hammer Arrestors: Wade, Zurn, Smith, Josam. F. Wall Hydrants: Wade, Zurn, Smith, Josam. G. Hose Bibbs: Woodford. H. Trap Primer Units: As Specified Herein 2.03 FLOOR DRAINS (FD) A. All floor drains shall be furnished and installed with all options and accessories required for a waterproof installation within the particular construction in which they are to be mounted. B. Each floor drain shall be provided with a deep -seal p -trap unless noted otherwise. C. Floor drains installed for general floor area drainage within toilet rooms and other finished spaces shall have cast iron body with flange, adjustable top and sediment bucket, integral reversible clamping collar, seepage openings, 1/2" plugged primer tap, and 6" diameter nickel bronze or stainless steel strainer with vandal proof screws. D. Floor drains installed for general floor area drainage and light to medium flow indirect equipment discharge within mechanical rooms shall have cast iron body with plugged 1/2" primer tap, integral clamping collar, seepage openings, adjustable top and 11 -1/2" diameter ductile iron loose set tractor grate. E. Floor drains installed for non - monolithic shower stall floors shall have cast iron body with flange, adjustable top and sediment bucket, integral reversible clamping collar, seepage openings and 5" diameter nickel bronze or stainless steel strainer with vandal proof screws. F. All floor drains shall be as sized and scheduled on Contract Drawings. PLUMBING SPECIALITIES 22 10 30 - 3 2.04 CLEANOUTS: A. Cleanouts shall be the same nominal size as the pipe they serve up to four inches. For pipes larger than four inches nominal size, the size of cleanouts shall be six inches. B. Cleanouts shall have cast iron body with tapered cast brass or bronze plug providing gas and watertight seal. C. Interior floor cleanouts shall have stainless steel or nickel bronze scoriated top. Provide carpet marker when installed in areas to be covered by carpet. D. Exterior cleanouts at grade shall have scoriated cast iron top. E. Wall cleanouts shall be provided with stainless steel access covers of adequate size to allow rodding of drainage system. Wall cleanouts incorporating cover screws that extend completely through the access plug are not acceptable. 2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced Pressure Zone Type: 1. IAPMO listed, AWWA Standard C511 compliant. Body: Bronze 1/2" to 2 ", epoxy - coated cast iron sizes 2 -1/2" and above. 2. Test Cocks: Ball valve type. 3. Seats: Bronze, removable and replaceable without removing valve'' °from the line. 4. Checks: Independently operating. 5. Relief Valve: Independently operating, located between the two check valves. 6. Rated 175 psi working pressure and with temperature range of 33 to 140 °F. 7. Pressure loss at rated flow not to exceed 16 psi. 8. Unit to be complete with vent -port funnel to maintain the air gap and to provide a drain connection point. 9. Watts No. 909. B. Continuous Pressure Vacuum Breaker: L Tested andcertified under ASSE Standard 1020 and,CSA. Standard B64.1.2. 2. Suitable for continuous pressure hot and cold water. . Brass body and seat with silicon rubber discs. 4. Rated maximum pressure 150 psi and working temperature 33 to 140 degrees F. 5. Complete with quarter turn ball valves and test cocks. 6. Watts No.800M4QT. PLUMBING SPECIALITIES 22 10 X30 - 4 2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS (SHOCK ABSORBERS): A. Nesting type bellows operated water hammer arrestor with male N.P.T. connection. Bellows and body casing made of Type 304 stainless steel. Water hammer arrestors shall be certified to the PDI WH -201 Standard and ASSE Standard 1010. B. Arrestors shall be designed and manufactured for a maximum working temperature of 250F and maximum operating pressure of 125 P.S.I.G. C. All arrestors shall be designed and approved for sealed wall installation without an access panel. D. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized according to water hammer arresters standard PDI- WH -201 and as indicated on Contract Drawings. 2.07 WALL HYDRANTS A. Provide antisiphon, non - freeze wall hydrant with brass casing, integral backflow preventer, vandalproof box with loose -key handle and finish as scheduled on Drawings. B. Hose Bibbs (HB): Provide Chicago Faucet No. 387 chrome plated brass hose bibb with %- inch female inlet, wall flange and No. E27 vacuum breaker. 2.08 TRAP PRIMER UNITS (TP) A. Vacuum Breaker Trap Primer for use with exposed Flushometers: 1. One Piece, Chrome Plated Flush Connection. 2. Water Deflector to control the amount of water diverted from the flush. 3. 3/8" Elbow and Flex -bend Tube connection from Vacuum Breaker to wall. 4. Diverter Wall Flange and Fittings 5. Chrome Plated Wall Flange and Fitting to connect'/" NPT pipe. 6. High Back Pressure Vacuum Breaker. 7. One -piece Bottom Hex Coupling Nut. 8. Sloan Model VBF -72 -AI B. Trap Primer for use with Lavatory or Sink Drain Tailpiece: 1. Polished Chrome Plated Cast Bronze P -trap with Ground Joint Outlet. 2. Threaded Wall Tube, Slip Joint Nuts, Washers and Escutcheons. 3. 1/2" Polished Chrome Plated Bronze Primer Tube with Compression Fitting Connection at Wall. 4. Jay R. Smith Model 2698 or approved equal of a referenced acceptable manufacture. PLUMBING SPECIALITIES 22 10 30 - 5 2.09 STRAINERS A. Strainers, 2" and smaller, bronze body, screwed ends, No. 20 mesh type 304 stainless steel screen, screwed cap with bronze blow -off valve (size to be determined by standard tap size in cap). B. Strainers, 2 1/2" and larger, Cast iron body, isolating type flanged ends where installed in copper lines, .125" perforated type 304 stainless steel screen, flanged cap with bronze ball blow -off valve (size of blow -off valve shall be determined by standard tap size in cap). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains with General Contractor. B. Verify location of equipment and housekeeping pads prior to installation of floor drains. Relocation due to misplacement shall be at Contractor's expense. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Install in plumbing specialties in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. D. Extreme care shall be used to set the top elevation of floor drains and floor sinks to meet the low point elevation of the finished floor. E. Pipe connections to above grade floor drains and floor sinks shall not directly contact or be encased in concrete. F. Final mounting of interior cleanout top or access cover shall be set flush with the finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. G. Encase exterior cleanouts within 14" x 14" x 6" thick reinforced concrete pad. Set top flush with finished grade surface. H. Locate cleanouts with required clearance for rodding of drainage system. I. Isolate all non- potable water requirements from the building domestic water system with backflow prevention device manufactured and certified for the particular application. J Pipe relief from backflow preventer indirectly to drain of sufficient size to evacuate discharge. K. Provide hydraulic shock absorbers in cold and hot water supply lines to each fixture branch, battery of fixtures and at each automatic, solenoid- operated or quick - closing valve serving equipment. Locate and size in accordance with PDI -WH -201 Standard and manufacturer's published recommendations. PLUMBING SPECIALITIES 22 1030 - 6 L. Provide ball type shut -off valve and union directly upstream of each line pressure activated trap primer unit to allow service. M. Locate all trap primers exposed and accessible. END OF SECTION 22 10 30 PLUMBING SPECIALITIES 22 10 30 - 7 SECTION 22 33 33 — ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section covers providing all labor and materials for the complete first class installation of tank type domestic water heaters indicated and scheduled on Contract Drawings complete with all controls, piping, valves, wiring, supports, accessories, testing, and other normal parts required for complete, code compliant, operable installation that is acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. 2012 Edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code 2. Underwriters Laboratories Listings 3. 2012 Edition of the National Electric Code 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Heaters shall be designed to limit the maximum temperature to avoid scalding. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company shall have minimum three years experience specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section. C. Provide equipment with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity permanently identified. D. Water heater shall meet or exceed the minimum energy factor requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1b -2001. ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 33 33 -1 E. Installer Qualifications: Company shall have minimum three years experience specializing in performing the Work of this section. Installation of plumbing systems shall be performed by individuals licensed by the State of Washington. All installation shall be supervised by a licensed Master Plumber. F. Products and installation of specified products shall be in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following: 1. National Electric Code (NFPA 70). 2. UL Standard 1453 or UL Standard 174 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include dimension Drawings of water heaters indicating piping, components and required connections. 2. Manufacturer's data sheets, wiring diagrams and Installation Instructions. 3. Provide complete description of equipment materials, electrical characteristics, options provided, warranty, maximum water pressure requirements and code compliance. B. Record Documents: 1. Provide full written description of manufacturer's warranty. C Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept products on Site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. Maintain products in factory packaging until installation. B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps when not factory provided. Maintain caps in place until installation. C. Protect components from damage after installation. D. Do not allow use of heater for any reason, other than testing, during the construction phase of this project. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a three -year warranty in writing against tank leaks caused by corrosion and one -year parts warranty against operational failure due to faulty manufacturing or materials. ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 33 33 -2 B. The complete system shall be warranted in writing against defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 POINT OF USE DOMESTIC WATER HEATER A. Acceptable manufacturers 1. A.O. Smith 2. State 3. Rheem -Ruud B. Furnish and domestic hot water heaters with dimensions, capacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled on the Contract Drawings and as outlined herein. This Specification describes minimum quality and performance requirements. Variations of system components by the individual referenced manufacturers are acceptable for installation in this project provided they meet or exceed all of the requirements indicated herein, are compatible with the electrical service provided and fit properly in the allocated space. C. Heater shall have 150 psi working pressure and be equipped with extruded high density anode rod. All internal surfaces of the heater exposed to water shall be glass -lined with an alkaline borosilicate composition that has been fused to steel by firing at a temperature range of 1600 °F. Direct - Immersion threaded electric heating elements heating elements shall be medium watt density with zinc plated copper sheath. Each element shall be controlled by an individually mounted thermostat and high temperature cutoff switch. Heaters having double- elements shall be provided with simultaneous wiring to permit both elements to operate at the same time. E. The heater outer jacket shall be of baked enamel finish and shall be provided with full size control compartment for performance of service and maintenance through hinged front panels and shall enclose the tank with foam insulation. F. Water heater shall have a properly sized, factory provided temperature and pressure relief valve. G. The tank drain valve shall be located in the front for ease of servicing. 2.03 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A. Construction shall be bronze body with silicone disc having a dry guide which is located out of the water. Unit shall open at less than 1/2" vacuum and be suitable for use within a system having a-maximum water pressure of 200 psi and a maximum temperature of 250 °F. Vacuum relief valves shall be in compliance with the appropriate requirements of ANSI Z21.22. B. Vacuum relief valves shall be manufactured by Watts Regulator, Wilkins or Conbraco. ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 33 33 -3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide 4" high reinforced concrete housekeeping pad beneath floor mounted water heaters or provide heater with legs /base manufactured by heater manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Install water heaters, piping, wiring and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Furnish all supports required by the equipment included in this Contract in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. E. Each water heater located above ceiling or at any location where leakage would result in damage to the building or its contents shall be provided with and set within a safety pan equipped with a minimum 3/4 inch drain connection. Safety pans shall be minimum 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal and be three inches larger on all sides than the water heater, with a minimum depth of two inches. F. Connect and extend 'copper piping' from pan dram connection' and temperature and pressure relief valve and discharge separately to the exterior of the _.building and terminate between 6 and. 24 inches above grade at as visible; location that cannot cause damage to property or personnel. Relief valve shall not discharge into safety pap. G. Safety pan and relief valve drain lines shall be copper and installed so that all water will drain completely out of the piping. Where it is impractical or physically impossible to extend a drain line to the building exterior, drain , lines shall discharge separately into a floor drain, housekeeping mop sink or other location approved by the WWU. H. Each water heater shall be provided with clear access and unobstructed passageway that is adequate to allow removal and replacement. I. Install heater in a vertical position with a clearance on all sides for servicing. Coordinate location of unit to avoid conflicts with, other system or building components. J. Furnish and install all necessary valves, strainers, unions, etc. to facilitate proper functioning and servicing of equipment. K. Provide dielectric isolation device where copper lines connect to ferrous lines or equipment. L. Install an accessible line size shutoff valve in cold water inlet within two feet of heater. M. Provide heat trap inlet piping for storage type heaters to prevention migration of heated water into cold water system. ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 33 33-4 N. Provide heat trap in outlet piping for storage type heaters serving non - circulated distribution systems. O. Provide a vacuum relief valve in cold water supply to heaters having bottom feed inlet. Install valve in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. P. Provide a temperature gauge in the outlet piping adjacent to storage type heaters. Locate gauge in an easily readable position. Q. Flush water supply line to remove all air, scale and dirt prior to connecting heater. R. Take precautions to prevent heat generated by soldering procedures from being transmitted to heater components. S. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor for power and wiring required. Verify that electrical power is connected to a properly grounded dedicated branch circuit of proper voltage rating and equipped with ground fault interrupter. Each heater shall be provided with an independent circuit. Insure that the correct wire and circuit breaker sizes are provided. T. When all plumbing installation is completed, check for leaks and take corrective action before proceeding. Flow hot water until temperature has stabilized. Verify and insure that the water meets scheduled temperature at all outlets. Clean heater water prior to final inspection of installation. 3.03 TRAINING A. Contractor shall instruct and acquaint the Owner with the proper functioning, operation and maintenance of the water heater and all associated installed components. END OF SECTION 22 33 33 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 33 33 -5 SECTION 23 31 00 DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Perform Work required to provide and install ductwork, flexible duct, hangers, supports, sleeves, flashings, vent flues, and all necessary accessories as indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide any supplementary items necessary for proper installation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ASHRAE - Handbook of Fundamentals; Duct Design. 2. ASHRAE - Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment; Duct Construction. 3. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. 4. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 5. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. 6. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 7 NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 8. SMACNA — HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 9. SMACNA — Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. 10. SMACNA — Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards. 11. SMACNA — HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 12. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 13. Assembly and Installation of Spiral Ducts and Fittings, UMC. Ductwork 233100 -1 14. Engineering Report No. 132 (Spacing of Duct Hangers), UMC. 15. AWSD1.1 American Welding Society Structural Welding Code. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Low Pressure 1. 2 inch W.G. Pressure Class: Ductwork systems up to 2 inch w.g. positive or negative static pressure with velocities less than or equal to 1500 fpm. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide the following information for each sheet metal system furnished on the Project: a. System name and type. b Duct system design pressure. c. Duct material. d. Duct gage. e. Transverse joint methods. f. Longitudinal seam type. Sealant type. SMACNA rectangular reinforcement type. B. Record Documents: 1. Submit Shop Drawings on all items of ductwork, plenums, and casings including construction details and accessories specified herein in accordance with Division 01. Ductwork construction details and materials used for duct sealant, flexible connections; etc. shall be submitted and approved prior to the fabrication of any ductwork. 2. Coordinate with all other trades and building construction prior to submitting Shop Drawings for review. Indicate location of all supply, return, exhaust, and light fixtures from approved reflected ceiling plans on Shop Drawings. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the 'Project Site and store and protect products under provisions of Division 01 and Division 20. B. Protect materials from rust both before and after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All ductwork shown on the Drawings, specified or required for the air conditioning and ventilating systems shall be constructed and erected in a first class workmanlike manner. Ductwork 233100 -2 B. The Work shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the Project Substantial Completion date against noise, chatter, whistling, vibration, and free from pulsation under all conditions of operation. After the system is in operation, should these defects occur, they shall be corrected as directed by the Owner at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 APPLICATION A. Ductwork systems shall be constructed in accordance with the following Materials as a minimum standard. Refer to Drawings for any deviation from this Table. AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL MINIMUM PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION (1) Exhaust Systems: Galvanized Steel Low Pressure B. Notes to Table: 1. Positive pressure unless noted otherwise in Table. 2.03 DUCTWORK MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION A. Ductwork construction and installation: Galvanized steel sheet ductwork complying with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525. B. Square right angle turns in main duct runs not allowed. Provide radiused turns instead. Provide turning vanes and pressure drop calculations during design for unavoidable tight configurations. C. All ductwork indicated on the Drawings, specified or required for the air conditioning and ventilating systems shall be of materials as hereinafter specified unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. All air distribution ductwork shall be fabricated, erected, supported, etc., in accordance with all applicable standards of SMACNA where such standards do not conflict with NFPA 90A and where class of construction equals or exceeds that noted herein. D. Minimum gage of round, oval or rectangular ductwork shall be 26 gage per SMACNA Standards. E. All duct sizes shown on the Drawings are clear inside dimensions. Allowance shall be made for internal lining, where specified, to provide the required free area. F. All holes in ducts for damper rods and other necessary devices shall be either drilled or machine punched (not pin punched), and shall not be any larger than necessary. All duct openings shall be provided with sheet metal caps if the openings are to be left unconnected for any length of time. G. Except for specific duct applications specified herein, all sheet metal shall be constructed from prime galvanized steel sheets and/or coils up to 60 inches in width. Each sheet shall be stenciled with manufacturer's name and gage. H. Sheet metal must conform to SMACNA sheet metal tolerances as outlined in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards." Ductwork 233100 -3 I. Where ducts are exposed to view (including equipment rooms) and where ducts pass through walls, floors or ceilings; furnish and install sheet metal collars around the duct. J. Spin -in fittings shall be as specified under Section 23 33 00 — Ductwork Accessories. K. Duct Sealing: 1. Comply SMACNA duct sealing class requirements, UL listed sealant types, and methods of sealing. 2. All ductwork, regardless of system pressure classification, shall be sealed in accordance with Seal Class A, as referenced in SMACNA Standards. 3. All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed. 4 All seams and joints in shop and field fabricated ductwork shall be sealed by applying one layer of sealant, then immediately spanning the joint with a single layer of 3 inches wide open weave fiberglass scrim tape. Sufficient additional sealant shall then be applied to completely embed the cloth. 5 Sealant shall be water based, latex UL 181B -M sealant with flame spread of 0 and smoke developed of 0. Sealants shall be similar to Hard Cast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate Pro Seal or Design Poiymerics DP 1010. 6. Scrim tape shall be fiberglass open weave tape, 3 inches wide, with maximum 20/10 thread count, similar to Hardcast FS -150. 7. Sealer shall be rated by the manufacturer and shall be suitable for use at the system pressure classification of applicable ductwork. 8. Except as noted, oil or solvent - based sealants are specifically prohibited. 9. For exterior applications, solvent -based sealant shall be used 2.04 RECTANGULAR AND ROUND DUCTWORK A. Metal gages listed in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible Duct, are the minimum gages which shall be used. Select metal gage heavy enough to withstand the physical abuse of the installation. In no case shall ductwork be less than 26 gage per SMACNA Standards. B. All longitudinal seams for rectangular duct shall be selected for the specified material and pressure classification. Seams shall be as referenced in SMACNA Standards. C. Longitudinal seams in laboratory hood exhaust ducts shall be welded. All transverse joints and intermediate reinforcement on rectangular duct shall be as shown in SMACNA Standards. Transverse, joints shall be selected consistent with the specified pressure classification, material, and other provisions for proper assembly of ductwork. E. Joints in spiral duct and fittings shall be assembled, suspended, sealed, and taped per manufacturer's published assembly and installation instructions. 2.05 CASINGS AND PLENUMS - 2 INCH W.G. PRESSURE CLASS A. All 2 inch w.g. pressure class casings and plenums for mixed air plenums shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA Standards. Ductwork 233100.4 13. All casings shall enclose the filter and automatic dampers as shown on the Drawings. Casings shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal erected with three -foot center maximum standing seams reinforced with '/4 -inch bars. The casing shall be stiffened on three -foot centers maximum with angle irons tack welded in place. C. All openings to the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent any air leakage. Access doors shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and shall be air tight, double skin insulated construction with frames welded in place. Doors shall be rubber gasketed with #390 Ventlok gasketing and equipped with fasteners equal to Ventlok #310 latches and #370 hinges that can be operated from both the inside and the outside. D. Casings shall be anchored by the use of angle irons sealed and bolted to the curb and floor of the apparatus casing. Casings shall be tested and provided tight at a pressure of three inches water column. E. Insulate per Section 23 07 13. 2.06 ELBOWS RECTANGULAR DUCTS A. Construct elbows as follows in order of preference: 1. Long radius, unvaned elbows. 2. Short radius, single thickness vaned elbows. 3. Rectangular, double thickness vaned elbows. B. Long radius elbows shall have a centerline radius of not less than one and one -half (1 -1/2) times the duct width. C. Provide turning vanes in all rectangular elbows and offsets. D. Job fabricated turning vanes, if used, shall be fabricated of the same gage and type of material as the duct in which they are installed. Vanes must be fabricated for same angle as duct offset. Submit Shop Drawings on factory fabricated and job fabricated turning vanes. E. All turning vanes shall be anchored to the cheeks of the elbow in such a way that the cheeks will not breathe at the surfaces where the vanes touch the cheeks. In most cases, this will necessitate the installation of an angle iron support on the outside of the cheek parallel to the line of the turning vanes. F. In 90- degree turns that are over 12 inches wide in the plane of the turn, provide and install double thickness vanes on integral side rails. For ducts under 12 inches in width, use single thickness vanes. The installation of the turning vanes shall be as described for single thickness vanes. On other types of turns or elbows, single thickness trailing edge vanes shall be used. 2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT 1. Not Used. B. Metal Flexible Duct: 1. Not Used. Ductwork 233100 -5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Cleanliness: 1. Before installing ductwork, wipe ductwork to a visibly clean condition. 2. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork and duct taps to prevent construction dust or contaminants from entering ductwork system. Seal ends of ductwork prior to installation to keep ductwork interior clean. Remove closures only for installation the the next duct section. 3. For ductwork supplying Clean Rooms, Operating Rooms and other Critical Care areas, sanitize ductwork with a biocidal agent EPA approved for HVAC systems immediately prior to sealing ductwork. 4. During duration of construction, maintain the integrity of all temporary closures until air systems are activated. D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers, controllers and other devices. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. Sleeve of pitot tube opening shall be no more than one inch long. Opening shall be one inch wide to accept pitot tube. Locate : ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. F. Slope underground ducts to plenums or low pump out points at 1:500. Provide access doors for inspection. G. Coat buried, metal ductwork without factory jacket with one coat and seams and joints with additional coat of asphalt base protective coating. H. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. I. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for cleanout. Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel for ducts where concealed. J. All visible welds in ductwork between biosafety cabinets, canopy hoods and fume hoods and the ceiling shall be ground and polished. K. Slope duct toward grilles for moisture -laden ducts. Provide drain and trap at elbow of main moisture exhaust duct system. L. Hangers and Supports: 1. All ductwork supports shall be in accordance with Table 4 -1 (rectangular duct) and Table 4 -2 (round duct) of the SMACNA Standards, with all supports directly anchored to the building structure. Ductwork 233100 -6 2. Rectangular duct shall have at least one pair of supports on minimum 8' -0" (eight feet) centers. All horizontal round and flat oval ducts shall have ducts hangers spaced 10' -0" (ten feet) maximum. 3. Lower attachment of hanger to duct shall be in accordance with Table 4 -4 of the SMACNA Standards. 4. Vertical ducts shall be supported where they pass through the floor lines with 1 -1/2 inch x 1 -1/2 inch x 1/4 inch angles for duct widths up to 60 inches. Above 60 inches in width, the angles must be increased in strength and sized on an individual basis considering space requirements. 5. Hanger straps on duct widths 60 inches and under shall lap under the duct a minimum of 1 inch and have minimum of one fastening screw on the bottom and two on the sides. 6. Hanger straps on duct widths over 60 inches shall be bolted to duct reinforcing with 3/8 inch bolts minimum. 3.02 DUCTWORK SYSTEM CLEANING A. If the system has been operated without scheduled filters or if the integrity of temporary closures has been compromised, Contractor shall have ductwork cleaned according to National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards by a Certified Regular Member of the NADCA. 1. For ductwork supplying Clean Rooms or patient care areas, also sanitize the ductwork interior per NADCA standards with a biocidal agent approved by the EPA for use in HVAC Systems. B. Before turning the installation over to the Owner, Contractor shall certify that the air handling systems have only been operated with scheduled filters in place. Otherwise, Contractor shall present evidence that the ductwork was cleaned as required above. 3.03 TESTING A. Ductwork systems 3 inch w.g. pressure classification and above (positive or negative) shall be pressure tested according to SMACNA test procedures (HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual). Notify Owner minimum seven (7) calendar days in advance of leakage testing. 1. Design pressure for testing ductwork shall be determined from the maximum pressure generated by the fan at the nominal motor horsepower selected. 2. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed 1 percent of the total system design airflow rate. 3. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. 4. Leaks identified during leakage testing shall be repaired by: a. Complete removal of the sealing materials. b. Thorough cleaning of the joint surfaces. c. Installation of multiple layers of sealing materials. The entire ductwork system shall be tested, excluding connections upstream of the terminal units (i.e. ductwork shall be capped immediately prior to the terminal units, and tested as described above). Ductwork 233100 -7 6. After testing has proven that ductwork is installed and performs as specified, the terminal units shall be connected to ductwork and connections sealed with extra care. Contractor shall inform the Owner when joints may be visually inspected for voids, splits, or improper sealing of the joints. If any leakage exists in the terminal unit connections /joints after the systems have been put into service, leaks shall be repaired as specified for other leaks. B. Ductwork systems 2 inch w.g. pressure classification and below (positive or negative) shall be inspected for visible and audible signs of leakage. 1. Leaks identified by inspection shall be repaired by: a. Complete removal of the sealing materials. b. Thorough cleaning of the joint surfaces. c. Installation of multiple layers of sealing materials. 2. Discrepancies found during testing and balancing between duct traverses and diffuser /grille readings shall result in re- inspection, repair and retest until discrepancies are eliminated. C. Ductwork leakage testing and /or inspection shall be performed prior to installation of external ductwork insulation. END OF SECTION 23 31 00 Ductwork 233100-8 SECTION 23 33 00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Perform all Work required to provide and install the following ductwork accessories indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation. 1. Airflow control dampers and spin -in fittings. 2. Flexible duct connections. 3. Duct access doors. 4. Screens 5. Duct test holes. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. AMCA 500D — Laboratory Method of Testing Dampers for Rating. 2. AMCA 500L — Laboratory Method of Testing Louvers for Rating. 3. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 5. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide product data for shop fabricated assemblies including, but not limited to, volume control dampers, duct access doors, and duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. Ductwork Accessories 23 33 00 -1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Dampers: 1. Ruskin 2. Greenheck. • 3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 4. Nailor Industries. B. Regulators, Locking Quadrants: 1. Ventfabrics. 2.03 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS A. Furnish and install dampers where shown on the Drawings and wherever necessary for complete control of airflow, including all supply, return, outside air, and exhaust branches, "division" in main supply, return and exhaust ducts, and each individual air supply outlet. Where access to dampers through a permanent suspended ceiling (gypsum board) is necessary, the Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of the access doors. B. Dampers larger than three (3) square feet, in area shall be controlled by, a self- locking splitter damper assembly. C. Volume dampers and other manual dampers shall be carefully fitted, and shall be manually controlled by damper regulators as follows: 1. On exposed uninsulated ductwork the locking quadrant shall be made with a base plate of 16 -gage cold - rolled steel and a heavy die cast handle designed with a 3/8 inch bearing surface. A 1/4 inch- 20 zinc plated wing nut shall firmly lock the handle in place. 2. On exposed externally insulated ductwork the regulator shall be 4 -1/4 inch diameter, for 1/2 inch rod, designed for use on duct with insulation thickness specified for duet, and shall have four (4) 3/16 inch holes provided to rivet or screw regulator to the duct surface. The flange that covers the raw edge of the insulation shall be high enough So that it slightly compresses the insulation and holds insulation in place. The handle shall be 3/8 inch above the flange, and shall easily turn without roughing up the insulation. D. Spin -in fittings may be used for duct taps to air devices and shall include dampers on all duct to air devices (diffusers and grilles) even though a volume damper is specified for the air device. Spin -in fittings shall be similar to Flexmaster FLD with B03 including a 2 inch buildout, nylon bushings, locking quadrant similar to Duro Dyne KR -3, and a 3/8 inch square rod connected to the damper with U- bolts. Spin -in fittings shall be sealed at the duct tap with sealant as specified herein. Determine location of spin -in fittings after terminal units are hung or, after location of light fixtures are confirmed to minimize flexible duct lengths and sharp bends. Ductwork Accessories 23 33 00 -2 2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Where ducts connect to fans, flexible connections shall be used. Flexible connections shall be made using "Flexmaster TL -M" or "Ventglas" fabric that is temperature- resistant, fire- resistant, waterproof, mildew - resistant and practically airtight, weighing approximately thirty ounces (30 oz.) per square yard. B. Material used outdoors shall be resistant to ultra- violet sunrays. There shall be a minimum of one -half inch (1/2 -inch) slack in the connections, and a minimum of two and one -half inches (2 -1/2 -inch) distance between the edges of the ducts. This does not apply to air handling units with internal isolation. 2.05 SCREENS A. Furnish and install screens on all duct, fan, etc., openings furnished by this Contractor which lead to, or are located outdoors. B. Screens shall be No. 16 gage, one -half inch (1/2 ") mesh in removable galvanized steel frame. C. Provide safety screens meeting OSHA requirements for protection of maintenance personnel on all fan inlets and fan outlets to which no ductwork is connected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. D. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhausts ducts where indicated. Install dampers so that they will open freely. E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Cover connections to medium and high pressure fans with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps. F. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after duct mounted filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch (450 x 450 mm) size for shoulder access, and as indicated. G. Provide duct test holes where indicated and where required for testing and balancing purposes. 1. Furnish and install Ventlok No. 699 instrument test holes in the return air duct and in the discharge duct of each fan unit. 2. Install test holes in locations as required to measure pressure drops across each item in the system, e.g., outside air louvers, filters, fans, coils, intermediate points in duct runs, etc. END OF SECTION 23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories 23 33 00 -3 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. " Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Perform all Work required to provide and install diffusers, diffuser boots, registers /grilles, louvers, louver penthouses, roof hoods, and goosenecks indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. 2. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 3. ARI 890 — Rating of Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies. 4. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. 5. SMACNA 1035 - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70. B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit product data and Shop Drawings, indicating type, size, location, application, noise level, finish, and type of mounting. 2. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data. Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00 - 1 B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 01. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and shall be provided with sponge rubber or soft felt gaskets. Grilles, slot diffusers and laminar flow bars shall not be internally insulated. If a manufacturer other than the one scheduled is used, the sizes shown on. the Drawings shall be checked for performance, noise level, face velocity, throw, pressure drop, etc., before the submittal is made. Selections shall meet the manufacturer's own published data for the above performance criteria. The throw shall be such that the velocity at the end of the throw in the five (5) foot occupancy zone will not exceed 50 fpm nor be less than 25 fpm except where indicated otherwise. Noise levels shall not exceed those published in ASHRAE for the type of space being served (NC level). In the vicinity of lab hoods, terminal velocity at face of hood shall exceed 20 fpm: C. Locations of air distribution devices on Drawings are approximate and shall be coordinated with other trades to make symmetrical patterns and shall be influenced by the established general pattern of the lighting fixtures or architectural reflected ceiling plan, but primarily located to maintain proper air distribution. Where' called for on Drawings, grilles, registers and diffusers shall be provided with deflecting devices and manual dampers. These grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be the standard product of the manufacturer, and subject to review by the Architect. D. Provide a frame compatible with the type of ceiling or wall in which the devices are installed. Refer to Architectural Drawings for exact type of ceiling specified. E. Coordinate color and finish of the devices with the Architect. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers: 1. Titus Products. 2 Krueger Manufacturing Company. 3. Price Industries. 4. Nailor Industries. B. Louvers: 1. Ruskin. 2. Greenheck. 3. American Warming and Ventilating. 2.03 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS /GRILLES Not Used Air Outlets and Inlets 23 3700 - 2 2.04 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS /GRILLES A. Steel, heavy duty 1/2 -inch spacing, 38 degree deflection. B. Fabricate one -inch margin frame with concealed mounting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, reflected ceiling plans, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. D. Install air outlets and inlets to ductwork with airtight connection. E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 09. G. Provide all specialties and frames for air distribution devices as required for proper installation in ceiling type as indicated on Architectural Drawings. END OF SECTION 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 00 - 3 SECTION 23 82 33 — ELECTRIC HEATERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Perform all Work required to provide and install the following electric duct heaters indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation. B. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following Work: 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal unit. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory- installed, by manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between electrically - operated terminal units and between terminal units and field - installed control devices. 3. Interlock wiring specified as factory- installed is Work of this Section. C. Provide the following as Work of this Section, complying with requirements of Division 26 Sections: 1. Control wiring between field - installed controls, indicating devices, and terminal unit control panels. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a specific edition date. B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to this Project. C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references: 1. ARI Standard 410 - Forced - Circulation Air - Cooling and Air - Heating Coils. 2. ASHRAE Standard 33 - Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, National Electrical Code. 4. ANSI/UL 883 - Safety Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan Heater Units. 5. ANSI/UL 1025 - Electric Air Heaters. ELECTRIC HEATERS 23 82 33 - I 6. ANSI / NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code for components and installation. 7. ANSI/UL 1096 - Electric Central Air Heating Equipment. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electric duct heaters, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Provide coil ratings in accordance with American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 410 "Forced- Circulation Air - Cooling and Air - Heating Coils ". 2. Test coils in accordance with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air- Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 33 "Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils ". 3. Provide electrical components for terminal units, which have been listed and labeled by UL. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1 Submit manufacturer's data for duct heaters " showing dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation instructions. B. Record Documents: 1. Manufacturers wiring diagrams detailing electrical connection to duct heaters for wiring for power, signal, and control systems, differentiating clearly between manufacturer - installed wiring and field- installed wiring. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the Project Site under provisions of Division 01 and Division 20. B. Accept products at the Project Site in factory- fabricated protective containers or coverings, with factory- installed shipping skids. Inspect for damage. C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. "` Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. D. Check and maintain equipment on a monthly basis to ensure that equipment is being stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practices. Storage records shall be maintained that indicate these requirements have been met. FART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. ELECTRIC HEATERS 23 82 33 - 2 B. Electric Unit Heaters Provide suspended electric unit heaters and arrange for discharge of air as indicated. Provide electric unit heaters with not less than the indicated capacity and conform to requirements specified herein. Ensure electric unit heaters arefactory prewired, ready for field terminal connections. Construct casings with smoothly contoured propeller orifice rings of not less than 1.0 millimeter 20 -gage cold- rolled carbon steel. Provide casing surface finish with phosphate pretreatment, prime coating, and baked - enamel finish. Provide horizontal units with adjustable single- or double- deflection louvers. Construct heating element of a resistance wire insulated by highly compacted refractory insulation protected by a sealed metallic- finned sheath. Component materials are as follows: a. Provide resistance wire not less than 20 -helix wound alloy approximately 80- percent nickel and 20- percent chromium. b. Provide refractory insulation of magnesium oxide with a resistance of not less than 50,000 - ohms after exposure to an ambient temperature and humidity of 32 degrees C 90 degrees F and 85 plus or minus 5- percent relative humidity, respectively, for not less than 24 hours. c. Provide sheathing consisting of aluminum fins cast around an internal steel sheath containing refractory insulation and resistance wire or carbon -steel fins permanently attached to a tubular carbon -steel sheath containing refractory insulation and resistance wire and with external surfaces porcelainized. Fit units up to and including 5 kilowatts with integral controls including thermal overload cutout switches, necessary transformers, liquid -vapor system, and low -mass bimetal thermostat as required. Provide automatically resettable cutout switch. Provide wall- mounted thermostats complete with thermometer, mechanical high -limit stop, calibrated operator, and an adjustable heater to effect anticipation and to prevent override of space temperature with a range between 12 and 41 degrees C 55 and 105 degrees F and a differential not exceeding 1 degrees C 1.5 degrees F. Provide thermostat rated for operation at 24 volts, 60 hertz. Provide transformers, wiring, and devices necessary to meet this requirement. Finish cases in brushed or satin chrome. Provide propellers with all- aluminum blades statically and dynamically balanced to within 0.5 percent. Provide units with fan -inlet safety guards. AMCA certify propellers and motors for air performance and noise level. Protect motors against damage by the heating element and resilient mount. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Markel Products Co. B. Chromalox. C. Indeeco. D. Nailor Industries, Inc. ELECTRIC HEATERS 23 82 33 - 3 E. Trane Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction. B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations. C. Inspect, areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer. D. Do not operate electric heaters for any purpose until ductwork is clean of any possible debris. E. Maintain minimum working clearances around the heater electrical panel in accordance with NEC Article 110. F. After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit's exposed surfaces and vacuum clean electric duct heaters and inside., of cabinets. G. Touch up scratches and marks from handling and placement of equipment with masking enamel to match manufacturer's color. Refer to Division 09 for Site - applied finishes. END OF SECTION 23 82 33 ELECTRIC HEATERS 238233 -4 SECTION 311100 TRENCH SAFETY PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. SUMMARY This section specifies requirements for the safety systems to be used in all excavation activities, including but not limited to storm, water, sewer and electrical trench and structure excavation, and excavation for grading. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. RELATED SECTIONS Division 33, Site Utilities. 1.2 REFERENCES RCW. Chapter 49.17 WISHA. WAC 296 -155 Safety Standards for Construction Work. WAC 296 -155 -660. RCW Chapter 39.04.180 Public Works/Trench Excavations - Safety Systems Required. 1.3 DEFINITIONS All construction work shall be performed in accordance with the latest edition of the "Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction" prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the American Public Works Association as adopted by the City. All items in the Standard Specifications relating to payment, change orders claims, time and the like are not applicable to this contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEMS A. Protect all excavation in excess of 4 feet in depth with a safety system conforming to the referenced requirements. B. The Contractor's excavation safety system shall be designed by a qualified person and meet the referenced requirements. C. All excavation not requiring trench safety systems shall also meet the WISHA safety standards and the requirements of Division 31 and 33. D. The Contractor is solely responsible for all safety plans, methods, materials and processes. END OF SECTION 311100 - 1 Trench Safety SECTION 312000 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification. Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Excavation, Filling Grading and Compaction. 2. Bases for slabs -on- grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section "Trench Safety" for Trench Safety during construction. 2. Division 33 Section "Site Utilities" for utilities & trenching, bedding & backfill. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in either length or width. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. 312000 - 1 Earthwork F. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late - model, track - mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42 -inch- (1065 -mm -) wide, short- tip- radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 120 -hp (89 -kW) flywheel power with bucket - curling force of not less than 25,000 lbf (111 kN) and stick -crowd force of not less than 18,700 lbf (83 kN); measured according to SAE J -1 179. 2 Bulk Excavation: Late - model, track- mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp (157 - kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 45,000 -lbf (200 -kN) breakout force; measured according to SAE J -732. G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows /50 mm). H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man -made stationary features constructed above or below the ground sur=face. I. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. K Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. L. Standard. Specifications: Reference in this section to the Standard Specifications shall mean the latest edition of the "Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction" prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the American Public Works Association as adopted by the City. All construction work shall be performed in accordance with the latest edition of the Standard Specifications. All items in the Standard Specifications relating to payment, change orders claims, time and the like are not applicable to this contract. 1.4 SUBMITTALS, Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 312000 - 2 Earthwork 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving adjacent facilities unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility- locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. C. Barricade open excavations and post warning lights and other devices as required by applicable codes and laws. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. Protect structures, utilities, pavements, existing vegetation, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations from damages caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, wash -out, and other hazards. D. Existing site conditions & drawings: Prior to submitting a bid, the Contractor shall examine the existing conditions of the site and shall submit in writing, prior to submitting his or her bid, to the Architect any concerns or discrepancies of existing site to conditions indicated on plans. Submittal of a bid shall indicate acceptance that the representation of the existing conditions on the bid drawings are acceptable to the contractor and no claim shall be made regarding any discrepancy. E. Contractor, by submitting a bid, acknowledges that this geographical region experiences an extensive rainy season. Contractor acknowledges that it is experienced with working on and accomplishing similar projects during this rainy season and has prepared its bid taking the impacts of the rainy season on the progress of the work into full consideration. Accordingly, neither the Architect nor the Owner will authorize additional costs or extensions of time to the contract unless the job site experiences a twenty-five (25) year (or greater) storm event, in which case adjustments to the contract amount or time may be allowed, depending on the particular facts and circumstances at that time, as determined by the Architect. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. 312000 - 3 Earthwork 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase: In compliance, with 9 -03.10 of the Standard Specifications or as indicated on the drawings. F. Base: In compliance with 9- 03.9(3) of the Standard Specifications or as indicated on the drawings. G. Engineered Fill: In compliance with 9-03.14(1) of the Standard Specifications. H. Bedding: In compliance with 9-03.12(3) of the Standard'. Specifications. I. Crushed Stone: As indicated on the drawings, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils .against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective.insulating materials as, necessary: Provide erosion - control, measures =to =prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkway as required to prevent erosion or runoff, regardless if shown on the drawings or not. Ground Surface Within Building, Pavement, and Landscape Development Areas: Stripped of vegetation, soils containing organic material, and unacceptable surface soils. Remove above and below grade improvements notrequired to remain. 1. Remove roots 0.5 inch diameter and larger. A. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation; 1. Reroute surface water ',runoff 'away from excavated areas. Do not . allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system;; to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. If necessary, provide baker tank for temporary storage at no additional cost. 3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL 312000 - 4 Earthwork A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials at no additional cost. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES (See division 33 Site Utilities) 3.5 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. Do not compact subgrade under areas to receive porous paving sections. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Proof roll subgrade in the presence of the Owner's representative with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.6 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. Filling of unauthorized excavations will be at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.7 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 2. Removing concrete formwork. 3. Removing trash and debris. 4. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 5. As built and photo documentation of the installed rain and footing drain lines. 3.8 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL (see Division 33, Site Utilities) 312000 - 5 Earthwork 3.9 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Spread in layers, scarify, disc and harrow and air -dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight until optimum moisture content is obtained. See paragraph 1.5 F above. 3.10 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 to 10 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1 Under structures, °building slabs, steps, walks, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent. 3.11 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from building pad and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10 -foot (3 -m) straightedge. 312000 - 6 Earthwork 3.12 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE A. Drainage Piping: Drainage pipe is specified in Division 33 Section "Site Utilities." 3.13 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Place base course material over subbase in depths indicated on the drawings 2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a single layer. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality- control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. If any of the areas tested fail to meet specifications in any way, they shall be excavated and re- filled and compacted as directed by the Architect at no additional expense to the Owner. The area in question shall then be retested by the Owner's testing lab or Soils Engineer and the cost of this retest shall be paid for by the Contractor, either by direct payment or by change order. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Cover, straw or seed any area left exposed to weather or as required by the City, at no additional expense to the Owner. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances, at no additional cost to the Owner, where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to contractor's subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing at no additional cost to the Owner if, in the Architect's opinion, the settlement is due to improper installation on the Contractor's part. 312000 - 7 Earthwork 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.16 TIMING AND DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Timing and Disposal: All of the existing material not reusable on the site shall be transported off site at no additional cost to the Owner. Remove waste material, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property at no additional cost. END OF SECTION 312000 - 8 Earthwork SECTION 334100 SITE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General: A. Related Documents: The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions shall apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Description of Work: The work of this Section shall include all labor, materials and equipment required to complete the Site Utilities work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. C. Work Included: The work of this Section shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Trenching, bedding and backfilling for utilities, roof and footing drains and storm; 2. Storm system drain lines, roof drains, catch basins, grates and frames; 3. Sanitary lines and systems 3. Electrical conduits, feeders and handholes, installed by licensed electrical contractor, Utility coordination. 4. Irrigation line supply lines in and out of the building. D. Quality Assurance: 1. Specifications: References in these Specifications to the "Standard Specifications" shall mean the current Standard Specifications for Roads, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the American Public Works Association as adopted by the City. All construction work shall be performed in accordance with the latest edition of the Standard Specifications. All items in the Standard Specifications relating to payment, change orders claims, time and the like are not applicable to this contract. E. Submittals: Submit four (4) copies of manufacturer's data on all required piping and conduit materials prior to start of construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 General: A. All materials shall be delivered in sound condition. Care should be taken to protect any exterior coatings and linings during all phases of the work. Place no material of any kind inside any piece of pipe or fitting during handling, storage or transit. Materials shall be stored in a protected area. B. Any damaged item shall be repaired, as directed, if in the opinion of the Architect can be made; otherwise, the damaged section shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 334100 -1 Site Utilities C. All conduit systems shall be constructed from the materials shown and to the lines, grades and dimensions shown. Where not shown, the conduits shall be located to avoid interference with other features or utilities. D. Storm Drainage system: All methods and materials shall meet City Standards and the current "King County Surface Water Manual Design Manual ", unless otherwise approved, and as indicated on the drawings. If in conflict, the City standards and requirements shall apply. 2.2 Materials: A. Trenching & Backfilling: 1. Bedding Material: Shall be clean sand/gravel mixture free from organic matter and conforming to Section 9- 03.12(3) of the Standard Specifications. 2° Trench Backfill: a. Trench Backfill: Shall be naturally occurring or screened gravel, essentially free from various types of wood waste or other extraneous or objectionable materials conforming to Section 9 -03.19 of the Standard Specifications. b. Material shall be obtained from required excavations or other Contractor furnished sources approved by the Architect. B. Storm Drainage system: Provide catch basins as shown on`drawings. All piping to be as noted on the drawings or as allowed by the City, the King County Surface Water Manual, whichever is more stringent, or approved equal. C Electrical: NEC rated conduits as indicated on the drawings or assallowed by the NEC (National Electrical Code). Sanitary: As indicated on the drawings or as-allowed by the City. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 General: A. Coordination: Coordinate all utility installation and connections with appropriate utility companies and the City. Patching of street crossings, sidewalks, curbs and gutters, asphalt or concrete shall be in accordance with the Standard Specificationsand City Standard Plans. B. All utility conduit or piping and fittings shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, the drawings, these specifications, and'in the best commercial trade practice. Any special tools required for laying, jointing, cutting, etc., shall be supplied and properly used. All pipe or conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying and shall be kept clean until accepted in the completed work and when laid, shall conform accurately to the lines and grades given.` At all times' during' pipe or conduit laying operations, the trench shall°be kept free of water: C. All electrical conduit and handholes shall be installed by a licensed electrician and in strict accordance with the NEC, the drawings, these specifications, and in the best commercial trade practice. Any special tools required for laying, jointing, cutting, etc., shall be supplied and properly used. All pipe or conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned before laying and shall be kept clean until accepted in the completed work and when laid, 334100 -2 Site Utilities shall conform accurately to the lines and grades given. At all times during pipe or conduit laying operations, the trench shall be kept free of water. D. In case defects are revealed by inspection, the Contractor shall replace the defective pieces and shall bear the expense. E. Compaction: References in these specifications to specific percentage values for required compaction of soils are a percentage of the maximum dry density as defined and determined by the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), Designation D- 1557. The Owner will engage the services of an approved testing laboratory to verify that the compaction density percentages specified herein have been achieved. 3. 2 Trench Excavation: A. All trench excavation work shall be in strict accordance with Division 31, Earthwork and Trench Safety, and as follows. B. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. a. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line of 18" if no other grades are indicated. b. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated i. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit. ii. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.3 Trench Backfill: A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings;.fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. C. Provide 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) thick, concrete -base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 334100 -3 Site Utilities 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fi11 voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. H. Revise tape depths to suit office practice. I. Trenches shall not be backfilled until measurements have been made for the as- builts. 3.4 Site Restoration: Upon completion of all work the site shall be cleaned up and restored to a condition equal to or better, than that existing prior to start. All debris shall be removed and disturbed earth shall be compacted. 3.5 As- Builts: Contractor shall provide one set of accurate red lined drawings indicating as-built condition of all of the work. Said as- builts shall be delivered to the City prior to 100% pay application. - END OF SECTION 334100 -4 Site Utilities APPENDIX B PROJECT DRAWINGS The following list comprise the Project Drawings: SITE PLAN A -100 ENLARGED SITE PLAN A -101 RESTROOM PLANS A -102 PICNIC SHELTER PLANS A -103 RESTROOM ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS A -201 RESTROOM INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A -202 PICNIC SHELTER ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS A -203 ADA DETAILS A -501 DETAILS A -502 DETAILS A -503 STRUCTURAL NOTES G -101 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES, NOTES AND DETAILS M -100 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLANS M -102 MECHANICAL DETAILS M -201 RESTROOM BUILDING ELECTRICAL PLAN E -100 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4-15 Page 55 RFB # 15 -012 2015 APPENDIX C PREVAILING WAGE RATES Benefit Code Key for 12/9/2015 King ■ Journey Leve{ $52.82 Brick Mason King Brick Mason Pointer - Caulker - Cleaner $52.82 5A 1M King Car enters Acoustical Worker $54 King Carpenters Bridge, Dock And Wharf Carpenters $54.02 5D 4C nters King Carpenters . Carpenters on Stationary Tools $54.15 5D 4C King` Carpenters Creosoted Materia{ King Carpenters Floor Finisher $54.02 5D 4C King ' Carpenters... Floor; Layer King Carpenters Scaffold Erector $54.02 5D 4C King; Cement'Masons ` Journey "L eve l King Drywall Applicator Journey Level $54.02 5D 1H King r a {{ Tapers Journey 'Levet King Electrical Fixture Maintenance Journey Level $26.59 5L 1E Workers Ki de , Cable5pl ice King Electricians - Inside Cable Splicer (tunnel) $71.67 7C 4E Kin J "e; g ,j Electricians :inside , r. Certified `Welder King Electricians - Inside Certified Welder (tunnel) $69.22 7C 4E King'r . ° r a is z ='lri ae ; Cc nstructic r to f erson' King Electricians - Inside Journey Level $62.30 7C 4E � v unret� e � � °� s King Electricians - Motor Shop Craftsman $15.37 1 Ki 4Moto Shop ou ne °l:ey C 1 a King Electronic Technicians Journey Level $31..00 1 W 7• King Flaggers Journey Level $37.26 7A 31 - ....., King Heating Equipment Mechanics Journey Level $72.83 7F 1 E Kra iers & M son Te ers .laur`rtie Leuet 5 3 ; 7A m : ,r, King Insulation Applicators Journey Level $54.02 5D 4C lronwor ers ¢ ., _ King Laborers Air, Gas Or Electric Vibrating Screed $43.95 7A 31 in Laborers Airtrac Drift Operator $45 King Laborers Ballast Regular Machine $43.95 7A 31 King ° . ,F Laborers Batch Weighntan ZA° King Laborers Brick Pavers $43.95 7A 31 King ': Laborers Brush Cutter: $43.95' City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 56 RFB # 15 -012 2015 King Laborers King Laborers King Laborers King Laborers King Laborers King Laborers King . Laborers Kin King Laborers Brush Hog Feeder Burner Caisson Worker :arpenter Tender Caulker Cement Dumper - paving Cement Finisher Tender revs hinge House 4r Dry Shack Chipping Gun (under 30 Lbs.) 30 L $43.95 $43.95 $45.32 43.95 $43.95 $44.76 $43.95 43.95 $43.95 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 7A 31 31 31 31 31 31 ( 31 King King King orers Laborers Noncrete Form "Stripper >$43.9! Concrete Placement Crew $44.76 7A 31 oncrete h. Operatorf care 7A Laborers Crusher Feeder $37.26 7A Demolition: Wrecking & Moving (incl. Charred Material) 31 3i 31 31 31 31 ( 31 31 31 31 ( 31 31 31 453 King Laborers City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Hazardous Waste Worker (level B) $44.76 7A Page 57 31 RFB # 15 -012 2015 King Laborers King Laborers King Laborers Laborers King, Labore acktammer Laserbeam Operator $44.76 aintenance Person $43.95 Manhole Builder - mudman $44.76 and Person 7A 31 7A 7A 31 31 ema lconcret Cutter When: last; later bore Tamper Et Similar Electric, Air a Gas Operated Tools King Laborers Timber Person - Sewer (lagger, Shorer a Cribber) King Laborers Labor`oi 31 olroom Person (at Jobsite)" $43.95 Topper $43.95 rack Laborer $43.95 7 7A 7i 31 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 58 RFB # 15 -012 2015 King King King Laborers Track Liner (power) $44.76 Laborers Traffic Control Laborer $39.84 7A 7A, 31 31 Laborers Traffic Control Supervisor $39.84 7A 31 8R King Laborers Truck - Spotter $43.95 7A 31 King Laborers Tugger Operator $44.76 7A 31 King King Laborers Laborers Tunnel Work - Compressed Mr Worker 0-30 psi Tunnel Work- Compressed Air Worker 30.01 -44.00 psi $74.29 $79.32 83.00 King Laborers Tunnel Work - Compressed Air Worker 54.01 -60.00 psi $88.70 7A 31 7A 31 King Laborers Tunnel Work - Compressed Air Worker 64.01 -68.00 psi $95.92 7A 31 King Laborers Tunnel Work- Compressed Air Worker 70.01 -72.00 psi $99.82 7A 31 King Laborers Tunnel Work -Guage and Lock Tender $45.42 7A 31 xor King Laborers Vibrator $44.76 7A 31 0 King Laborers Watchman $33.86 7A 31 King Laborers Well Point Laborer $44.76 7A 31 fe King King Laborers - Underground Sewer a Water de round S w Painters General Laborer 8 Topman $43.95 7A 31 Journey Level $37.80 6Z 2B King King PLu aloe:- - , Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Plant Operators $56.94 7A 3C 8P e King King Power Equipment Operators Power Equipment Operators Barrier Machine (zipper) Bobcat $56.44 7A 3C 8P $53.57 7A 3C 8P ower£qutpricent Operators, 8P King Power Equipment Operators Brooms $53.57 7A 3C Kin Power utter King Power Equipment Operators Cableways $56.94 7A 3C 8P Kin" owe rEquipmet ttiODe ail King Power Equipment Operators Compressor $53.57 7A 3C 8P City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 59 RFB # 15 -012 2015 King wer Equipment: Operators King King Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Over. 42M Power Equipment Operators Concrete Finish Machine -laser Screed Power Equipment Operators King Power Equipment Operators $53.57 7A Concrete Pump - Mounted Or Trailer High Pressure Line ump, Pump,High Pressure. $56.00 7A, 3C 8P 3C 8P 3C 8P Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Up To 42m $56.44 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Cranes Friction: 200 tons and over $58.67 8P Kin+ Equipment tperat King Power Equipment Operators ns Cranes: 100 Tons Through 199 Tons, Or 150' Of Boom (Including Jib With Attachments) Kin perato°r tons- 249 to $57.51 7A 3C 8P King atta Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 300 tons and over or 300' of boom including jib with attachments $58.67 7A 3C 8P :E uii Men tOperat nes- X45 T ns Power Equipment Operators Cranes: A -frame - 10 Tons And Under $53.57 8P King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Through 19 Tons With Attachments A -frame Over 10 Tons King tit $56.00 7A 3C 8P Power Equipment Operators Deck Engineer /deck Winches (power) Power Equipment Operators Dozers D -9 £r Under $56.44 7A 3C 8P Power Equipment Operators pera Drilling Machine Power Equipment Operators vatortA man n Finishing Machine, Bidwell And Gamaco Et Similar Equipment King Power Equipment Operators City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs. With Attachments $53.57 3C 8P Page 60 RFB # 15 -012 2015 King Power Equipment Operators Grade Engineer: Using Blue Prints, Cut Sheets, Etc $56.44 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Gradechecker /stakeman $53.57 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Guardrail Punch $56.44 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Hard Tail End Dump Articulating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. it Over $56.94 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment,Operators ' Hard Tait End Dump $56.44 ` 7A 3C 8P Articulating tOff road Equipment l.inder`45 Yards King Power Equipment Operators Horizontal /directional Drill Locator $56.00 7A 3C 8P King` Power gu ment Operators Hori ontalldirectttsnal Droll Operator $56X44 3 King Power Equipment Operators Hydralifts /boom Trucks Over 10 Tons $56.00 7A 3C 8P King j Pawelr Eq iipment Onerators ' lydratrf " /boom Trucks, i:0 Tons►►dJrder 7 x $53 7 7A n 3C 8P _ w. = King Power Equipment Operators Loader, Overhead 8 Yards. Et Over $57.51 7A 3C 8P Kiiitg POwer`Equtpment'Operators u Loader, Overh ad, 6 Yards t nett ding 8 }ad's.... $56.94 7A !¢ 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Loaders, Overhead Under 6 Yards $56.44 7A 3C 8P t tng, Po re Egad 't Operators ade�rs, King Power Equipment Operators Loaders: Elevating Type Belt $56.00 7A 3C 8P ,�� uipent Opgrtor = LtO i�c�ti�s ►' ell ��� � � � �7A � ��� �3C8P �} °�� ; King Power Equipment Operators Material Transfer Device $56.44 7A 3C 8P g P er�bipme n�es FY'i wSQ e eC eCflitt $a King Power Equipment Operators Motor Patrol Graders $56.94 7A 3C 8P Kit i Power "Erg me t Operators Mt4 k �n ng Mach n Y,l t4 RX. p H ader And /or ;.. r5 King Power Equipment Operators Oil Distributors, Blower Distribution a Mulch Seeding Operator $53.57 7A 3C 8P I f erg ement bra it C7utst g ' o v at Aped 56 7A �3C � 8P King Power Equipment Operators Overhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons $56.44 7A 3C 8P K r Power Ei uipmer t 0 — g ype IOD e s Any ef e $5 .51 7A 3C, King Power Equipment Operators Overhead, Bridge Type: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons $56.94 7A 3C 8P Ktrig`` Power ° "Equipmer f Operators Pavenien breaker King Power Equipment Operators Pile Driver (other Than Crane Mount) $56.44 7A 3C 8P King! Power Equipment Operators Plant -Oiler -! Asphalt, Crustier 9$56,O0 King Power Equipment Operators Posthole Digger, Mechanical $53.57 7A 3C 8P King ' Pbwer=Eq ipmer tzO e ti r Power Plant King Power Equipment Operators Pumps - Water $53.57 7A 3C 8P City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 61 RFB # 15 -012 2015 King Power,Equipment Operators Quad 9,`Hd 41, 010 And Over $56.94 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Quick Tower - No Cab, Under 100 Feet In Height Based To Boom $53.57 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators ' Remote Control Operator On Rubber Tired Earth Moving Equipment $56.94. 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Rigger And Bellman $53.57 7A 3C 8P King m Power Equipment.Operators °: Rigger /Signal Person, Beltman (Certified) '$56 00 7A 3C 8P° King Power Equipment Operators Rollagon $56.94 7A 3C 8P Ki`n Power,E utpment Operators Roller, Other "Than = =Plant King Power Equipment Operators Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi -lift Materials $56.00 7A 3C 8P Kings P6ri +fir {Ec inpment;Operator Ri cci= `mill; Foto grinder 56 44 .7A. C . 4 BPxj" King Power Equipment Operators Saws - Concrete $56.00 7A 3C 8P King E b er EgII men t Operators Scra per, Setf Pro Under 45 a a6 44 7 r 30 o f King Power Equipment Operators Scrapers - Concrete a Carry All $56.00 7A 3C 8P King Power.Equipni nt Operators` 4 Scrapers, `Seth • propefted` ards And t . King Power Equipment Operators Service Engineers - Equipment $56.00 7A 3C 8P i MAN l iftg + I bw ip el t$ Operators ° � 'mo `• { d. Shotc ete /gunii e;,EquipFp nt $53 57 7A 3C ; u 8P,* King Power Equipment Operators Shovel , Excavator, Backhoe, Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons. $56.00 7A 3C 8P King' Pciwer Etlgi entyOperators :,Shovel, Excavator, B c e* Over 39 Metric Tons TOE >50 Metric $56 , King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes, Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons $56.44 7A 3C 8P R�gigmertper a rs " Shoet, 1Cvatiarcoes +fiver `�l}�!V►t('�G Ts�,�To g� on .a Metrl Tons �� � � & � " � � � tra King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over 90 Metric Tons $58.10 7A 3C 8P kCB .(rytNM- art q:F i'P<`c' k` Porker u� •ent p etors , t - Stipforrr� l* r r µ 51r.9 7A °c p King Power Equipment Operators Spreader, Topsider a Screedman $56.94 7A 3C 8P K .. er uapmer tperatars a +t � Yon 'r.+9 iii 5 ]b rader Trtr ner � 5 44 �A.? King Power Equipment Operators Tower Bucket Elevators $56.00 7A 3C 8P ®L1 ■ e O e!ai�3 g Height 3 King Power Equipment Operators Tower Crane: over 175' through 250' in height, base to boom $58.10 7A 3C 8P Povve? Eq ipment Operators Tower Cranes: Yover;250' 'in - heiglt°from <base to boom $58.67 King Power Equipment Operators Transporters, All Track Or Truck Type $56.94 7A 3C 8P King! Power EQuiptnent Operators Trenching Machines $56.00. 7A. ' 3Cm 8P: King Power Equipment Operators Truck Crane Oiler /driver - 100 $56.44 7A 3C 8P City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 62 RFB # 15 -012 2015 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 63 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Tons And Over King Power Equipment Operators Truck Crane Oiter /driver Under 100 Tons $56.00 7A 3 . 8P King Power Equipment Operators Truck Mount Portable Conveyor $56.44 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Welder $56.94 7A _ 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators Wheel Tractors, Farman Type $53.57 7A 3C 8P King; Power Equipment Operators :` ; Yo Yo Pay Dozer $56.44 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators- Asphalt Plant Operators $56.94 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer 8 Water King= P� a Assistant Engineer X53.57 7A3C BP rq - r t1Te Water" King Power Equipment Operators- Barrier Machine (zipper) $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer 8 Water King k A rP Po: e pmeiit O a ereto s sqT Batch Plant Operator, Concrete ,' $56 44 7A : 3C 8P k 'qo t1nnderrcun er Water King Power Equipment Operators- Bobcat $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Powe Equipment Operators -! Brokk Remote Demotition . , Equipment,; $53.57 7A 3C e 8P ' tTrnde round''Sew& Sty Yater rv" King Power Equipment Operators- Brooms $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Kin e extos Bump Cutter e$56 44 7Ax" 3C8 King Power Equipment Operators- Cableways $56.94 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water R'' r$ Chipper $56 4;4 7A rt 3C M rc. x , Uri f iuntl Sewe ate r' King Power Equipment Operators- Compressor $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water ng„ 1 a4 x;41 Oar £ ®� `c t O rators • trs� . �y. L 4 Concrete ��{ t BBoom King Power Equipment Operators- Concrete Finish Machine -laser Screed $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer 0 Water KIvt . a -.1 icr � 'ur a i1 ter i n rs Qt3 7A i� k Y d ,fir King Power Equipment Operators - Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Up To 42m $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water or U� C veyors _ � � X56 0O 7A King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes Friction: 200 tons and over $58.67 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water n , torte - Cranes 20,TOns Through Tons:With Attachments rier "ar5 mater $ King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 100 Tons Through 199 Tons, Or 150' Of Boom (Including Jib With Attachments) $57.51 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water Power qutirnent' 0 ators Cranes 200 torts 299 tons, or 250'. of ,bootrr tnctu,diri #$58 10 7A' e 3C 8P U deNBicfu€nd er a er..` City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 63 RFB # 15 -012 2015 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 64 RFB # 15 -012 2015 with attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 300 tons and over or 300' of boom including jib with attachments $58.67 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators - . Cranes: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons, Under 150' Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments) $56.94 7A 3C 8P' Underground Sewer Et. Water King Power Equipment Operators - Cranes: A -frame - 10 Tons And Under $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Ki es Frietion cranes through 9;mtons r! lTrciergrflu eer€iWater. t k King Power Equipment Operators - Cranes: Through 19 Tons With Attachments A -frame Over 10 Tons $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King- t?i er Etluipn,ent 31 era'tur Crusf e d $56 44 7A 3C 8P . U erriur;d Sewed iWateiw r King Power Equipment Operators- Deck Engineer /deck Winches (power) $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King~ .: Power Ed ibnienttOl rators Derncks, On Building Work $56.94 Underground Sewer `a Water`° King Power Equipment Operators - Dozers D -9 a Under $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water Kingk 6 l o ehEquip%e t t t ra ` D tl O • ers.;Au e Type, Truck Or�C�rd%l8 Otyn� "$56 &Obi' rw�•� � i{�s King Power Equipment Operators- Drilling Machine $57.51 7A 3C • 8P Underground Sewer a Water King.' P r t�' o a,=,; Ele�vato And l an -lift Peen arientvAn$d Shaft Type $53.57 ' :7A 3C 8i x ndergrou ewer =< air King Power Equipment Operators- Finishing Machine, Bidwell And Gamaco a Similar Equipment $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water - ni Ovr ,$ bbO r YA 3J, t King Power Equipment Operators- Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs. Attachments $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Kin f S i'� 01 " tc� � .l..i 4� fWith *e$° ® �e singyBiu *aa$5�4 . � yr C King Power Equipment Operators- Gradechecker /stakeman $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King Power Equipment Operators- Hard Tait End Dump Articulating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. a Over $56.94 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer & Water Ktr gw r w� i nd dump tting;tiff ro il 1pmeifl Ur der 45 `ands $ 6t44 7A x BPr, Unrgreurs Wafer King Power Equipment Operators - Horizontal /directional Drill Locator $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King po E t if er ii � to s } Ff rizontal /directional Drill n $56.44 7A 3C 8P inrergroarfd e a ter ' Operator King Power Equipment Operators- Hydralifts /boom Trucks Over 10 Tons $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 64 RFB # 15 -012 2015 King Power Equipment Operators - "" Hydralifts /boom Trucks, 10 Tons And Under $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Loader, Overhead 8 Yards. a Over $57.51 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer a Water King, Power Equipment Operators- , Loader, Overhead ,,6 Yards. But Not Including 8 Yards $56.94 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Y. King Power Equipment Operators- Loaders, Overhead Under 6 Yards $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Power.Equft me`nt O iei "i to srt Loaders, Plant Feel $56.44 7A 3C 8P x` ! nder ground r King Power Equipment Operators - Loaders: Elevating Type Belt $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer It Water King, Po' oCttphient tutors Lbcomotwe ,All , $56 44 7A C 8P Under -ground uS'e> King Power Equipment Operators- Material Transfer Device $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Powe n ail eadmen - .$57.51 7A C 8P Un'derRroundA Sewei dater w 5 fl Per Hvur Over Mecharnc) King Power Equipment Operators- Motor Patrol Graders $56.94 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Pa r_Et u t rneriwt teC Nll k"e Mach�r e, Mole i r t Bo ing,, Roads e le F $56.94 7A 3C f 8P ,° Under round Se e �� King Power Equipment Operators- Oil Distributors, Blower Distribution Et Mulch Seeding Operator $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water erin, King A # ee z i Pd tei Bduipr er(t i r + x=_ e �i F sts { 1= ato And {��i�� $` py y §5r � $ 6:00 7 3C BP Un ridrer�:]a King Power Equipment Operators- Overhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water conga ` � e iir�� Po�tz�y �ea��y Ty �IO } 557.51 7A 3C 8P � f ��uf King Power Equipment Operators- Overhead, Bridge Type: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons $56.94 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer it Water King Pt " iuiprnent ?berators d Pavement BXe ker' $53 57 7A ° 3C r 8P King Power Equipment Operators- Pile Driver (other Than Crane Mount) $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer £t Water - Pay v '. uder'zu� v( w •} Pt s; r `i' 6 tl "X3 re'-, .die f $554) k i y , {@ 7A a r.} X30 Y i e King Power Equipment Operators- Posthote Digger, Mechanical $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer it Water King; Pa erg nt k = Und� . G M• fi� M `t er Piit' x$3.57 1r rs fi"F x xi E e .. °k ^ y} ., i r r .. 4 3� $. _ , x., 'tilt 8P y-,k �44rs:;k King Power Equipment Operators- Pumps - Water $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Powe Li i ®m ®` Qc a►ds 4, t#d 41, D10 And Over r ' $56.94 7A 3C 8P ' r.. Unclergroulii°g r.• air King Power Equipment Operators- Quick Tower - No Cab, Under 100 Feet In Height Based To Boom $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Kin Pewee Equipment Op i ers Remote on l { "e t ti er d a'rt Moving P Underground e r at r h City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 65 RFB # 15 -012 2015 City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 66 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Equipment .a King Power Equipment Operators- Rigger And Bellman $53.57 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Rigger /Signal Person, Bellman (Certified) $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators - Rollagon $56.94 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Kin Power -. Equipment Operators= aPla Rotlor, Other Than,nt. Mix '` $53.57 7A 3C ` 8P Underground ,Sewer & Water .. King Power Equipment Operators- Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi -lift Materials $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water K1ng P o w e r Equipment O p e r o t u i to. ` It of 3 gr ri er = _ b $ 644 7A 3i $ x Un e :rou Sealer £tyWa e King Power Equipment Operators- Saws - Concrete $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer &t Water King ' m Po ver quipnten a for e S r p elf Rrtl It d tJlider a • s �£ nd � . _ vYr-. .,m `�baFae xx�, JA Ci $56 14 y 7A 3C "" ABP s•�e�.`„i Underground'Se er Wate i,.r< <.. t t w. King .. n_.§ Power Equipment Operators- Scrapers - Concrete Et Carry All .: $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water King. �! Po t' pm err' O ratty 5c , Y;a±� ®R 7A' i i C 8F Linder r�ou d o ei a e King Power Equipment Operators- Service Engineers - Equipment $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Kin ► wer4Equ ®r toi St a ef fie ' er � Y ' tlnderrgrotd Sewe a King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel , Excavator, Backhoe, Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons. $56.00 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer &t Water Ktgg _ .ir,4 Power ,Eui den 0 e «v- votor acc e rie Tq #M5 -••. N`'n^4 �n'4'u "A s�d�:iw#;Y.- x�- %�' S`,-'� elf , "• `.-Y'd" $6 94 �. .. 7A 3C .. .« 5 Efride nee £ Wa d 3� � .-'i ,.. ,a ik.� z King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes, Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons $56.44 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water Kip �i`,�x lower i= qu3prre e .r7517A e c lain *dergtoun e King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over 90 Metric Tons $58.10 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer Et Water ng _ . : 9 Or1 Cl#�Ce t ,'M ki: .are tb,s • ,, r 564 7A F 3t P P King Power Equipment Operators- Spreader, Topsider Et Screedman $56.94 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer &t Water K ng dower gUip tncirgr ©iandu5 King Power Equipment Operators - Tower Bucket Elevators $56.00 7A 3C 8P" Underground Sewer Et Water Kin Powercr iii dmenrato erakrteU T X175' 1ri htlaseTol g $ 51 7A :'C , 8+ ' un ew rider rod "Ser. er& 'fit N King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Crane: over 175' through 250' in height, base to boom $58.10 7A 3C 8P Underground Sewer &t Water King Po rer;Equ_ipment (perk er Canes. over 5t' in h —el`� 58:67 7A Y 8 Underground Sewer`1Natr'kTII King Power Equipment Operators- Transporters, All Track Or $56.94 7A 3C 8P City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 66 RFB # 15 -012 2015 Underground Sewer Et Water uck Type King Power Equipment Operators - Underground Sewer E Water Trenching Machines $56.00 7A King Power Equipment Operators - Underground Sewer Ft Water Truck Crane Oiler /driver - 100 Tons And Over $56.44 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators- Jnderground Sewer I Water Truck Crane Oiler /driver Under 100 Tons $56.00 7A 3C 8P King Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer a Water Truck Mount Portable Conveyor $56.44 7A 3C 8P PoweryEquipment°' iperatOrs -i Underground' Sewer ate King Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer a Water Wheel Tractors, Farman Type $53.57 7A 3C 8P Power Eciuip t' Underground ewe King Roofers Journey Level $45.71 5A 3H King King Sheet Metal Workers Journey Level (Field or Shop) $72.83 7F 1E King King Sign'` °r 5In :all'ers Et€ call Sign Makers £t Installers (Non- Electrical) Sign Maker $33.25 King Surveyors Assistant Construction Site Surveyor $56.00 7A 3C 8P King; ry eyors King Surveyors Construction Site Surveyor $56.94 7A 3C 8P King Truck Drivers Asphalt Mix Over 16 Yards (W. WA -Joint Council 28) $49.85 5D 3A 8L King Truck Drivers Dump Truck &t Trailer $49.85 5D King Truck Drivers 3A 8L Other Trucks (W. WA -Joint Council 28) $49.85 5D 3A 8L King Drivers ins City of Federal Way Town Square Park RFB ver. 4 -15 Page 67 RFB # 15 -012 2015 DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC BUILDINGS ADDENDUM NO. B -1 Federal Way Town Square Park Phase 4 — Buildings RFB #15 -012 Project: Federal Way Town Square Park Buildings, Phase 4 Bid Date: Thursday, January 7, 2016, 2 PM PST Addendum Date: December 23, 2015' Sent From: City of Federal Way, Owner Sent Via: David A. Clark Architects, PLLC TO ALL PLANHOLDERS OF RECORD: Notice is hereby given to all planholders of record on this date that the following Addendum shall supplement and supersede (if in conflict) all affected portions of the contract on the above referenced project. Acknowledge the receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Proposal. Failure to do so may subject the Bidder to disqualification. All items shown in strikeout have been removed from the specifications or drawings and all items shown as underlined have been added to the specifications or drawings. Bold type is added for emphasis only. Please note this addendum applies only to the phase noted above. DRAWINGS: 1. Sheet A -101 ENLARGED SITE PLAN: Concrete Paving is clarified per ASK -4.2 and 4.3. 2. Sheet A -102 PLANS: Foundation Plan: Revise per ASK -4.1. Contractor to provide 4'x6'x 3" deep recess in slab for chemical storage cabinet sump. Spray Park Contractor to provide exact dimensions and location. 3. Sheet E000 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN: Provide a 1 -1/2 pvc conduit for future security cameras from area near electrical panel to pull box to be located within 3' of new power transformer. Conduit may be placed in same trenching used for secondary power conduits to building. 4. Sheet E100 RESTROOM BUILDING ELECTRICAL PLAN: Contractor to eliminate EF -2 from scope of work. Contractor to add conduit, circuits, and wiring to provide power to 2 separate chemical storage cabinet exhaust fans installed by Spray Park Contractor. Provide std. box for rotary speed controller with on/off switch (provided by Spray Park Contractor). Make all connections necessary. Exhaust fans to be "Fantech FR100 ", 120V. 5. Sheet M -100 Mechanical Schedules: Delete EF -2 from fan schedule 6. Sheet M -102 Mechanical Floor Plans: Delete EF -2 from Floor Plan -HVAC 7. Add Sheet G101, General Structural Notes, attached. 8. Add Sheet A501, ADA sheet, attached. SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Section 051200 Structural Steel Framing- Delete paragraph 2.1.D and F: . „ And « 2. Section 087100 Finish Hardware- Alter paragraph 3.8, DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS - HW01- to add 1EA- Office Lockset- 45H7AB14R626LHR- StanleyBest. Provide Best cylinder. 3. Section 087100 Finish Hardware- Alter Paragraph 3.8 -DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS - HW02- Delete "1 EA OFFICE LOCK 45H7A11R Schlage" END OF ADDENDUM NO. B -1 (five attachments follow) 0 U U 33017 134TH AVENUE SOUTH, AUBURN, WA 98092 -8519. TEL 253.351.8877 A Washington Professional Limited Liability Company Licensed and Registered Architects in Arizona, California, Colorado, Hawaii, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Texas and Washington PROVIDE CORNER REINFORCEMENT PER DETAIL 1/A502, TYP 19'-10" Jai HATCHING INDICATES APPROX. 2x6 P.T. SILL LOCATION(A.B. PER 5" CL. 51-1EAR WALL SCHEDULE). FOR DO NOT PLACE AB'SBRICK, IN DOOR OPENINGS TYP, - SEE FLOOR PLAN. DROP SLAB 3" FOR 4'x6' SUMP THICKENED SLAB AS REQUIRED. CAULKED CONTROL JOINTS, TYP U U HICKENED EDGE`. (041. 4) *4 CONT. TYP. CJ ONCRETE SLAB ON RADE W/ FIBERMESH 4 6X6 W 1.4X1.4 WWF o/ R -10 RIGID INSULATION moo/ 6" CRUSHED ROCK U ICJ PROVIDE y IN A502 / TS PER I DETAIL 8/A -502. FFE 444.50' CJ �r 6 BACK OF O' HM FRAMEt BACK OF cn \ -1M FRAME= BACK OF `t HM FRAMES `C1 BACK OF. cn HM FRAME ' ACK OF eiNM FRAME BACK OF m 411HM FRAME. FOUNDATION FLAN l I/8" = I' -0" DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC 33017 134th Avenue SE Auburn, WA 98092 -8519 Tel 253 351 -8877 Fax 253 804 -6566 Name of Project: Federal Way Town Square Addendum #1 - Phase 4 Buildings Date: 12/23/15 ASK -4.1 REGULAR CONC. DY BUILDING CONTRACTOR 4•TNICK REGULAR CONCRETE PAVING u/ 6x6, W.4 dJL4 UNL o/ GRAMJLAR PILL PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS AR INDICATED. SPRAY PARK ADA CURB CUT WTN TIRNCATED WIER (N CONTRACT) ESTRO 1/16II = 1I -0I DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC 33017 134th Avenue SE Auburn, WA 98092 -8519 Tel 253 351 -8877 Fax 253 804 -6566 Name of Project: Federal Way Town Square Addendum #1 - Phase 4 Buildings Date: 12/23/15 ASK -4.2 DUMMY RAKE JOINT LINE e EDGES, TYP. 0 °1:12 5LbFE TRUNCATED o °000 DOME 10!1J c 4 .CJ a REGULAR CONC. BY BUILDING CONTRACTOR 6" THICK REGULAR CONCRETE PAVING w/ 6x6, W1.4xW1.4 WWF o/ GRANULAR FILL. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS AS INDICATED. CONTRACTOR SHALL EXCAVATE AS NEEDED FOR NEW CONCRETE. EX. EXTRUDED CURB PERVIOUS PAVING, NIC. (3) NEW BOLLARDS 4 SLEEVES, FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR PERVIOUS PAVING, NIG. ENLAIRGEED fSLAN 1/8" = l' -m" DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC Name of Project: Federal Way Town Square 33017 134th Avenue SE Auburn, WA 98092 -8519 Tel 253 351-8877 Fax 253 804 -6566 Addendum #1 - Phase 4 Buildings Date: 12/23/15 ASK -4.3 �y9�y Q Q w eo- QLL U U o_ 03 J 04 Ill l flu 1161; {jl it ll 1 I 1 I l t get t� =.. lQ it t 1 fja Oh :Alt i /Hi a �eBJS .1sg psRit Rm lQ$a mans .9±1 ;� 3g 1 &lR MpggR i 4i 1ga � xi e eii n �Y�Q!'! 5 ��� /111 is ;1� 's WTI 1198 y ;t:`lgr. ei n 211111 l 811E 81 x 3 g IgiA �: lg € E p$rin a9.B4o /.1 ikRq Q 9 a �r 1 8 g g ce 4 II E. •1 1 g g9� ��3a II g$ e$ ! =oil '.11 it. q ! ggp R°'3Y ill r 1 l p 1.11ERg IR$S it ow.: ti!v i s ell .1 11 ok ' °2 i a'R; 4 „p i!!!I !, i i s. ' !IId 1 i /s ,, , 1$ hag; 3 3 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES R 1419 E Ra W §M§YY = i E @e yge a 2•,22 mg41 "44 Pi:19 4!0§J Pt liPIO 9n�S ¢$ s`� °$ gxo °5 a MN* ��, 4A 4$16 leg =1 g 4(g;ie1 1: §i;9* $ :1 IMito 2 � c§ n.1 f° 8 i $° SS E i'v"�" §` E eg Y 2IP2 !R� 9' }�}9 ky 1•ei 9z 2 018:111! R- 1 4,44; 242449 Z n� a� S .511 n .1i §in$ ,H g'l :° a 8�=3A3 iiig ' �e i i� s E4� � $ q �5 ���$ 6 �� 1� .1g$�g p ? Q iD R 1 1711 3 : O 115 -p 49; 1 1° goy Ihtit 1214 "1.1 ,§i3pg V1111, ;Eil!:i g gi2)1 I� ;_,it- 3Ig 141. ed $s I'd iiPig: ;_ 1i $1 " gi Sr E aggt g1_ }iilli $ it i IYiiIPI 1§11 1 ^118 1 r3 � �tp t zE 9;h � 1.1. 1E S it ; ea�R g it 1 11 1 dirt 1i 1i n -a 2 9 /i ' i 511 1 9 S E Dili it 21 -0t R! g i �i� 1112 a W. 1 ids p8 . 1 i�i�°39 0I fy � ! y "aii �G�i;ge 1n §�! �7aI$�jl[8E6Y9 ���1 $ ,oil R !id h Y 1 I III tti Ostiil ¢¢ii1i ,718a191�il3 iii pp 4S t a r x11 �^ t R! e • =IP.g b 33 ! is Ii'q s3 $lli ° g :3.1 . 1 'Il ejl Ni lihlay On � �e� $3' g � "s$ �i�� iSaE yp1 � � $ E Iliilill �� bilthm �� .1����$ RR 7i � 9t�� 1F iJ ���]� �7 ! 3 '� to ��i�i�' y�1011111!!!!.t e to!, Yili[ rg1.4n`y B i 1 j� �:Q� an y livi m € ��" 9 se 111 • 1 i c_€ 'r 1g 811 ke 8E r @ E E °o 1i y n,1 gE$e g ° g 44 E 11 ;;;: akke l ;tl}tl} yy g fE �yy �1e jpp3 K �yyg, g . , ' i 3 ii i 9 Y eJ ` :.P1 i • i DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC BUILDINGS ADDENDUM NO. B -2 Federal Way Town Square Park Phase 4 — Buildings RFB #15 -012 Project: Federal Way Town Square Park Buildings, Phase 4 Bid Date: Thursday, January 7, 2016, 2 PM PST Addendum Date: January 5, 2016 Sent From: City of Federal Way, Owner Sent Via: David A. Clark Architects, PLLC TO ALL PLANHOLDERS OF RECORD: Notice is hereby given to all planholders of record on this date that the following Addendum shall supplement and supersede (if in conflict) all affected portions of the contract on the above referenced project. Acknowledge the receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Bid Proposal. Failure to do so may subject the Bidder to disqualification. All items shown in strilkeettt have been removed from the specifications or drawings and all items shown as underlined have been added to the specifications or drawings. Bold type is added for emphasis only. Please note this addendum applies only to the phase noted above. DRAWINGS: 1. Sheet A -102 PLANS: Floor Plan: Revise per ASK -4.5. 2. Sheet A -202 ENLARGED RESTROOM PLANS: Replace entire sheet with revised. 3. Sheet A -103 PICNIC SHELTER FLOOR PLANS: Foundation Plan: Revise per ASK -4.4. 4. Sheet A -502 DETAILS: Revise Interior Wall Detail 14 to add 'A" x 4 -1/2" expansion bolts at bottom plate (48" oc, 12" from ends). Install web stiffeners ea side of every other TJI above wall. Add Simpson STCT clip each side of TJI and fasten with 4ea #12 X 1 -1/2" pan head screws. 5. Sheet A -503 PICNIC SHELTER DETAILS: Detail 3- Section at Middle Post: Eliminate reference to Simpson CCQ76SD S25. Post beam connection as shown in Detail 9. See ASK 4.6. 6. Sheets A -502, A -503 GREEN ROOF EAVE AND GUTTER DETAILS: Perimeter roof ballast edge restraint provided (furnished and installed) by Contractor. Owner to provide (furnish and install) all "L" shaped Roof Garden perforated ballast restraint. Install "T" edge restraint per ASK - 4.7 & 4.8 and as specified. 7. Sheet M -102, Mechanical Floor Plans: Modify the Plumbing Waste and Vent Piping, Water, and Riser Diagram to reflect the revision on ASK -4.5. 8. Sheet E -100- GENERAL NOTES: Clarifications- The service panel bussing may be aluminum. Branch breakers may be series rated. Provide all breakers listed on panel schedule. SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Section 075419 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING: 1.1 Modify paragraph 1.01 to read as follows: "A. Scope: To install an adhered thermoplastic membrane waterproofing system with integral flashings and other components. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Substrate Preparation 2. Vapor Barrier 3. Cover Board 4. Waterproofing Membrane 5. Membrane Flashings 6. Metal Flashings 7. Drainage Composite 0 U U E 33017 134TH AVENUE SOUTH, AUBURN, WA 98092 -8519. TEL 253.35(8877 A Washington Professional Limited Liability Company Licensed and Registered Architects in Arizona, California, Colorado, Hawaii, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Texas and Washington Addendum No. B -2 Federal Way Town Square Park January 5, 2015 Page 2 of 2 8. Sealants and Adhesives 9. "T" shape edge restraint at perimeter Edge Restraints B. Work NOT in contract 1. Providing or Installation of Soil and Vegetative Cover 2. Providing or Installation Stone ballast 3. Interior "L" shaped perforated restraint" 1.2 Add paragraph 2.02.0 to read as follows: "C. Perimeter "T" shaped edge restraint as fabricated by Olympic Sheet Metal, Lacey WA. Tel 360- 491 -1123 or approved equal." 2. Add Section 108800 — Toilet Accessories 3. Alter Table of Contents to include section 108800, Toilet Accessories. END OF ADDENDUM NO. B -2 Six pages follow (ASK -4.4 through 4.8, 5 pages; and specification section 108800, 1 page) David A. Clark Architects, PLLC is a Washington Professional Limited Liability Company Licensed and Registered Architects in Arizona, California, Colorado, Hawaii, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Texas and Washington 5' -0 "SQ x 15" DP FOOTING w/ (5) "5 EW TOP 4 BOT., TYP. (4) LOCATIONS. 40' -0" 00 20' -0" 19' -4" pu "WALED CJ 4" SLAB ON W14 X W14 1 ' ANGLED CJ L 4" CLR, TYP. •, 4' -0 "SQ x 15" DP FOOTING w/ (4) 65 EW TOP 4 BOT., T (2) LOCATIONS. 20' -0 66YYiI.E POET 19' -4" L` JF2 W E W/ FIBERMESH 6X6 OVER 4" BASE COURSE FFE 442 6' 8" CJ DUNE) AT ION FL A\ ANGLED CJ CJ 1 1i n I t4D 1 L`` 2J 1/8" = 1' -0" DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC 33017 134th Avenue SE Auburn, WA 98092 -8519 Tel 253 351 -8877 Fax 253 804 -6566 Name of Project: Federal Way Town Square Addendum #2 - Phase 4 Buildings Date: 1/04/16 ASK -4.4 I9' -0" P80 6' - 4" 8'- 14" 5" BRICKLEDGE -� FOR VENEER WAINSCOT, TYP WARD TROWEL FINISH CONCRETE FLOORING 2x4 DRINKING FOUNTAINS SEE 4201 FOR REQ'D. MOUNTING HEIGHT NO PLYWOOD WEST SIDE OF THIS 2x6 WALL oe A202 A502 A502 FL 001R FLAN DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC 33017 134th Avenue SE Auburn, WA 98092 -8519 Tel 253 351 -8877 Fax 253 804 -6566 1 /S" = 1' -0" Name of Project: Federal Way Town Square Addendum #2 - Phase 4 Buildings Date: 1/04/16 ASK -4.5 8d m • OW In% 44 SIMPSON RBC e 24" o.c. BIRD'S MOUTH CUT • RAFTER SEAT 2x BLOCK GLU -LAM BEAM PER PLAN 5x5 HSS (3sEcTIcN e MIDDLE FOST 3/4 " =1' -o" DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC Name of Project: Federal Way Town Square 33017 134th Avenue SE Auburn, WA 98092 8519 Addendum #2 - Phase 4 Buildings Date: 1/04/16 - Tel 253 351-8877 Fax 253 804 -6566 ^ ASK-4.6 GUTTER 2xS WB Z,_0„ ROOF GARDEN PERFORATED EDGE RESTRAINT, NIC 5/4x6 (6 PICNIC SHELTER) OR 5/4x10 (6 RESTROOM) W CAULK We. SEAM FASCIA OVER LVL 4" ROOF GARDEN SOIL (NIC). 60 MIL, FULLY - ADHERED LOOSE LAID PVC ROOF DRAIN PANEL '/a" ADHERED DENS -DECK BOARD OVER II/8" PT T4G PLYWOOD (OSB NOT ALLOWED) APPROVED MASTIC, TYPICAL =,4VF GUTTER DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC Name of Project: Federal Way Town Square 33017 134th Avenue SE Auburn, WA 98092 Addendum #2 - Phase 4 Buildings Date: 1/04/16 -8519 Tel 253 351 -8877 Fax 253 804 -6566 Tj ASK-4.7 - SARNAFIL FLASHING STRIP, HOT /AIR WELDED. __SOIL, NIC PER ROOF PL 2x8 WHITEBD FASCIA CAULK SEAM FLASH 3.125x12 GLU -LAM RIM L9m EA. RAFTER MrIP WAIr MARIMAI A43 MOM 11..Na2 MAW (2) - 5x5 HSS 5.125x12 GLU -LAM RAFTERS AT 24" OC 6 -3/4" X IS" GLU -LAM BEAM POST- I5EAM- RAFTER DETAIL (GREEN ROOF) =11 -0" DAVID A. CLARK ARCHITECTS, PLLC Name of Project: Federal Way Town Square 33017 134th Avenue SE Auburn, WA 98092 -8519 Tel 253 351-8877 Fax 253 804 -6566 Addendum #2 - Phase 4 Buildings Date: 1/04/16 ASK -4.8 SECTION 108800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: Submit six (3) copies of shop drawings or Manufacturer's literature for all items of this section for Architect's approval prior to ordering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials: A. Hand dryers - Fastaire — Murdock Super Secur -Model 1118 -3. Provide one each restroom for a total of 3. C. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Provided and installed by Owner D. Grab Bars: Shall be Model No. B -5806 Grab Bars, as manufactured by Bobrick, Inc., or approved equal. Sizes & configuration shall be as indicated on the drawings. Three required for each HC toilet stall. G. Soap Dispenser: Shall be supplied and installed by the Owner. H. Mirrors: Shall be as supplied and installed by Owner. I. Diaper Changing Station: Shall be KB -100 as manufactured by Koala Kare Products, or approved equal. One required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation: A. Installation: Installation of all toilet accessories shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals. B. Mounting Heights: Shall be in accordance with the International Building Code and the requirements of Washington State Regulations (WAC 51 -20). END OF SECTION 108800 Section 108800 -1 Toilet Accessories e ' 9 a 0 0 A A E p m r 99 m z 0 m N m my Dn m F w • 1 SYMBOL LEGEND 11 | ! | | Vf ! R. ■ h h § ( a'3A Vx k |� LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 9 8 3 EEI k tif %; Panel MOP I PANEL SCHEDULE IMO., renanw +r wra+u+w� .e 2YNN..Wh.�W. eM MCS. MOM= si 1 1 .. " _ =;;si : ®. 74 WI 3: s ; ° °° g•°°• i# ss s €s =gig¢ Fs$ ° °°p �$ °.., II"' °$' °° i °.° . : „ #,. 6a11Emlillrl11111sm Iiiii ihIIIiiIIIIIi 111111311111111111111 - iSCE::::::uiIu IiIII I iiHhICiiiII 971m111iulIlIIl1l11m 1I1hI lIIG1i011101: € IOIIII:fl011mm9Cllmm IlII IIInnlIIIIl $ w 11 F .ICIII318GGIGfl0= ,:: I Ili i FEEDER SCHEDULE - ALUM INUM (AL) 2 DETAIL NOTES OE S,.i 7pg. $1 yp r- i 9 E 512 m5 6 a 5 g gtgli gE g GROUNDING DETAIL 8 9 1I 9 0 RISER DIAGRAM RESTROOM ELECTRICAL PLAN 41■N Ak gri ■ . si��� :ice %1.1:�L�� Sr�11�[!_ « _IBM NV-id )NI1 20 42172 -13d NVld =71\1114deld OOZ1 Nb'1d OOd (;-;s- LJ ©© HP; MI pFs a 8 T 3 I A 1A 1 EI A?.rF r igh zi pl.::; �5agal R14:1.: Ii 'it), Bkd u g u II 4 (;-;s- LJ it; • ■ '111 41 1 $0iih11 il l:441, 4 6, •.4Si1114:1 1S,•'/',' Al � , 0 t'1 1,11 k -E- -E— + rl i7, � 41 E 4 4 110 ti' is 1 � ,� f E E '� : fv i 4 4 4 II .0 yyyyyy r1. 4 x1Irk gtr,0 E 4 4 141 • ' 14 1'441 q•1 %, E 4 4 NIA 1•1 E E E 1'A 641 4 E 4 l.., f f f .f•,1 f E E Y11� 'yI E t E ' E k f .11 E f �^1' 'i'41 E R f E' -,A f f E ell f �„ E E 1.41 111111 E E 1i it E .11111 f IIEF�Q E +AP'E� 0.,41 ��1 t.µ11 I4.4 11} 1 E E k -4. E kp rE t•1' E k t ,/t tD''f_ • E to f f Y F t'4' f f E ! _ ._ 14% 14 ,r t . )1 4, 4E f E 141 4 4 4 '∎ 41 11 . ', 11 * E 'k ' . 1', (1 •1 S� r1 qv, E_ - 44 4.gtr r��OWIl•q iirll�E•EiEIETf•{Ot ri,��uArt, {:104 U a 2 a "o D r-, 1 ' l.- i 111 ©© HP; MI ®i yy R NO d••• • M. 1 EI ■E ,_1 1. _ — Bkd u g u II 4 MOE F f 1.1 F f F F P f • b R IL DM p� 1 _� • L 1 � V 6E it; • ■ '111 41 1 $0iih11 il l:441, 4 6, •.4Si1114:1 1S,•'/',' Al � , 0 t'1 1,11 k -E- -E— + rl i7, � 41 E 4 4 110 ti' is 1 � ,� f E E '� : fv i 4 4 4 II .0 yyyyyy r1. 4 x1Irk gtr,0 E 4 4 141 • ' 14 1'441 q•1 %, E 4 4 NIA 1•1 E E E 1'A 641 4 E 4 l.., f f f .f•,1 f E E Y11� 'yI E t E ' E k f .11 E f �^1' 'i'41 E R f E' -,A f f E ell f �„ E E 1.41 111111 E E 1i it E .11111 f IIEF�Q E +AP'E� 0.,41 ��1 t.µ11 I4.4 11} 1 E E k -4. E kp rE t•1' E k t ,/t tD''f_ • E to f f Y F t'4' f f E ! _ ._ 14% 14 ,r t . )1 4, 4E f E 141 4 4 4 '∎ 41 11 . ', 11 * E 'k ' . 1', (1 •1 S� r1 qv, E_ - 44 4.gtr r��OWIl•q iirll�E•EiEIETf•{Ot ri,��uArt, {:104 U a 2 a "o D r-, 1 ' l.- i 111 • .�1 CD ©� ®i yy R NO 9 1 EI ,_1 1. Bkd u g u II 4 n ..+a _ • .�1 its . 4 ICD HIM apt in 0 i •if - -I r — I I _ NJ I� I L— a \ oo I a ( I p I , 'J Lq g R C U C LJ ] C-3 yy Oz e, CD @` • x L Ei I I I o L _.1 II \. .a J q c L 2 s 1 E S 5 1112 no'. q R S 5 �ioa+I— 1 1 q�� L_ —J ,5,7 I�ooef LJ i a \ ( l� V , ] C-3 yy 1 7 .,k,1 1 @` • x s 1 E S 5 1112 no'. q R S 5 ,5,7 C 7 231 2 1 ■ ■ ■ 4N3931 Aa>I NOIlb'n313 % j q |2 \ |§` 1 I Pi ELEVATION KEYNOTES Iu g ; D a iFi A; Jb Ad 5§40 gAllaRngrigIlln Rae11 k y lit 9 N 0 0 m 11 O sNO117 IA398V X3C•1 LJ•Ifi1Vela b f. r 1V13N39 z O m N dVW ,l1INIDIA l!gi 1 PP F api J i VI A 1311HOzIV 0 A ?J33NIVN3 1VOINVHn3W NaaNI=7N3 1I1 3 ttit s,11. 51%t R Cam^ n A ' w Q'£AA i, , i %R a Iq a g� p f „f * �� slit tom€ t I R ARn tn r, r„ s A t % %At $4 10% - >V sA t i 9 a 5 1 tor; tv„.1 cn A.1 t i oiot F A 9 a It$ A 5 4 201118d dY711 HUN 6) Pr. le gF. el 1---- ,. • ,...- g T. fil l'2 42 8r- OF 6.2;'1 | -n ) X1 a § . • : IR` 1 1 NORTH ELEVATION SOUTH ELEVATION ^ z EAST ELEVAT � x SECTION A 1 � 1 1 � ( } se | § § � 0 w 0 4 \ j 0 0 j ) 4 \ % 2 § oa 0! A g( |■ | z. 2| § te RAMING DETA LM 111 ;'� : 3 e ■ t ? ? g `ii - -.�� � ;.4 0 1 / I §| / i | | ! || P!| § ; ! . 1 1 5 12h AU § Se Wag tVggl MIDDLE POST z 0 zr (1) MIDDLE POST 1=2111110111111111111 z 1— Lu 0 cx w L 0 EI (.1) t 0_ 2 Corporations: Registration Detail AMERICAN GUARANTEED ROOFING & CONSTRUCTION, INC. UBI Number 603016567 Category Profit/Nonprofit Active /Inactive State Of Incorporation WA Filing Date Expiration Date Inactive Date Duration Registered Agent Information Agent Name Address City State ZIP Special Address Information Address Page 1 of 1 Active WA 05/24/2010 05/31/2016 MATTHEW SPEIGHTS 210521ST AVENUE CT NW GIG HARBOR WA 983357955 Governing Persons Title President ,Secretary,Treasurer,Chairman Name SPEIGHTS, MATT Address P O BOX 2420 GIG HARBOR, WA 98335 http: / /www.sos.wa.gov /corps /search_detail.aspx ?ubi= 603016567 2/11/2016